Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
AMFASOFT CORPORATION (2)
INSURANCE ON FILE WORK MAY PROCEED UNTIL INnS AN�CE�pES (� CITY CLERK DATE: JUL 13 2023 AGREEMENT FOR WORKFORCE TRAINING A-2023-069-18 gGOAl�itrty) THIS SUBAWARD AGREEMENT "A reement" ( g ), made and entered into this 1st (�IBI day of July, 2023, by and between the City of Santa Ana, a charter city and municipal corporation duly organized and existing under the Constitution and laws of the State of California ("CITY") and Amfasoft Corporation for -profit identified by the assigned Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) Number (033531332) ("CONTRACTOR"). RECITALS: A. CITY has been designated a Local Workforce Development Area (LWDA) under the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act of 2014, Public Law 1-113-128 ("WIOA" or "the Act"), Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance (CFDA) Number 17.258, 17.278, 17.259 and Federal Award Identification Number (FAIN) AA363092155A6. B. The State of California has created the LWDA to administer the Act programs operated by the State of California pursuant to the Act. C. As a LWDA, CITY is entitled to receive Federal funds to establish programs to increase the employment, retention and earnings of participants, and increase occupational skills attainment by participants, and as a result, improve the quality of the workforce, reduce welfare dependency, and enhance the productivity and competitiveness of the nation. Under WIOA, participants in need of training services may access career training through a list of state -approved schools and their training programs. D. In addition to WIOA, the CITY received funding from the Orange County Social Services Vocational Training grant funded through the California Work Opportunity and Responsibility to Kids Act of 1997, which provides monies for the basic needs of families with children ("CaIWORKs" or "SSA"). An important component of CaIWORKS allows for the provision of employment services for parents. Heads of households are provided job training services to help families upgrade job skills with the ultimate goal of self-sufficiency. E. The CITY intends to utilize the WIOA and SSA Grant Funds to operate a Workforce Training Program in which vocational training courses will be made available to Qualified Participants ("Workforce Training Program"). Qualified Participants are those individuals that are permitted to participate under the Act and approved to participate under the City's Workforce Training Program ("Qualified Participants"). Pursuant to the Workforce Training Program, the CITY desires to contract with public and private organizations, including employers, who are qualified to participate in the CITY's Workforce Training Program by providing services to Qualified Participants (each, a "Qualified Contractor"). F. CONTRACTOR is a Qualified Contractor that has been selected as one of several vendors that qualified to provide workforce training under the Workforce Training Program. G. CONTRACTOR represents that it is knowledgeable in its field, and is Page 1 of 19 willing to provide workforce training services under the Workforce Training Program pursuant to applicable Federal and California laws. H. The CITY and CONTRACTOR (each, a "Party" and jointly, the "Parties") desire to enter into this Agreement so that CONTRACTOR may receive a subgrant of the proceeds of the WIOA and/or SSA Grants (hereinafter defined as the "Subgrant") in consideration for CONTRACTOR's participation in the CITY's WIOA and/or SSA Programs and provision of services to Qualified Participants upon the request of the CITY. WHEREFORE, for and in consideration of the respective and mutual covenants and promises hereinafter contained and made, and subject to all the terms and conditions hereof, the Parties hereto do hereby agree as follows: I. CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS A. In compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall provide the CONTRACTOR's Services, as authorized by the CITY's Representative, CONTRACTOR represents and warrants that CONTRACTOR's Services to be provided hereunder shall be performed in a competent, professional and satisfactory manner in accordance with the CITY's Workforce Training Program. B. CONTRACTOR agrees to provide benefits to individuals who participate in the activities and services funded by this Agreement ("Participants") in accordance with the standards and requirements set forth in this Agreement. C. CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that CITY shall request that CONTRACTOR provide the CONTRACTOR's Services on an "as requested" basis and that CITY does not guaranty a minimum number of Qualified Participants for whom CONTRACTOR's Services shall be requested and required under this Agreement. CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that CONTRACTOR shall not commence to provide CONTRACTOR's Services to a particular Qualified Participant hereunder unless and until CONTRACTOR receives a Notice to Proceed from the CITY authorizing the provision of CONTRACTOR's Services to that particular Qualified Participant. CONTRACTOR further acknowledges and agrees that this Agreement and any request for the provision of services hereunder is nonexclusive and that the CITY may enter into similar agreements with other entities for the provision of similar services, D. Time is of the essence in the performance of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall perform and complete all of CONTRACTOR's Services in a timely and expeditious manner. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for delays caused by circumstances beyond its reasonable control, provided that CONTRACTOR has delivered to the CITY written notice of the cause of any such delay within ten (10) days of the occurrence of such cause. E. Scope of Services. On an as -needed basis, and at the sole discretion of CITY, CONTRACTOR shall perform the services that are described in Exhibit A. The Scope of Services shall include the CONTRACTOR's proposal or bid, if any, which shall be incorporated herein by this reference as though fully set forth herein. In the event of any inconsistency between the terms Page 2 of 19 of such proposal and this Agreement, the terms of this Agreement shall govern. Specific allocation of services may be changed at the discretion of the CITY and upon mutual agreement of the Parties. F. Compliance with Law. CONTRACTOR's Services shall be provided in accordance with all ordinances, resolutions, statutes, rules, regulations and laws of the CITY and any Federal, State or local governmental agency of competent jurisdiction. G. CONTRACTOR shall obtain, at CONTRACTOR's sole cost and expense, such licenses, permits and approvals as may be required by law for the performance of CONTRACTOR's Services. CONTRACTOR shall have the sole obligation to pay for any fees, assessments and taxes, plus applicable penalties and interest, which may be imposed by law and which arise from or are necessary for the performance of the services required by this Agreement H. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to all applicable labor standards as required by the Act ("Labor Standards"). I. If funding is through WIOA, CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with the "Complaint Handling Procedures under the WIOA", attached hereto as Exhibit H and incorporated herein as though fully set forth in 20 CFR 658.411. CONTRACTOR shall advise applicants, where applicable, and Qualified Participants of their rights to file complaints under the Act and the procedures for resolution of any complaints. CITY's procedures for handling complaints alleging a violation of the Act, regulations, grants, or other agreements under the Act shall be followed and any decision of CITY, the State or the Federal government relating to the complaint shall be binding and followed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR, who is an employer, shall operate a grievance system that incorporates CITY's procedures for resolution of complaints relating to the terms and conditions of employment; these procedures shall be approved in writing by CITY. J. As a condition of this award of financial assistance under the Act to CONTRACTOR from CITY, CONTRACTOR assures, with respect to operation of all programs or activities funded with funds provided pursuant to the Act, and all agreements or arrangements to carry out such programs or activities, that it will comply fully with the nondiscrimination and equal opportunity provisions of the Act (Section 188) and compliance with Equal Employment Opportunity provisions in Executive Order (E.O.) 11246, as amended by E.O. 11375 and supplemented by the requirements of 41 CFR Part 60; the Nontraditional Employment for Women Act of 1991; Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended; section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended; the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended; the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990; and with all applicable requirements imposed by or pursuant to regulations implementing those laws, including, but not limited to, 29 CFR Parts 33 and 37. The United States, the State of California and CITY have the right to seek judicial enforcement of this assurance. K. CONTRACTOR agrees that no Qualified Participant(s) shall commence training prior to the approval of funding pursuant to Section 123 of the Act, or the approval of S SA funding, as applicable. Page 3 of 19 L. CONTRACTOR agrees to the following accounting, monitoring, auditing, and review requirements: 1. CONTRACTOR agrees to maintain such records and submit such reports, data and information, on the form and containing such information, at such times as CITY may request or require regarding the performance of CONTRACTOR'S services or activities, costs or other data, including but not limited to Qualified Participants' attendance and certifications. 2. CITY, the State of California and the United States government and/or their representatives shall have access for purposes of monitoring, auditing and examining of CONTRACTOR'S activities, performance, and Qualified Participants related to this Agreement. Such agencies or representatives shall also schedule on -site monitoring at their discretion. Monitoring activities may also include, but are not limited to, questioning employees and Qualified Participants and entering any premises or onto any site in which any of the services or activities funded hereunder are conducted or in which any of the records of CONTRACTOR are kept (2 CFR 200.330). Nothing herein shall be construed to require access to any privileged or confidential information as set forth in Federal or state law. 3. In the event CONTRACTOR does not make the above -referenced documents available within the City of Santa Ana, California, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay all necessary and reasonable expenses incurred by CITY in conducting any audit at the location where said records and books of account are maintained. 4. All accounting records and evidence pertaining to all costs of CONTRACTOR and all documents related to this Agreement shall be kept available at the location where CONTRACTOR conducted the program, as well as in the County of Orange, for the duration of this Agreement and thereafter for three (3) years after completion of an audit. Records which relate to (a) complaints, claims, administrative proceedings or litigation arising out of the performance of this Agreement, or (b) costs and expenses of this Agreement to which CITY, the State of California or the United States Government take exception, shall be retained beyond the three (3) years until resolution of disposition of such appeals, litigation, claims, or exceptions. M. Without prejudice to any other section of this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall, where applicable, maintain the confidential nature of information provided to it concerning Qualified Participants in accordance with the requirements of Federal and state law. Notwithstanding the foregoing, CONTRACTOR agrees to submit to CITY, the State of California and/or the United States Government or their representatives, all records requested for administrative purposes, including audits, examinations, monitoring and verification of records submitted by CONTRACTOR, costs incurred and services rendered hereunder. N. CONTRACTOR shall not expend funds pursuant to this Agreement to provide services to any Qualified Participant where costs of training are paid for by any other person or entity. Page 4 of 19 O. If funding is through WIOA, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Uniform Guidance 2 CFR Part 200 of the U.S. Office of Management and Budget (OMB) and all other applicable Federal statutes and executive orders and their implementing regulations, including regulations at 29 CFR Part 97. P. If funding is through WIOA, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of Federal regulations found at 29 CFR Part 93, which provide that no appropriated funds may be expended by the recipient of a Federal contract, grant, loan or cooperative agreement to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, member of Congress or an officer or employee of a member of Congress in connection with awarding of any Federal contract, the malting of any Federal grant or loan, entering into any cooperative agreement and the extension, renewal, amendment or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan or cooperative agreement. CONTRACTOR shall sign a Certification Regarding Lobbying to that effect in a form as set forth in Exhibit D, attached hereto and by this reference incorporated herein. CONTRACTOR shall submit said signed Certification to CITY prior to performing any of its obligations under this Agreement and prior to any obligation arising on the part of CITY to pay any sums to CONTRACTOR under the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Q. CONTRACTOR agrees to provide a drug -free work place and to execute a Drug Free Workplace Certification as set forth in Exhibit E attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference. R. CONTRACTOR, in accordance with the Child Support Recovery Act of 1992, recognizes and acknowledges the importance of child and family support obligations and shall fully comply with all state and Federal laws relating to child and family support enforcement, including, but not limited to: disclosure of information and compliance with earnings assignment orders, as provided in Chapter 8 (commencing with Section 5200) of Part 5 of Division 9 of the state Fancily Code; and, to the best of its knowledge is fully complying with the earnings assignment orders of all employees and is providing the names of all new employees to the New Employee Registry maintained by the California Employment Development Department (EDD). S. CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with all applicable provisions of the Act or SSA, as applicable, and all applicable Federal regulations, including, but not limited to, the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 2 -Grants and Agreements, Subtitle A —Office of Management and Budget Guidance for Grants and Agreements, as well as all applicable state and local regulations. T. If funding is through WIOA, CONTRACTOR agrees to remain in compliance with the Certification Regarding Debarment, attached hereto as Exhibit F and incorporated herein by reference, as required by the regulations implementing Executive Order 125449, Debarment and Suspension, (2 CFR Part 180). U. If funding is through WIOA, CONTRACTOR agrees to provide priority of services for veterans and eligible spouses pursuant to 20 CFR Part 1010, and the regulations implementing priority of service for veterans and eligible spouses in Department of Labor job Page 5 of 19 training programs under the Jobs for Veterans Act published at 73 Fed. Reg. 78132 on December 19, 2008. V. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the official name for the statewide system of providing employment and training through the WI0A partnerships, SSA, and various other local programs is "America's Job Center". To achieve the goals of this Workforce Training Program, it is important that the public has a quick and easy method to identify that the projects or programs they are taking part in are part of the "America's Job Center". CONTRACTOR agrees to place the America's Job Center logo, in accordance with the State of California guidelines for such use, on all public materials, such as statements, press releases, brochures, advertisements, reports and other documents describing projects or programs funded in whole or in part with WIOA or SSA funds. When the America's Job Center logo is used, CONTRACTOR may accompany it with the following statement, "The (CONTRACTOR) is a proud partner of the America's Job Center network". CONTRACTOR shall not use the America's Job Center logo in any manner that would imply that the State of California endorses a commercial product, service or activity. II. CITY'S OBLIGATIONS A. On July 1, 2023 the CITY was awarded a Department of Labor Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act grant of $2,367,690.00 for fiscal year 2023-2024. In addition, on July 1, 2023, the CITY was awarded an Orange County Social Services Vocational Training grant through the California Work Opportunity and Responsibility to Kids Act of 1997 in the total amount of $838,964.00 for fiscal year 2023-2024. A portion of both grants in a total amount not to exceed $2,500,000.00 shall be available to all Qualified Contractors to provide workforce training classes for Qualified Participants. B. If a Qualified Participant chooses to enroll in a course offered by CONTRACTOR, CITY agrees to pay to CONTRACTOR when, if and to the extent WIOA or SSA funds are received under the provisions of the applicable grants, in accordance with the Course Costs attached hereto as Exhibit B and incorporated herein by reference, which may be amended during the period of this Agreement. Said sum shall be paid with either WIOA or SSA funds, as determined by the CITY in its sole discretion, after CITY receives invoices submitted by CONTRACTOR as provided herein. C. CONTRACTOR has the ability to adjust line item amounts in the Course Costs with the approval of the Executive Director. D. CITY agrees to provide for on -site monitoring reviews of the Workforce Training Program operation at least annually. In addition, monthly desktop reviews of pertinent information will be conducted. E. CITY has the right to de -obligate the funds hereunder, and take such funding back from CONTRACTOR, due to any of the following reasons: (a) lack of performance by CONTRACTOR; (b) lack of fiscal accountability of CONTRACTOR; or (c) decrease in available Page 6 of 19 funding. III. COMPENSATION A. CITY neither warrants nor guarantees any minimum or maximum compensation to CONTRACTOR under this Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall be paid only for actual services performed under this Agreement at the rates and charges identified in Exhibit B. Any compensation payable to CONTRACTOR shall be paid from a portion of the above - referenced WIOA and/or SSA grants awarded to the CITY in a total amount not to exceed $2,500,000.00. B. Payment by CITY shall be made within thirty (30) days following receipt of proper invoice evidencing work performed, subject to CITY accounting procedures. IV. TERM OF AGREEMENT A. This Agreement shall commence on the date stated above and continue through June 30, 2027, with a one-year option to renew executable by the CITY in its sole discretion, unless terminated earlier by either party. The one-year option may be executed, by a writing executed by the City Manager and the City Attorney. B. Unless the CITY authorizes an extension, CONTRACTOR must liquidate all obligations incurred under the Federal award not later than ninety (90) calendar days after the end date of the period of performance as specified in the terms and conditions of the Federal award, as applicable. IV. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR A. CONTRACTOR shall, during the entire term of this Agreement, be construed to be an independent contractor and not an employee of the CITY. This Agreement is not intended nor shall it be construed to create an employer -employee relationship, a joint venture relationship, or to allow the CITY to exercise discretion or control over the professional manner in which CONTRACTOR performs the services which are the subject matter of this Agreement; however, the services to be provided by CONTRACTOR shall be provided in a manner consistent with all applicable standards and regulations governing such services. CONTRACTOR shall pay all salaries and wages, employer's social security taxes, unemployment insurance and similar taxes relating to employees and shall be responsible for all applicable withholding taxes. V. WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S RIGHTS A. CONTRACTOR shall use appropriate funds received from CITY to provide workers' compensation to all those lured by CONTRACTOR under this Agreement. Page 7 of 19 B. CONTRACTOR shall have the right to hire, dismiss, or promote its employees or contract personnel hired under this Agreement so long as its hiring or dismissal policy or standard does not violate Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, or any other applicable law, and CONTRACTOR maintains itself as an Equal Opportunity Employer. VI. APPLICABLE GUIDELINES A. The Parties hereto agree that CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Federal and state laws and regulations, including, but not limited to the Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL) Policy and Procedures WSD21-03 attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by reference, and general program requirements described in Sections 2 and 116 of the Act, and applicable regulations, and the U.S. Department of Labor guidelines and regulations, including amendments or revisions made during the terms of this Agreement. Said applicable laws are hereby incorporated by reference and made part of this Agreement as though fully set forth herein. B. CONTRACTOR also assures and certifies that: 1. CONTRACTOR shall comply with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and in accordance with Title VII of the Act, requiring that no person shall, on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, age, handicap or national origin be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination under this Agreement. 2. CONTRACTOR shall comply with any and all Federal laws limiting the political activity of employees hired under this Agreement. 3. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements that no program under the Act shall involve political activities. 4. RECORD INSPECTION. CONTRACTOR shall provide the U.S. Department of Labor and the Comptroller General, by and through any authorized representative, as well as the California Workforce Development Board ("WDB") Administrative Office, access to and the right to examine all records, books, papers or documents relating to the accounting and use of funds under this Agreement for a three-year period from and after the effective date of this Agreement. 5. No person with responsibilities in the operation of any program under the Workforce Training Program shall discriminate with respect to any Qualified Participant or any application for participation in such program because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, political affiliation or beliefs. 6. CONTRACTOR shall maintain appropriate standards for health and safety in work and training situations. Page 8 of 19 7. CONTRACTOR shall comply with general provisions, assurances, and execute the Assurances and Certifications attached hereto as Exhibit G and incorporated herein. S. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY. Any literature distributed by CONTRACTOR for the purpose of apprising businesses, Qualified Participants, or the general public of its programs under this Agreement shall state that its programs are supported by the City of Santa Ana and the Santa Ana Workforce Development Board, and shall state that the program is an "equal opportunity employer/program" and that "auxiliary aids and services are available upon request to individuals with disabilities." 9. Based on the population eligible to be served, or likely to be directly affected by the program or activity, the services or information may need to be provided in a language other than English in order to allow such population to be effectively informed about or able to participate in the program or activity. Pursuant to 29 CFR 37.35, CONTRACTOR must take reasonable steps to provide services and information in appropriate languages after considering the scope of the program or activity, and the size and concentration of the population that needs services or information in a language other than English. 10. CONTRACTOR certifies that all property, finished or unfinished documents, data, studies and reports prepared or purchased under this Agreement, will be disposed of in accordance with the direction of the CITY. In addition, any tools and/or equipment furnished to the CONTRACTOR by the CITY and/or purchased by the CONTRACTOR with funds pursuant to this Agreement, will be limited to use within the activities outlined in this Agreement and will remain the property of the United States Government and/or CITY. Upon termination of this Agreement, CONTRACTOR will immediately return such tools and/or equipment to the CITY or dispose of them in accordance with the direction of the CITY. 11. CONTRACTOR certifies that this Agreement does not provide for the advancement or aid to any religious sect, church or creed, or sectarian purpose, nor does it help to support or sustain any school, college, university, hospital or other institution controlled by any religious creed, church, or sectarian denomination, as specified by Article XVI, Section 5, of the Constitution of the State of California, regarding separation of church and state. 12. CLEAN AIR ACT / CLEAN WATER ACT. If the grant hereunder exceeds $100,000, CONTRACTOR must comply with the Clean Air Act ("CAA")[(42 USC 7401, et seq.]; the Clean Water Act ("CWA") (33 USC 1368); Executive Order 11738 and United States Environmental Protection Agency ("EPA") regulations (40 CFR Part 35) as any may now exist or be hereafter amended. Under these laws and regulations, the CONTRACTOR assures that: Page 9 of 19 (a) No facility to be utilized in the performance of the proposed grant has been issued a violation from the EPA under the CAA or CWA; (b) It will notify CITY prior to award of the receipt of any communication from the Director, Office of Federal Activities, EPA, indicating that a facility to be utilized for the grant is under consideration for issuance of a violation under the CAA or CWA; and, (c) It will notify the CITY and the EPA about any known violation of the above laws and regulations. 13. CONTRACTOR agrees to adhere to the following STANDARDS OF CONDUCT: (a) General Assurance. Every reasonable course of action will be taken by CONTRACTOR in order to maintain the integrity of this expenditure of public funds and to avoid favoritism. This Agreement will be administered in an impartial manner, free from errors to gain personal, financial, political gain. CONTRACTOR, its officers and employees, in administering this Agreement, will avoid situations, which give rise to a suggestion that any decision was influenced by prejudice, bias, special interest or desire for personal gain. (b) Employment of Former State or CITY Employees. CONTRACTOR will ensure that any of its employees who were formerly employed by the State of California or CITY, in a position that could have enabled such individuals to impact policy regarding or implementation of programs covered by this Agreement, will not be assigned to any part or phase of the activities conducted pursuant to this Agreement for a period of not less than two (2) years following the termination of such employment. (c) Conducting Business Involving Relatives. No relative by blood, adoption or marriage of any executive or employee of CONTRACTOR will receive favorable treatment when considered for enrollment in programs provided by, or employment with, CONTRACTOR. (d) Conducting Business Involving Close Personal Friends and Associates. Executives and employees of CONTRACTOR will be particularly aware of the varying degrees of influence that can be exerted by personal friends and associates and, in administering this Agreement, will exercise due diligence to avoid situations which give rise to an assertion that favorable treatment is being granted to friends and associates. When it is in the public interest for CONTRACTOR to conduct business with a friend or associate of an executive or employee of CONTRACTOR, an elected official in the area or a voting or non -voting member of the Local Workforce Development Board (WDB), a permanent record of the transaction will be retained. Page 10 of 19 (e) Avoidance of Conflict of Economic Interest. No executive or employee of CONTRACTOR elected official in the area, or voting or non -voting member of a WDB, will solicit or accept money or any other consideration from a third person, for the performance of an act reimbursed in whole or part by CONTRACTOR or CITY. Supplies, materials, equipment or services purchased with Agreement funds will be used solely for purposes asserted or allowed under this Agreement. No voting member of the WDB will cast a vote on the provision of services or vote on any matter, which would provide direct financial benefit to that member or any business or organization that the member directly represents. (f) Salary and Bonus Limitations. If CONTRACTOR receives WIOA funds, CONTRACTOR is required to comply with Federal requirements regarding the limitations on salary and bonus payments in accordance with Public Law 109-149, Section 503. VII. HOLD HARMLESS CONTRACTOR agrees to defend, and shall indemnify and hold harmless the CITY, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, special counsel, and representatives from liability: (1) for personal injury, damages, just compensation, restitution, judicial or equitable relief arising out of claims for personal injury, including death, and claims for property damage, which may arise from the negligent operations of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors, agents, employees, or other persons acting on its behalf which relates to the services described in this Agreement; and (2) from any claim that personal injury, damages, just compensation, restitution, judicial or equitable relief is due by reason of the terms of or effects arising from this Agreement. This indemnity and hold harmless agreement applies to all claims for damages, just compensation, restitution, judicial or equitable relief suffered, or alleged to have been suffered, by reason of the events referred to in this Section or by reason of the terms of, or effects, arising from this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to indemnify, hold harmless, and pay all costs for the defense of the CITY, including fees and costs for special counsel to be selected by the CITY, regarding any action by a third party challenging the validity of this Agreement, or asserting that personal injury, damages, just compensation, restitution, judicial or equitable relief due to personal or property rights arises by reason of the terms of, or effects arising from this Agreement. CITY may make all reasonable decisions with respect to its representation in any legal proceeding. VIII. INSURANCE A. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder and the results of that work by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. Page 11 of 19 B. MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMIT OF INSURANCE Coverage shall be at least as broad as: Commercial General Liability (CGL): Insurance Services Office Form CG 00 01 covering CGL on an "occurrence" basis, including products and completed operations, property damage, bodily injury and personal & advertising injury with limits no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location (ISO CG 25 03 or 25 04) or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office Form Number CA 0001 covering, Codel (any auto), or if Consultant has no owned autos, Code 8 (hired) and 9 (non -owned), withlimit no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage. (Not required if CONTRACTOR provides written verification an automobile is not required to perform services.) • Workers' Compensation: as required by the State of California, with Statutory Limits, and Employer's Liability Insurance with limit of no less than $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury or disease. (Not required if CONTRACTOR provides written verification it has no employees.) • Professional Liability (Errors and Omissions) Insurance appropriates to the Consultant's profession, with limit no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence or claim, $2,000,000 aggregate. If the Contractor maintains broader coverage and/or higher limits than the minimums shown above, the Entity requires and shall be entitled to the broader coverage and/or the higher limits maintained by the contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the Entity. C. Other Insurance Provisions The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: Additional Insured Status The Entity, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds on the CGL policy with respect to liability arising out of work or operations performed by or on behalf of the Contractor including materials, parts, or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations. General liability coverage can be provided in the form of an endorsement to the Contractor's insurance (at least as broad as ISO Form CG 20 10 11 85 or if not available, through the addition of both CG 20 10, CG 20 26, CG 20 33, or CG 20 38; and CG 20 37 if a later edition is used). Page 12 of 19 Primary Coverage For any claims related to this contract, the Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary coverage at least as broad as ISO CG 20 01 04 13 as respects the Entity, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Entity, its officers, officials, employees, or volunteers shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. Notice of Cancellation Each insurance policy required above shall provide that coverage shall not be canceled, except with notice to the Entity. Waiver of Subrogation Contractor hereby grants to Entity a waiver of any right to subrogation which any insurer of said Contractor may acquire against the Entity by virtue of the payment of any loss under such insurance. Contractor agrees to obtain any endorsement that maybe necessary to affect this waiver of subrogation, but this provision applies regardless of whether or not the Entity has received a waiver of subrogation endorsement from the insurer. Self -Insured Retentions Self -insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the Entity. The Entity may require the Contractor to purchase coverage with a lower retention or provide proof of ability to pay losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses within the retention. The policy language shall provide, or be endorsed to provide, that the self -insured retention may be satisfied by either the named insured or Entity. Acceptability of Insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers authorized to conduct business in the state with a current A.M. Best's rating of no less than A: VII, unless otherwise acceptable to the Entity. Claims Made Policies (note — should be applicable only to professional liability, see below) If any of the required policies provide claims -made coverage: 1. The Retroactive Date must be shown, and must be before the date of the contract or thebeginning of contract work. 2. ffisurance must be maintained and evidence of insurance must be provided for at least five (5) years after completion of the contract of work. 3. If coverage is canceled or non -renewed, and not replaced with another claims -made policy form with a Retroactive Date prior to the contract effective date, the Contractormust purchase "extended reporting" coverage for a minimum of five (5) years after completion of work. Page 13 of 19 Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the Entity with original Certificates of Insurance including all required amendatory endorsements (or copies of the applicable policy language effecting coverage requiredby this clause) and a copy of the Declarations and Endorsement Page of the CGL policy listing allpolicy endorsements to Entity before work begins. However, failure to obtain the required documents prior to the work beginning shall not waive the Contractor's obligation to provide them. The Entity reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies,including endorsements required by these specifications, at any time. Special Risks or Circumstances Entity reserves the right to modify these requirements, including limits, based on the nature of therisk, prior experience, insurer, coverage, or other special circumstances. IX. CORPORATE STATUS CONTRACTOR shall be in good standing, without suspension by the California Secretary of State, Franchise Tax Board or Internal Revenue Service. Any change in corporate status or suspension shall be reported immediately to CITY. X. ASSIGNABILITY None of the duties of, or work to be performed by, CONTRACTOR under this Agreement shall be subcontracted or assigned to any agency, consultant, or person without the prior written consent of CITY. CONTRACTOR must submit all subcontracts and other agreements that relate to this Agreement to CITY. If receiving WIOA funds, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that it must follow procurement regulations for contractors (2 CFR 200.317). No subcontract or assignment shall terminate or alter the legal obligations of CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement. XI. LAWS GOVERNING THIS AGREEMENT A. In its performance under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall fully comply with the requirements of the following, whether or not otherwise referred to in this Agreement: 1. If receiving WIOA funds, the Act and all applicable Federal statutes, regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including but not limited to, 2 CFR 200 and 20 CFR. Parts 651 and 654 Page 14 of 19 2. All applicable State statutes, regulations, policies, procedures and directives; All applicable CITY policies, procedures and directives; 4. All applicable local ordinances and requirements, including use permits and licensing; Court orders applicable to its operation; and, 6. The terms and conditions of this Agreement. If any of the foregoing is enacted, amended, or revised, CONTRACTOR will comply with such or will notify CITY after enactment or modification that it cannot so comply. CITY may thereupon terminate this Agreement, if necessary. XII. EXCLUSIVITY AND AMENDMENT OF AGREEMENT This Agreement, together with attachments hereto, represents the complete and exclusive statement between the CITY and CONTRACTOR, and supersedes any and all other agreements, oral or written, between the Parties. In the event of a conflict between the terms of this Agreement and any attachments hereto, the terms of this Agreement shall prevail. This Agreement may not be modified except by written instrument signed by the CITY and by an authorized representative of CONTRACTOR. The Parties agree that any terms or conditions of any purchase order or other instrument that are inconsistent with, or in addition to, the terms and conditions hereof, shall not bind or obligate CONTRACTOR or the CITY. Each party to this Agreement acknowledges that no representations, inducements, promises or agreements, orally or otherwise, have been made by any party, or anyone acting on behalf of any party, which is not embodied herein. XIIl. FRAUD CONTRACTOR shall immediately report to CITY all instances and facts concerning possible fraud, abuse or criminal activity relating to expenditure or receipt of funds under this Agreement. XIV. CONTINGENCY OF FUNDS CONTRACTOR acknowledges that approval of and funding for this Agreement is contingent upon State approval, and WIOA and/or SSA funds received or obligated from the State of California to CITY. If such approval of funds is not forthcoming, or is otherwise limited, CITY shall immediately notify CONTRACTOR. Within twenty (20) days of receipt of such notice, CONTRACTOR shall modify or cease operations as directed by CITY and negotiate necessary modification to this Agreement and/or reimbursement of costs incurred hereunder. kAy Page 15 of 19 TERMINATION A. This Agreement may be terminated by either party at its sole discretion, upon thirty (30) days written notice to the other party. Notice shall be deemed served on the date of mailing. However, CONTRACTOR may not terminate this Agreement if undue hardship will result to any Qualified Participant. B. In the event CONTRACTOR defaults by failing to fulfill all or any of its obligations hereunder, CITY may declare a default and termination of this Agreement by written notice to CONTRACTOR, which default and termination shall be effective on a date stated in the notice which is to be not less than ten (10) days after certified mailing or personal service of such notice, unless such default is cured before the effective date of terrination stated in such notice. If terminated for cause, CITY shall be relieved of further liability or responsibility under this Agreement, or as a result of the termination thereof, including the payment of money, except for payment for approved expenses incurred for services satisfactorily and timely performed prior to the mailing or service of the notice of termination, and except for reimbursement of (1) any payments made for services not subsequently performed in a timely and satisfactory manner, and (2) costs incurred by CITY in obtaining substitute performance. XVI. DISPUTES A. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any dispute concerning any question arising under this Agreement shall be decided by CITY. In such a case, CITY shall reduce its decision to writing and mail or otherwise furnish a copy thereof to CONTRACTOR. The decision of the CITY shall be final and conclusive unless within thirty (30) calendar days from the mailing or delivery of such copy, CITY receives from CONTRACTOR written request to appeal said decision. B. If receiving WIOA funds, procedures governing the appeal shall be prescribed by CITY and/or the State of California in accordance with the Act and all corresponding regulations and OMB circulars. Pending final disposition of the appeal, CONTRACTOR shall act in accordance with CITY's decision unless the dispute involves a change order, XVII. BREACH - SANCTIONS A. If, through any cause, CONTRACTOR violates any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, and/or prior agreements whereby grant funds were received by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, or if CONTRACTOR reports inaccurately or if any Audit Report makes disallowances, CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy its acts or omissions and/or repay CITY all amounts due CITY as a result of CONTRACTOR's violation. For any such failures or violations, CITY shall also have the right at its sole discretion to either: (1) discontinue program support until such time as CONTRACTOR fulfills its obligations or remedies all violations of this Agreement or prior agreements; and/or (2) collect outstanding amounts as determined by CITY Page 16 of 19 due CITY by offsetting or debiting from current claims or invoices, if after thirty (30) days' written notice CONTRACTOR has failed to repay same or a repayment schedule has not been made; and/or (3) terminate this Agreement by giving written notice to CONTRACTOR of such termination in accordance the Notices provision in Paragraph XVIII herein below. XVIII. NOTICES All notices, reports and correspondence between the Parties hereto respecting this Agreement shall be in writing and deposited in the United States Mail, postage prepaid, addressed as follows: CITY: City of Santa Ana Manager, WDB Administrative Office P.O. Box 1988 (M-76) Santa Ana, CA 92702 CLERK: Clerk of the City Council City of Santa Ana 20 Civic Center Plaza (M-30) P.O. Box 1988 Santa Ana, CA 92702-1988 Fax (714) 647-6956 CONTRACTOR: Amfasoft Corporation 1651 East 41h Street Suite 105 Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: (510) 770-6748 Email: training@amfasoft.com XX. VALIDITY The invalidity in whole or in part of any provision of this Agreement shall not void or affect the validity of any other provision of this Agreement. Page 17 of 19 XXI. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Each undersigned represents and warrants that its signature herein below has the power, authority and right to bind their respective Parties to each of the terms of this Agreement, and shall indemnify CITY fully, including reasonable costs and attorney's fees, for any injuries or damages to CITY in the event that such authority or power is not, in fact, held by the signatory or is withdrawn. B. All Exhibits referenced herein and attached hereto shall be incorporated as if fully set forth in the body of this Agreement. {Signatures on following page) Page 18 of 19 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Agreement the date and year first above -written. ATTEST: "CITY" By: v 1— I� Cam✓ enifer II Kristine Ridgenthe Cu rnc*l City Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Sonia R. Carvalho City Attorney Andrea Garcia - Assistant City Attorney RECOMMENDED FOR APPROVAL: Michael L. Garcia Executive Director Community Development Agency "CONTRACTOR" Name: f;q*Kftn 9K07) A-RW, Title: 1)(FO-MR, 6F bPVLATIbN Tax tD 4:-i'101.(' t) 5" Page 19 of 19 EXHIBIT A & B Scope of Service & Course Cost This catalog covers (inuary 18t 2023 thru December 315t 2023 112au Campus 3155Iiearney Street, suite 140 1651 Fremont, CA 94538 (� Email: Pb Websi � k 3 ;.r f * -B-E 4th Street, suite 105 3080 Olcott Street,suite D110 Ana, CA 92701 SantaClara, CA 95054 ilatactDetails T •aining@amfasoft.com arei510-770-6748 is www.amfasoft.com A Message from the Director of Education Dear Students, As a Director of Education of Amfasoft Corporation, I'd like to take this opportunity to welcome you all The classes and the curriculum will be provided by our highly skilled and industry knowledgeable professors. The students will be getting the highest level of hands-on, real -world training. We are committed to achieving the highest standard of excellence in everything we do and strive to maintain the trust and confidence of our students, customers, and clients. We believe that achieving our commitment is the key to enhancing our reputation for integrity and knowledge and building a promising future. We will continue with our best efforts to put together the building blocks of our success, and the best is yet to come. Looking forward, the challenges are numerous in this field. With our excellent services, good management team, our dedicated staff, the loyalty, and support of our partners, we stand ready to meet every challenge. Best of Luck! And thank you for giving us the opportunity to be a part of your success Sincerely Farhana Ahmed Table of Contents AMFASOFT CORPORATION GENERAL INFORMATION..................................................................................................5 CATALOGINFORMATION.......................................................................................................................................................................5 AMFASOFTCORPORATION HOLIDAYS CLOSED...................................................................................................................................5 SCHOOLFACILITIES..............................................................................................................................................................................5 SATELLITECAMPUS LOCATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................5 APPROVALDISCLOSURE STATEMENT..............................................................................................................................................6 AMFASOFT`S FINANCIAL STANDING.....................................................................................................................................................6 MISSIONSTATEMENT............................................................................................................................................................................6 PURPOSESTATEMENT............................................................................................................................................................................6 OBJECTIVESOF THE EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM...................................................................................................................................7 FACULTY................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 FACULTYMEMBERS — INSTRUCTORS FOR THE COURSES....................................................................................................................7 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION STAFF............................................................................................................. 9 LOCALACTIVITIES..............................................................................................................................................................9 CLASSSCIiEDULE AND TIMINGS....................................................................................................................................... 9 FACILITY, EQUIPMENT, AND INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS.....................................................................................10 EQUIPMENT, INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS, AND MAXIMUM STUDENTS PER CLASS..................................................................................... 10 TRAININGCLASSROOMS...................................................................................................................................................................... 11 _ADA COMPLIANCE...................................................................................................................................................................13 STATELICENSURE REQUIREMENT..................................................................................................................................................... 13 ADMISSIONPOLICIES........................................................................................................................................................13 ADMISSIONREQUIREMENT................................................................................................................................................................. as ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND POLICIES FOR INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS.................................................................................. 14 DISCLOSURESFOR POTENTIAL STUDENTS......................................................................................................................................... 14 HOUSINGSERVICES POLICY/INFORMATION...........................................................................................................................4........... 14 ACADEMIC STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................14 GENERALADMISSION REQUIREMENTS: ................................ 4 ............................. ....................... 4 ....................................................... 15 ABILITY -TO -BENEFIT TEST REQUIREMENT....................................................................................................................................... 15 ADMISSIONPROCEDURES.................................................................................................................................................................... 15 ENROLLMENTAGREEMENT..............................................................................................................................................4................. 16 ORIENTATIONDAY.........................................................................................................................................................................4.... 16 REGISTRATION..................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 GROUNDSFOR PROBATION: UNSATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS............................................................................................ 16 NOTICEOF ADMISSION............................................................................................................................................................4........... 16 NOTICE CONCERNING TRANSFERABILITY OF CREDITS & CREDENTIALS EARNED AT OUR INSTITUTION ... 17 TRANSFEROF CREDIT/AWARD OF CREDIT.—................................................................................................................................... 17 PROCESSOF EVALUATION OF TRANSFER OF CREDIT........................................................................................................................ 17 POLICIESFOR PRIOR EXPERIENTIAL LEARNING................................................................................................................................17 PROVISIONTO APPEAL........................................................................................................................................................................ 17 CHARGESTO EVALUATE THE TRANSFER OF CREDIT........................................................................................................................ 17 CLOCKHOURS / CREDIT HOURS OR UNITS...........................................................................................................................4........... 18 INCREMENT REQUIRED COMPLETING THE PROGRAM........................................................................................................................ 18 LEARNINGRESOURCES AND PROCEDURES......................................................................................................................................... 18 PROCEDURETO ACCESS LEARNING RESOURCES............................................................................................................................... 18 STANDARDSOF SATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS..................................................................................................................... IS GRADINGPOLICY AND ACADEMIC STANDARDS................................................................................................................................. 19 DROPOUTAND LEAVE -OF -ABSENCE POLICIES................................................................................................................................... 19 ATTENDANCE....................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 TARDINESS...........................................................................................................................................................................................20 PROBATIONAND DISMISSAL POLICIES...............................................................................................................................................20 RULESOF OPERATION AND STUDENT CONDUCT...............................................................................................................................21 STUDENTDISCIPLINE...........................................................................................................................................................................21 STUDENTCOMPLAINTS/GRIEVANCES POLICY & PROCEDURE.........................................................................................................21 PROCEDURE: STUDENTS RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES.................................................................................................................21 POLICIESREGARDING RECORD RETENTION..................................................................................................................................... 22 STUDENTPRIVACY...............................................................................................................................................................................22 ADDINGAND DROPPING COURSES......................................................................................................................................................23 MINIMUM TERMS FOR TUITION PAYMENTS....................................................................................................................................... 23 LEAVEOF ABSENCE POLICY...............................................................................................................................................................23 INCOMPLETECOURSES........................................................................................................................................................................23 MAXIMUMCOMPLETION TIME FOR THE PROGRAMS........................................................................................................................23 LIBRARY...............................................................................................................................................................................................24 CLASSROOMS..............................................................................................._..___._________... _... 9J FINANCIALPOLICIES......................................................................................................................................................... 25 FEDERAL OR STATE FINANCIAL AID PROGRAMS ...............................................................................................................................33 WIAFUNDING......................................................................................................................................................................................33 INDIVIDUALSTUDENT LOANS..............................................................................................................................................................33 ENFORCEABILITYOF LOANS...............................................................................................................................................................34 CLASSMAKE-UP POLICIES ...................................................................................................................................................................34 CANCELLATIONS, WITHDRAWALS, AND REFUND POLICIES..............................................................................................................34 DISTANCELEARNING........................................................................................................................................................ 35 SPECIFIC PROVISIONS FOR INSTRUCTION NOT IN REAL-TIME.........................................................................................................36 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................................................................................................36 DISTANCE LEARNING REFUND POLICY.......................................................................................................................... 17 STUDENT TUITION RECOVERY FUNDS (STRF) - SCHEDULE OF CHARGES DISCLOSURES....................................38 STUDENTSERVICES...........................................................................................................................................................39 COURSEDETAILS...............................................................................................................................................................40 ACCOUNTING: ALL IN ONE..........................................................................................................................................................40 ACCOUNTING: ALL IN ONE & PAYROLL CERTIFICATION............................................................................................................42 ACCOUNTING: TAXATION...............................................................................................................................................................44 ACCOUNTING: ALL IN ONE & TAXATION......................................................................................................................................45 ACCOUNTING: TAXATION & QUICKBOOKS FOR ACCOUNTING...................................................................................................47 AMAZONWEB SERVICES.....................................................................................................................................................................49 BIGDATA..............................................................................................................................................................................................50 BIGDATA AND AMAZON WEB SERVICES........................................................................................................................................... 51 BIGDATA AND DATA BRICKS..............................................................................................................................................................52 BIGDATA AND DEEP LEARNING.........................................................................................................................................................53 BIGDATA AND GOOGLE CLOUD.........................................................................................................................................................54 BIGDATA AND MICROSOFT AZURE....................................................................................................................................................55 BIGDATA AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................................................56 BOOKKEEPING & MS OFFICE PROFESSIONAL...................................................................................................................................57 BUSINESSANALYST.............................................................................................................................................................................. 59 BUSINESSANALYST & ORACLE FINANCIALS..................................................................................................................................... 60 BUSINESSANALYST & PMI- ACP EXAM PREP.................................................................................................................................. 62 BUSINESSANALYST & SAP FICO......................................................................................................................................................64 CCNA& CCNP PACKAGE.................................................................................................................................................................66 CCNAI & II........................................................................................................................................................................................68 CCNP................................................................................................................................................................................................... 69 CERTIFIEDBOOKKEEPER....................................................................................................................................................................71 CERTIFIED BOOKKEEPER & QUICKBOOKS........................................................................................................................................72 COMPTIAA+ COMPUTER TECHNICIAN FUNDAMENTALS...............................................................................................................74 COMPTIANETWORK+......................................................................................................................................................................75 COMPTIASTRATA CERTIFICATION.................................................................................................................................................76 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING & BOOKKEEPING..............................................................................................................................77 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING AND BOOKKEEPING & MS OFFICE PROFESSIONAL........................................................................78 DATABRICKS.................................................................................................._.._._....._._....._...an 3 DEEPLEARNING...................................................................................................................................................................................81 DEEPLEARNING AND AMAZON WEB SERVICES.................................................................................................................................82 DEEPLEARNING AND GOOGLE CLOUD..............................................................................................................................................83 DEEPLEARNING AND MICROSOFT AZURE.........................................................................................................................................84 DOCKER................................................................................................................................................................................................85 DOCKERAND KUBERNETES.................................................................................................................................................................86 GOOGLECLOUD...................................................................................................................................................................................87 88 KUBERNETES........................................................................................................................................................................................ LINUXSYSTEM ADMINISTRATION..........................................................................................................................................I............ 89 MACHINELEARNING AND DATA SCIENCE..........................................................................................................................................90 MACHINELEARNING, DATA SCIENCE AND DEEP LEARNING............................................................................................................ 91 93 MICROSOFTAZURE............................................................................................................................................................................. MICROSOFTAZURE AND DATABRICKS.................................................................................................................................94 MICROSOFTCERTIFICATION PACKAGE.............................................................................................................................................95 MICROSOFT: ALL IN ONE....................................................................................................................................................................98 MSOFFICE PROFESSIONAL & QUICKBOOKS FOR ACCOUNTING.....................................................................................................99 ORACLE12C.......................................................................................................................................................................................101 ORACLEI I i/REL12 PROJECT MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................................................. 103 ORACLEAPPLICATION DBA 12C......................................................................................................................................................105 ORACLEDATABASE 12C- ADMINISTRATION I.................................................................................................................................. 107 ORACLEDATABASE 12C- ADMINISTRATION II................................................................................................................................ 108 ORACLEDEVELOPER 12C.................................................................................................................................................................. 110 ORACLEFINANCIAL CLOUD.............................................................................................................................................................. 112 ORACLEMANUFACTURING CLOUD.................................................................................................................................................. 114 ORACLESQL 12C..............................................................................................................................................................................116 ORACLECLOUD ARCHITECTURE...................................................................................................................................................... 117 PAYROLLCERTIFICATION................................................................................................................................................................. 118 PAYROLLCERTIFICATION & TAXATION.......................................................................................................................................... 119 PMI- ACP EXAM PREP.....................................................................................................................................................................121 PMI- ACP EXAM PREP & PROJECT MANAGEMENT....................................................................................................................... 122 PMI- ACP EXAM PREP & MS PROJECT..........................................................................................................................................124 PMP& MS PROJECT.....................................................................................................................................................................126 128 PROJECTMANAGEMENT................................................................................................................................................................... 130 PYTHONPROGRAMMING................................................................................................................................................................... QUICKBOOKSFOR ACCOUNTING...................................................................................................................................................... 131 132 SALESFORCEADMINISTRATOR......................................................................................................................................................... 133 SALESFORCEDEVELOPER................................................................................................................................................................. SAP: ALL IN ONE...............................................................................................................................................................................134 SAP: FICO.........................................................................................................................................................................................135 SAP: SD..............................................................................................................................................................................................136 SAP: MM...........................................................................................................................................................................................137 SIXSIGMA GREEN BELT.................................................................................................................................................................... 138 SIXSIGMA GREEN BELT AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................................. 139 141 SIXSIGMA YELLOW BELT................................................................................................................................................................. SIXSIGMA YELLOW BELT AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT............................................................................................................... 142 SOFTWAREQUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................................................... 144 145 UNIXSYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR......................................................................................................................................................... 146 WEBDEVELOPMENT.......................................................................................................................................................................... WEBDEVELOPMENT ANDROID CERTIFIED APPLICATION DEVELOPER......................................................................................... 147 WEBDEVELOPMENT ANDROID CERTIFIED APPLICATION ENGINEER............................................................................................ 148 WINDOWS10 CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................................... 149 WINDOWS10 ENTERPRISE DESKTOP................................................................................................................................................ 150 WINDOWSSERVER 2019 ACTIVE DIRECTORY................................................................................................................................. 151 WINDOWSSERVER 2019 APPLICATION INFRASTRUCTURE............................................................................................................. 152 WINDOWSSERVER 2019 ENTERPRISE ADMINISTRATION................................................................................................................ 153 WINDOWSSERVER 2019 NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE................................................................................................................... 154 WINDOWS SERVER 2019 SERVER ADMINISTRATION....................................................................................................................... 155 11 I' Catalog Information This catalog is covered for the period starting on January 1, 2023, and ending on December 31, 2023. The catalog is updated every year. Amfasoft shall provide the public with a school catalog when requested either electronically via email or refer them to the Amfasoft website where the Catalog is available for download. Prior to enrollment, Amfasoft shall provide a prospective student with a school catalog. Students enrolled in California Any questions a student may have regarding this catalog that have not been satisfactorily answered by the institution may be directed to the Bureau for Private Postsecondary Education at the following: Address: 1747 N. Market Blvd. Ste 225 Sacramento, CA 95834 P.O Box 980818, West Sacramento, CA 95798-0818 Website Address: www.bnue.ca.eov Telephone and Fax #'s: (888) 370-7589 or by fax (916) 263-1897. (916) 574-8900 or by fax (916) 263-1897 Amfasoft Corporation Holidays Closed New Year's Day Good Friday Labor Day Martin Luther King, Jr. Day Memorial Day Thanksgiving Day President's Day Independence Day Christmas Day School Facilities The addresses where class sessions will be held are below: Main Campus Satellite Campus Fremont Santa Clara 3155 Kearney Street 3080 Olcott Street Suite# 140 Suite # D 110 Fremont, CA 94538 Phone: 510-770-6748 Branch Campus Santa Ana 1651 East 4' street, Suite # 105 Santa Ana, CA 92701 Email: training@amfasoft.com Phone: 714-852-3633 Santa Clara, CA 95054 Satellite Campus Locations j • Amfasoft offers instruction for educational programs that are approved for the main campus or a branch location. • Amfasoft does not maintain any permanent student records at the satellite locations. • Ainfasoft does not solicit or enroll any students at the satellite locations. • Amfasoft has leased the satellite location to conduct training during normal business hours and weekends. Approval Disclosure The Bureau for Private Postsecondary Education- (BPPE) "AMFASOFT Corporation is a private institution, that it is approved to operate by the bureau, and that approval to operate means compliance with state standards as set forth in the CEC and 5, CCR. An institution may not imply that the Bureau endorses programs, or that Bureau approval means the institutions exceeds minimum state standards. Any questions regarding this catalog that have not been satisfactorily answered by the institution may be directed to the Bureau for Private Postsecondary Education at 1747 N. Market Blvd. Ste 225 Sacramento, CA 95834 www.bppe.ca.gov, toll -free phone 888-370-7589 or fax 916-263-1897. You can find us at www.bppe.ca.gov under approved schools The institution is not accredited by any other accrediting agency recognized by the United States Department of Education. Amfasoft`s Financial Standing Amfasoft Corporation is in good financial standing. This institution has no pending petition in bankruptcy, is not operating as a debtor in possession, has never filed a petition for bankruptcy within the preceding five years, or has had no petition in bankruptcy filed against it within the preceding five years that resulted in reorganization under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.0 Sec 1101 et seq). IN0611H I N 111i Amfasoft aims to provide vocational courses working with industry experts and employers in the hi -tech information technology industry. The mission of Amfasoft is to provide career enhancement courses to help build the skills of qualified professionals and beginners. Our faculty and staff share in a commitment to ensuring that opportunities, programs, and services available to its students are comprehensive and structured to serve as foundations as they pursue a wide array of careers in industry, government, and service. Amfasoft aims to bring qualified faculty who have good working experience in software industries into contact with students who aspire to develop their skills and excel in their careers. A continuous evaluation of student progress, faculty performance and the tools and techniques needed for certifications or job placement help us to constantly improve and provide a productive environment for all students. The purpose of educational emphases chosen by AMFASOFT is to fulfill its mission and to enhance the student's ability to think critically and creatively and enable the student to apply theory and skills acquired in the student's professional life. AMFASOFT seeks to consistently achieve the following purposes: To guide students in adapting their knowledge, training, and skills to the workplace and to provide students with motivating services in career planning, academic advising, and financial and career services to enhance students' probability of success. To provide current and relevant curriculum developed, tested, and continually improved through regular outcomes assessment and consultation by the chief academic officer, faculty, administrators, business leaders, and other educators. To provide intensive and comprehensive instruction using both onsite and online modes of delivery that strengthen student academic achievement. 6 4- To continually examine the evolving needs of students and employers for career -oriented higher education programs as a basis for the development of additional programs. To provide an interactive and collaborative educational environment that strengthens learning and contributes to lifelong educational growth. 4 - To provide student services that contribute to academic success, personal development, and career potential. Select faculty with demonstrated industry experience, advanced degrees, and teaching qualifications to deliver state -of -the -practice education; provide on -going professional development, review, and certification, especially in fostering student success through teaching and support. Objectives of the Educational Program The members of the faculty work in leading software technology industries with several years of working and teaching experience and they also act as consultants in education and the software industry. This enables Amfasoft to continually adapt its course of programs to reflect the fast-growing high-tech environment. Amfasoft faculty members possess qualities such as advanced degrees earned in engineering or computer sciences, high-tech work experiences, motivation, enthusiasm, patience, and the will to help in teaching and helping the students in their studies. The main aim of the faculty members is to provide each student with a job and career -oriented education by tailoring each student's study plan based on the student's educational background and interest. To provide students hands-on practical training experience in the learning process. Faculty Members — Instructors for the courses Aliuddin M. Ahmed: Founder and President of Amfasoft Corporation, has more than 20 years of experience in the IT industry and has been a programmer since 1995 and working on ERP implementation projects for Oracle Financials and Manufacturing I Ii. In addition to working experience, he has more than 18 years of teaching experience. IIe works closely with other instructors to develop the distance education curriculum. He is the course coordinator for Introduction to oracle RDBMS, SQL & SQL*PLUS, and Oracle Financials and Manufacturing 1 li courses. He is also the Academic Course Counselor for all courses. Qualifications/Certifications: B. S (Engineering), MBA, Oracle Certified Professional, CSPO - Certified in PMP-Agile, Product Owner, Certified Scrum Master, and Six Sigma Farhana Ahmed: Director of Education of Amfasoft Corporation. She has over 23 years of experience in the IT Industry and has been teaching Accounting, QuickBooks, Microsoft Office, Computerized Accounting, Payroll, Tax, and Bookkeeping certification courses for more than 16 years. She has been a career counselor for all the courses. She has been working as QuickBooks ProAdvisor, payroll specialist, and tax consultant for small to mid- size companies and nonprofit organizations. Qualification/Certifications: B.S(Business Administration), M.S. in Accounting, Certification in Accounting, QuickBooks Certified ProAdvisor, Certified Payroll specialist, Certified Bookkeeper, CTEC registered, Certificate in Forensic Accounting and Fraud Examination, Certificate in Advance Financial Reporting, Certificate in Auditing, Certificate in Managerial Accounting and Certificate in Taxation. Madhuri Manikonda: Over 9+ years of experience in installation, configuration, administration, and troubleshooting of multi -vendor LAN/WAN infrastructure and security. Accredited with Cisco certification (Cisco Certified Network Professional—CCNP). Strong understanding of TCP/IP protocol suite, L2/L3 switching and 7 routing protocols, tunneling protocols, WAN technologies. Over 4+ years of experience in Network and IT -related training. Well experienced in ISP and Data Center environments. Many years of experience in Windows NT, 2003, 2000, XP, and Linux (Redhat and Fedora distros). Qualifications/Certifications: Masters in Computer Engineering, Bachelor's in Information Technology, CCNA Security, CCSP (in progress), CCNA, CCNP, Juniper Netscreen Firewall certification. Prasad Kambampati: Over 15 years of functional experience and over fifteen years of SAP experience. He knows the mapping of Business Processes onto SAP, Performing GAP Analysis, Prototyping, Integration Testing, offering Legacy Data Transfer guidance, and providing extensive training to core group members and end -users. Involved in SAP R/3 assignments from release 3.1 G through ECC6.0 global/regional rollouts, support/Maintenance with expertise in and Proficient in the usage of ASAP Methodology. Qualifications/Certifications: BE, Mechanical Engineering Ajit Kumar Dwivedi: Over 20 years of strong and proven Financial Management and Information Systems experience. Over eight years of experience in SAP FICO design, documentation, configuration/customization, training, testing, cutover, and support. Good understanding of US GAAP, IFRS, multi -currency payments, and taxes. Possess good analytical, communication, interpersonal, customer relationship, people management, and project management skills. Qualifications/Certifications: BS — Accounting, Finance and Banking, and MS — Computer Information Systems. SAP FICO, Certification, ITIL Ahsan Hameed: Over 24 years of experience in Project Management. Developing and Driving project plans for increasing Service Sales Developed and executed detailed integration and Change Management plans for all tracks including Sales forecasting, Deal management, financial reporting, GTM (Go to Market) Channel framework, Service migration in the Sales Integration of the acquired company's Products and Services (Merger and Acquisition). Coordinated Change Management activities across other workstream Product Technology Introduction, Marketing strategy, Services, Sales Order ability, and Supply Chain, and Business Unit readiness. Design survey system to get staff feedback on the effects of Changes in system and tools Qualification/Certifications: MS Industrial and System Engineer. Project Management certified Touqeer Syed: Over 12 years of SAP consulting experience including 6 years of end -to -end implementation experiences with a focus on configuration and testing the SAP FICO module components, including New GL accounting, accounts payables, accounts receivables, customizing vendor/customer, master records, account groups. Has worked on SD and MM consultants for integration with FI. Also configured revenue account determination for the SD billing process. Qualifications/Certifications; BCom and MCA Rashad Mehmood: MCS graduate with more than 13 years of professional strength and experience providing services for IT networking and data communication which include configuration of CISCO switches and routers, Domain controllers, Virtualization, and various types of servers in a corporate setting. Providing outstanding services and proficiency in setting -up, troubleshooting, and managing IT systems. Also, I offer knowledge, experience, and excellent analytical and organizational skills. Certification: MCP (Microsoft Certified Professional), CCNA 2007 (Cisco Certified Network Associate CCNA), CCNP Training (Cisco Certified Network Professional), MCSE Training (Microsoft Certified System Engineer), ADT Training (Applied Diploma in Telecommunication), Computer Fundamentals (Win XP) www.brainbench.coni and JCP Training (Java Certified Progmnnner) Qualifications/Certifications: BS, MCS Rida Ahmed - Administrative Magdy Galal - Senior Administrator/ Proctor Assistant/Proctor Arnfasoft attends local job fairs and works with high tech companies in the bay area to lookout for job opportunities for our students. The City of San Jose Work Force Investment Board also recognizes Amfasoft as a leading Training provider. Amfasoft also provides its facility space for corporate meetings, corporate training, seminars, and other events. This also helps to determine the current trends in the market and the upcoming technology areas where there is a lack of a skilled workforce. Amfasoft provides class schedules for course programs several weeks before the start of each course. The classes are primarily conducted on weekday evenings and weekends to allow students to pursue their studies after -work hours. The class schedules and dues are officially scheduled at registration before the start of the first session of the course unless designated (TBA) to be announced. No class timings can be changed without prior permission of the Academic Counselor and the course instructor. The lab hours are scheduled separately. Full-time administrative personnel is available at the training campuses weekdays and Saturdays to assist the students, instructors, and new applicants. Class timings for Weekday— Weeknight - Weekend Weekday class timings are: Morning Class timings: Mon — Fri 10 a.m. — 2 p.m. Afternoon class timings: Mon— Thus 2 p.m. — 6 p.m. Weeknight class timings are: Mon — Thurs 6:30 p.m. — 10:00 p.m. Weekend class timings are: Saturdays & Sundays Moming: 10 — 2 p.m. Afternoon: 2 p.m. — 6 p.m. Online Lab Hours: 24n. The student will log in by using User ID and password Amfasoft school locations have easy access to public transport and the facilities are well equipped with student desks, conference tables, study areas, labs, and lunch areas. The classrooms are well lighted, air-conditioned, and noise -free to give the students a professional environment during their study. Each location has multiple classrooms and the total area of the main and a branch location is approximate about 2000+ square feet each. All classrooms are equipped with computers and monitors, the latest laptops, overhead projectors and screens, free Wi-Fi access to help the students get as much hands-on practice as needed. Our locations have a minimum of 10 laptops and each student gets assigned a laptop to work. The student can also bring their laptops in case they wish to work on their systems. All programs at Amfasoft are Instructor -led and the instructor provides clear details on the agenda to be covered during each class. The following are some of the instructional aids provided in the class. 1) E-books or hard copies of books. Some vendors of programs like Oracle provide e-books which are electronic pdf documents and other vendors have hard copy material. Therefore, where applicable the student is either provided an e-book or hard copies. The course material provided to students is carefully selected through the suggested books from major vendors like Oracle, Cisco, Intuit, Microsoft, PMI (Project Management Institute). 2) PPT (PowerPoint) presentations. Our instructors use PowerPoint presentations to provide a summary overview of the topics to be covered in each class and provide soft copies for student review during their research or lab time. 3) Overhead projectors. High lumen state of the art overhead projectors is provided in each class so that the instructor can connect his laptop and demonstrate the labs or the course material during each class. 4) Web -Ex, Go -to meetings. A few classes are also recorded on WebEx so that the student can review the whole class session during their research or lab time. 5) Whiteboard and Easels- This is the traditional way of teaching which is highly effective in putting a picture into the student's mind that helps the student to visualize and remember for a long time. 6) Interactive Workspace: Some instructors also use Interactive Workspace' which provides a digital whiteboard where instructors can write as though they are writing on a whiteboard and then save the class notes as pdf copies and mail to students. This helps the student to save time in taking notes and concentrate more on the explanation. 7) Laptops/Desktops: Latest technology laptops and desktops with widescreen monitors are also provided to those who do not have such systems. Hands -On Practice: A great emphasis is given on hands-on practice in addition to instructions in class to help the students gain confidence and be motivated in class. The following are the hardware equipment configuration details used by students and instructors. 10 FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT Facility Details: Training Classrooms The training facility has 3 training classrooms each location equipped with the details shown below. • A presentation computer station with Internet access, VCR and DVD players, and connections for laptops and iPods • Full -featured computers with the current operating system or software on the market • Computer workstations with flat -panel screens • State-of-the-art sound systems, Podiums and flip charts, Wireless access • High -resolution, 3000-lumens projectors, Easel, Whiteboard • Webex and Go -to -Meeting — for recording lectures Lunch Area: Students have access to the lunch area with a refrigerator, coffeemaker, microwave, tables, and chairs. Other Rooms: Additionally, there is a conference room for group discussions and an interview room for one on one discussion. Students utilize the lab facility with full -featured laptops and desktops to do the labs and exercises. The course related reference books are available on a marked bookshelf to all students when they are in the facility. Equipment Details # Equipment Details(# t) Description 1 Desktops — Dell/l9" Monitors Dell Optiplex 755USF 3.0GHz 2GB 160GB DVD Win 7 pro FAST. This system with a 19" monitor is ideal for students to perform all lab exercises and testing. 2 Desktop s — HP / 21 " Monitors HP Pavilion P7-1380T Desktop, Intel Core i5-3330 3GHz, 12GB Ram, 1TB, DVDRW, Win7. The system is ideal for download, install and configuration of high -end software. 3 Desktop s — Lenovo / 2 1 " Monitors Lenovo TbinkCentre M92p (500 GB, Intel Core i5, 29 GHz, 4 GB) PC Desktop. 4 Laptops - IBM T42/43 15" IBM ThinkPad 2.00GHz 2.00GB Mem 60GB I DD WiFi Win 7 Pro. Ideal for students for usage to complete lab exercises and follow the instructor during class. 3 La to s — Lenovo Lenovo 15" Core i5 2.5Ghz 4GB 320GB WIN 7 Pro 2 Projectors — View sonic HD 1920xI080 3000 ANSI Lumens HDMI Brilliant Color 1 Cisco Switches — 3500 Cisco Catalyst WS-C3550-48-SMI 48-Ports 10/100 L3 Managed 1 Cisco Switches — 3550 Ethernet Switch. 1 Cisco Switches — 2950 Cisco 2600 Series FULLY LOADED 2610 Router having 16MB 1 Cisco Routers - 2600, 2500 series for Flash, 64MB RAM,1 Ethernet port, 4 Serial ports (USE AS lab exercises. FRAME -RELAY SWITCH). 1 Cisco Routers — 2800 Series. Cisco 2600 Series 2610 Routers having 16MB Flash, 64MB RAM, 1 Ethernet port, 2 Serial ports Cisco 2500 Series 2501 or 2503 Router has I Ethernet port, 2 Serial ports OR having 1 Ethernet port, 1 ISDN, 2 Serial ports Cisco 2900 Series 2924 Switch having 24 Fast Ethernet Ports. Back to Back Serial Cables to connect Routers The Cisco 2811 integrated services touter efficiently accomplishes your small -to -medium-sized businesses, IP communications needs. Connect to the network through the e ui ed 2 x 1D/100 Fast Ethernet orts of this Cisco wired 11 router. With the support for Network Admission Control (NAC), this Cisco 2-port router limits the access to the network to prevent the introduction of computer viruses. This Cisco wired router also protects your network connection from intruders with its support for stateful Cisco IOS Firewall. With Survivable Remote Site Telephony support, this Cisco 2-port router provides local call processing privileges in small offices. With the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) feature, the Cisco 2811 router provides security for web transactions by handling authentication, data encryption, and digital signatures 1 Cisco Security Equipment: The Cisco ASA 5510 Adaptive Security Appliance delivers ASA 5510 advanced security and networking services for small and medium- sized businesses and enterprise remote/branch offices in an easy -to - deploy, cost-effective appliance. These services can be easily managed and monitored by the integrated Cisco ASDM application, thus reducing the overall deployment and operations costs associated with providing this high level of security. The Cisco ASA 5510 Adaptive Security Appliance provides a high- performance firewall and VPN services and five integrated 10/100 Fast Ethernet interfaces. It optionally provides high-performance intrusion prevention and worm mitigation services through the AIP SSM, or comprehensive malware protection services through the CSC SSM. This unique combination of services on a single platform makes the Cisco ASA 5510 an excellent choice for businesses requiring a cost-effective, extensible, DMZ -enabled security solution. 1 Canon Multi -Function Laser Printers Canon imageCLASS MF5950DW Laser Multifunction. (3#) With a high printing speed of 35 ppm (black), the Canon MF5950dw printer is capable of meeting your growing business demands. This Canon laser printer, with its 600 dpi optical resolution, yields printouts with superb colons, finish, and rich image quality. You can wirelessly connect your PC to this all -in -one printer and transfer files, thanks to its built-in Wi-Fi connectivity. The ADF in this Canon laser printer lets you process several pages at once without having to manually reload each page. An Auto - duplex print feature in the Canon MF5950dw all -in -one printer enables printing on both sides of the paper, thus reducing costs as well as time. This Canon laser printer with a 5-line LCD screen displays a preview of the document/images being printed, scanned, copied, or faxed. 2 Security Cameras/E ui ment Swann 8 Channel Security camera 1 Racks — Racks to mount the servers 2 Netgear Routers. Netgear routers provide remote connectivity to students who can log in from home to complete their exercises. 15 Student Tables Student tables for class 15 Student Chairs Comfortable student chairs 1 Bookshelves For the student library. 2 Cabinets and Lockers To store Student material in lock and key. 12 ADA Compliance Amfasoft provides reasonable accommodation to students, faculty, and staff with disabilities in compliance with the American Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) and related state and federal laws. The building locations have ADA compliant restrooms, building interior pathways, and parking spaces. Amfasoft does not discriminate against qualified individuals with a disability in any of its programs or activities. I' State Licensure Requirement Students graduating from Amfasoft Corporation DO NOT REQUIRE STATE LICENSURE of any kind. Hi -Tech companies have established an in -private industrial -based Certification system and employers review the results of these certifications to determine the skillset of a prospective candidate looking for employment. The educational programs at Amfasoft are not designed for any Licensure requirements of this state. Admission Requirement To enroll in any course, an applicant must have good oral and written communication skills in the English language. The applicant should have basic computer knowledge. To satisfy the admission requirement, a course coordinator will interview verbally with the student to test her/his skills. The minimum level of education required is a high school diploma. Admission into the school requires the prospective student to have a High School Diploma or a General Education Diploma (GED), or be at least 18 years of age and pass a U,S. Department of Education approved ability to benefit test. Admission for the course will be based on the prerequisite of the course for which the student is interested in joining, The course counselor will take an oral or written test that is designed to measure the student's ability to be successfully trained to perform the tasks associated with the occupations or job titles to which the program of instruction is represented to lead. 'rho student's performance on the test must demonstrate that ability. Note: Amfasoft administers all its programs without regard to race, ethnic origin, age, or sex. Amfasoft confronts and rejects all manifestations of discrimination in its education policies, admission policies, and other school - administered programs. "As a prospective student, you are encouraged to review this catalog before signing an enrollment agreement. You are also encouraged to review the School Performance Pact Sheet, which must be provided to you prior to signing an enrollment agreement." 13 • Amfasoft through its advertising literature, documentation, and material on its website makes no claim or guarantee that admissions to Amfasoft will grant any international students a US Visa. Any international student with legal status in the US slid who have entered the US on their own will be granted admissions if they meet Amfasoffs admission requirements along with program pre -requisites. • High school documentation from a country other than the US must be translated and evaluated to US School Diploma and certified to be at least equivalent of a US high school diploma by an agency that is a member of NACES (National Association of Credential Evaluation Services) or AICE (Association of International Credential Evaluators). Disclosures for Potential Students _ • Amfasoft's mode of ins traction is in English Language only. • Amfasoft does not offer any program or instructions other than the English language. • Amfasoft does not provide visa services to any prospective or new students. • Amfasoft's minimum admission requirements also include a standard level of English language proficiency which includes reading, writing, and speaking in English. Amfasoft will accept any available documentation of language proficiency such as TOEFL. • All onsite programs are taught at our institution's main, branch, or satellite locations by our experienced instructors. Housing Services policy/Information Amfasoft has no dormitory facilities. Amfasoft takes no responsibility to find or assist any students to locate housing or any transactions related to housing arrangements. Students looking for dormitory facilities have to utilize available online or any personal resources they have and make possible arrangements. The region has adequate local housing which can be located using a variety of rental websites. An internet search (http•//www rentinsanfrancisco corn ) or aLtip://www.ai)artmentfmder.coin) reflected the current price range for apartments within a ten -mile radius of Amfasoft campuses was $800 - $1200 per month. Similarly, average hotel rates which are in proximity (within a 10-mile radius) to Amfasoft campuses in the Bay Area, California (San Jose, Fremont, SFO. Gilroy) on Priceline.com are from $50 to $150 per night depending on the star rating of the hotels. To apply for admission to the course, an applicant is required to attend the orientation and apply form before the start of the course. Prospective students must meet specific admissions criteria and provide documentation to provide evidence that can meet these requirements before the school will accept their enrollment application. hi addition to general admissions requirements, the candidate will need to meet certain course or program -specific pre- requisites that are listed in each program. The general admission requirements are stated below and the pre -requisites for each program can be obtained from the school catalog, website, or Admissions office. 14 General Admission requirements: • Complete Enrollment Agreement for Admission. • Registration Fee ($75 non-refundable). • Provide copies of school or college transcripts. • Foreign language high school transcripts must be translated into English language and certified by an agency that is a member of NACES (National Association of Credential Evaluation Services) or AICE (Association of International Credential Evaluators). • Financial statements if applicable. • Copy of 2 forms of identification. Note: - For students who cannot provide a high school diploma or equivalent transcripts, they must complete and successfully pass the Ability -To -Benefit test (ATB) by Wonderlic to be enrolled. Ability -to -Benefit Test Requirement If the prospective student has only a high school diploma or certificate or if the student is not able to provide copies of the high school diploma or equivalent due to unforeseen reasons like loss of records due to floods, fire, or inability to procure records for home school students, then Amfasoft will require students to attempt and pass the Wonderlic Basic Skills Test to evaluate their ability -to -benefit from the program. The course coordinator based on the prerequisites and the test results will recommend a student to start with a more basic course that will build the foundation. Disclosure: Wonderlic, Inc. is an independent and privately held company headquartered in Vernon Hills, Illinois, and a founding member of the Association of Test Publishers, The Wonderlic Basic Skills test is approved by the US Department of Education and it measures basic verbal and quantitative skills. It consists of the following: 1. WBST Verbal Form VS-1 (sealed booklet from Wonderlic) 2. WBST quantitative form QS 1 (sealed booklet from Wonderlic) 3. Scantron — to mark answers for both the above tests. Each test is time for 20 minutes and answers have to be marked by lead pencils on the scantron sheet. Candidates will be given the sealed booklets when they are ready to take the tests. Candidates can register online on Wonderlic and take the Ability -to -benefit exam. After test completion, the Amfasoft admissions representative will collect the tests taken and information that students that the results will be conveyed after Amfasoft completes the scoring the test results through the Wonderlic website. Admission Procedures • Inquiring applicants will call or drop -in at Amfasoft main or branch office and schedule a visit to meet with the School Admissions representative to go over the course and program details. • Inquiring applicants receive a campus tour and they are shown the school catalog and performance fact sheet for their review. • The admissions representative tries to answer all the questions from the applicant and gives an overview of the interesting programs and curriculum. • In case the applicant desires to talk to the instructor to get further information then Amfasoft will schedule the call. • Applicants are scheduled for an entrance examination. (If applicable). • The admissions representative discusses the financial details, payment methods, installments terms, and plans with the applicant. • When visiting the school, the applicant has an opportunity to complete the application for enrollment and the admissions representative explains the steps for the enrollment. 15 --- -- - - Enrollment Agreement - Upon joining Amfasoft Corporation, a student is given an Enrollment Agreement Package and the administrative staff will go over all the forms with the student. The student will be asked to sign on the Registration form only after understanding and agreeing to the terms and conditions. Both the student and the school keep a copy of the form. The school reserves the right to refuse admission before or following enrollment if the applicant becomes ineligible as determined by the policies of the Amfasoft team or the School Director. Meeting minimum requirements does not guarantee admission to Amfasoft. Final acceptance or denial is determined by the School's Director, subject to the applicant's right of appeal or request for consideration as a special exception. A special exception is considered when the student does not meet established criteria for admissions but shows a strong motivation to learn and succeed and the Amfasoft instructor agrees that the student will be able to understand the class enrolled. Orientation Day All new students are invited to attend the new student orientation offered before the start of the course. Students who are enrolling for the course must pay the registration fee of $75.00 to reserve the seat with the course fees. At the orientation, each new student receives an orientation package. The new students meet with all the administrative staff members, course instructors, and course coordinators and are informed of the staffs duties. Registration • Registration is complete when the fee is paid. Amfasoft is not responsible for billing students. • Tuition fees are due and payable in full at the time of orientation unless the student has signed up for the tuition payment plan. • Working professionals who receive tuition reimbursements from their employers may follow Amfasoft special payment plan by submitting required documents to the Amfasoft Office before registration. Applicants are notified of their acceptance when all materials, documents, and credentials have been received and processing is complete. Students who register on the orientation will be given the notification of admission status on the same day. Those who register over the phone will be notified by email or a phone call. WI The transferability of credits you earn at Amfasoft Corporation is at the complete discretion of an institution to which you may seek to transfer. Acceptance of the (degree, diploma, or certificate) you earn in the (the educational program) is also at the complete discretion of the institution to which you may seek to transfer. If the certificates that you cam at this institution are not accepted at the institution to which you seek to transfer, you may be required to repeat some or all of your comsework at that institution. For this reason, you should make certain that your attendance at this institution will meet your educational goals. This may include contacting an institution to which you may seek to transfer after attending Amfasoft Corporation to determine if your (credits or degree, diploma, or certificate). Transfer Of Credit/Award Of Credit - Amfasoft Corporation does not authorize transfer credits from other schools through contractual agreements or articulation agreements at this time. However, students that have completed a portion of our programs at other State - approved or accredited schools will be allowed to transfer credits. The school policy to award transfer of credit will be based on the credit evaluation or an assessment test may be provided to the student. Transfers will be allowed at the sole discretion of the school management. However, students must complete 65% of the program at AMFASOFT Corporation to be considered for graduation. Process of Evaluation of Transfer of Credit Amfasoft Corporation primarily offers vendor -based programs. Most of the curriculum and syllabi are developed by leading vendors in the IT industry, Many post -secondary schools offering computer education have developed similar programs from the same vendors. However, some schools have either modified the curriculum or updates are not fairly applied. As a result, Amnfasoft Corporation performs a topic by topic evaluation of the curriculum completed at the other schools. The other school's reputation is also taken into consideration. In some cases, if the Director of Education does not find satisfactory evidence of course completion, the Director may request an additional assessment test from the student to determine the transfer of credit. The school has the right to deny the transfer of credit if the school does not find satisfactory evidence of course completion by the student from the other school. Policies for Prior Experiential learning _ Amfasoft Corporation does not recognize acquired life experience and prior experiential learning as consideration for enrollment or granting credit towards any of its degree or certificate programs. Provision to Appeal Report from the Director of Education may be considered final, however, students do have a right to appeal if they think that the evaluation and assessment tests may not be done correctly in that case School's Director will again review all final reports submitted by the student and may schedule au interview with the student. The final decision and award of credit will be completely at the Director's discretion. The student will be informed of the school's decision. Charges to Evaluate the Transfer of Credit Currently, Amfasoft Corporation does not charge for evaluation and assessments of Transfer of Credits. 17 Clock Hours / Credit Hours Or Units Amfasoft Corporation only offers clock hours for all its programs and does not convert clock hours to credit hours. Each clock hour is a minimum of 60 minutes/1 hours of instructor -led class lecture. Increment required completing the program The maximum increment a student will be allowed to complete the program is not more than 1.5 times or 150% of the standard length of the program. If a student does not complete the program within that increment time frame, then the student will be dropped from the program. Learning Resources and Procedures Amfasoft learning resource system includes electronic resources, e-books, project data available online for download, intemet research databases, blogs, and subscriptions to technology websites and web forams. As all the programs that are taught at Amfasoft relate to technology vendors, most of our learning resources used by instructors and given to students are available on the internet for student access. For certain courses, Amfasoft has specific license agreements to provide vendor -specific e-books or hard copy books that have both study and lab material. Procedure to Access Learning Resources The learning resources used by instructors and provided to students are available through the internet for student access. Students can use these resources while they are on the school's campus or gain access remotely from home. In addition to online resources, Amfasoft has installed workstations (Desktops or Laptops) with exam preparation software that prepares students for certification exams if they choose to take the tests. These tests can help evaluate the students academic progress in the class and help the student as an assessment tool to check their progress in the class. The learning resources also contact projects that students must complete to graduate certain courses. Instructors can also keep track of the student progress by using these online resources, to check how many labs, assignments, or tests they have taken by utilizing these resources. Standardsof SatisfactoryAcademic Progress All students must maintain satisfactory progress at Amfasoft. A student is required to complete his/her course within the program period to receive a course completion certificate The progress of each student is monitored and graded at the end of each module of a program using individual progress reports that include the cumulative grade. The grade of the student is evaluated in the middle of the course based on in -class assignments, take-home assignments, lab exercises, midterm exams, written slid verbal quizzes/tests, and attendance. Each module in a program is divided into instructor -led class hours, and time spent on reading and lab exercises. At the end of each module, the program's academic progress will be measured for each student. A student should complete half of the clock hours for the course enrolled and have attended for half of the course. To maintain satisfactory academic progress a student must meet the following at all times: • Have a grade of C/70% or better. • At the end of the first academic evaluation period, the student must have turned in all assignments and lab work and completed around 60% of all coursework. The student demonstrates enough motivation and progresses at a satisfactory rate towards completion of the program. • Complete the program within 1.5 times of the published program length. The student will be put on Academic Probation at the start of the next module of the enrolled program if he/she fails to meet the Standards for Satisfactory Academic Progress at the end of the first academic evaluation period. W-1 Grading Policy and Academic Standards Grades: Approximately two weeks after the end of the course, grade reports will be printed for the students to give in the class. Grades are not given out over the telephone. The evaluations are measured on a standard percentile basis and the percentage converted to a letter grade and a point grade. The evaluation form reflects the overall attendance and academic progress of the student, The student must maintain a "C" (70%) average to maintain satisfactory academic status. Certificate Programs [A = 90-100%, B = 80-89%, C = 70-79%, F=69% or below and others below] The following symbols shall be used in evaluating student performance. The symbols reflect the quality of the student's accomplishment relative to the standards set for each course. A = Highest level, showing excellence B = Performance is good, but not the highest level C = Performance is satisfactory D = Performance is not satisfactory. Need to improve F = Fail. Course requirements have not been met. I = Incomplete grade is issued with the approval of the instructor. Completion of coursework and grade conversion must follow the Academic policy in effect. S = Satisfactory performance for the course P = Pass. NP = (Not Pass) student did not pass the course offered on Pass/No-pass basis. The student made unsatisfactory Performance IP = Performance is in progress. The final grade is not yet given. W = Withdrawal. Students are permitted to drop a course after the drop deadline. UW = Unauthorized Withdrawal. The student did not withdraw from the course but failed to meet attendance and course requirements. UW grade equals "F" grade. Grades assigned by instructors must conform to individual policies as stated in the course syllabus. A grade submitted by an instructor is considered final and may be changed only for one of the following reasons: 1. Error in recording a score for a student product (lab, exercises, test, quizzes, etc.) 2. Miscalculation of a score, including the cumulative score for the course. All requests for grade changes must be submitted to the Office within two weeks following the date of issuance of the grade in question. Attending a class without officially registering in the class violates the Amfasoft attendance policy. 1II803311 1 11 Dropout: A student may drop out of courses without any penalty after the fast lecture. Refunds for the regular add/drop of course will be processed within 30 days of the student's withdrawal, termination date, or the specified time. The student will remain obligated to the school for all the unpaid tuition, fees, and other amounts charged under the agreement or otherwise that are not subject to refund. Leave -of -absence: Only allowed with prior notice or in case of emergency. If the student does not show for 2 lecture classes without notifying Amfasoft then he/she will try to make up the missed lecture from other students or 19 try to go over the course material by them. The instructor will not arrange a makeup class for the students from whom they have not received any notice of leave -of -absence from the course. The student's withdrawal or termination date will be the student's last date of recorded attendance at the school. If the school determines, in its sole and absolute discretion, that the student's withdrawal or termination from the program during the course was the proximate result of the student suffering from incapacitation, such as 1. Illness 2. Accident 3. Death of a close family member or 4. Similar circumstances. The school will determine whether to increase the refund amommt specified above of the tuition and fees received by the school from the student for the course. NOTE: Any outstanding fees owed to the school by the student will be deducted from the tuition refund. Full attendance in class is required for all students taking courses at Amfasoft. Students must attend all lectures except for an emergency or illness. No student is allowed to miss more than 2 lecture classes of the total class hours. In case of emergency or prior notice from a student about missing a lecture, the student will be given a chance to make up in the other classes running in parallel at current or other Amfasoft training campuses based on space availability. The student bears the responsibility of attending the lectures and must accept the consequences of failure to attend the class. The student will be put on probation if he/she is absent for 3 or more lecture classes of the program enrolled. Tardiness In case of emergency or prior notice from a student the instructor will allow him to come late to the class, but no student will be allowed to go more than three absences in the whole course program. Students will not be able to keep up with the course work and instruction in the class if he/she is continuously tardy. The student will be asked to take counseling from the Academic Counselor and the Counselor would decide further action. This would be either to drop from the course or to make up for that particular course running in parallel at current or other Amfasoft campuses. The student will be put on probation if there are more than 3 unexcused tardies. Probation and Dismissal_ Policies Probation Policy: -Probation is a formal disciplinary action for thirty (30) days following a cause, e.g. Unsatisfactory Academic Progress, tardiness, or poor attendance in class. Any Probation should be considered the last opportunity for a student to demonstrate improvement and willingness to fulfill his/her academic obligations. It is important to understand that a student on probation must take the opportunity to address the cause for the Probation action within the thirty (30) day Probation period or be subject to immediate interruption or termination from the school for any school policy infraction while on Probation. Students seeking assistance with any issue(s) are encouraged to speak with their instructor or directly with the School Director. Students who are on Academic probation must agree with and sign a written academic plan developed and approved by the School Director which documents that the student will be required to attain CGPA and rate of progress milestones by the next evaluation point or designated point in time. The probation period will typically be the duration of one module, during which time the student will be allowed to raise his or her CGPA to a minimum of 70% and/or meet the 66.67% completion requirement. The academic plan will enable the student to return to satisfactory academic progress status. Dismissal Poliev: Students on probation who fail to meet the school's satisfactory academic progress by the conclusion of the probationary period will be terminated at the discretion of the institution. A terminated student may re -enroll after having a session with the school counselor. Amfasoft School director must approve the enrollment before it takes effect. 20 Rules of Operation and Student Conduct Student Discipline At all times when a student is on Amfasoft campuses, they shall conduct themselves in an amicable and considerate manner and attend classes in an orderly manner. Disruptive behavior, including but not limited to cheating, harassment, fighting, use of profanity, and stealing is not acceptable and may lead to probation or termination from Amfasoft. • The use of cell phones is not permitted during lecture time in the class. Inappropriate conduct by students is subject to probation or expulsion and dismissal from the course. The Applicable parts are as follows: - Cheating or plagiarism in connection with an academic program. - Forgery, alteration, or misuse of Amfasoft documents, records, or knowingly famishing false information. - Physical abuse on or off Amfasoft premises to the property or person. - Theft or non -accidental damage to Amfasoft property. - Knowing possession or use of dangerous chemicals or weapons. - Engaging in indecent or obscene behavior in person or by correspondence. - Violation of any rules and regulations set by Amfasoft, a notice of which has been given before such violation and during the course study program in which the violation occurs. Student Complaints/Grievances Policy & Procedure Every student has access to a formal complaint process if so needed. If a student has a problem or concern of any nature regarding any aspect of Amfasoft whether it is with personnel, course of study, or general policies, she/he has the right to file a complaint form. A student may complain by communicating orally or in writing to any instructor, administrator, admissions personnel, or counselor. The recipient of the complaint shall transmit it as soon as possible to the School Director to resolve complaints and shall attempt to resolve complaints related to that person's duties. The student will be encouraged to communicate the concern in writing to the office of Amfasoft. The Administrative office will act to bring a final resolution to the stated complaint. If a student delivers the complaint in writing, Amfasoft shall within 10 days of receiving the complaint provide the student with a return response including the summary of the investigation and if a complaint is rejected, the reasons for the rejection are also provided. Designated Personnel: Amfasoft has designated the School Director to receive and resolve student complaints. The school director is regularly accessible during normal business hours: Mon -Fri 9 am to 6 pm. Students may submit their complaints at the following address: Attn: School Director/Registrar - Amfasoft Corporation 3155 Kearney Street, Suite #120, Fremont, CA 94538, or email: farhana@arafasoft.com. Procedure: Students Rights and Responsibilities 1) The student has the right to state his/her complaint to the program instructor 2) A student may complain* in writing (via email/letter/Amfasoft Complaint Form) and submit it to the instructor, administrator, admissions representative, or counselor. 3) The student has the right to submit a written complaint directly to the School Director. 4) Students are required to state his/her complaint, sign, and date the complaint form. Students may propose a solution(s)* to their complaint and state those in the complaint form. 21 5) Amfasoft will respond to the student's complaint in writing within 10 days from the date the complaint was received. 6) Amfasoft's designated personnel (Registrar) will take actions which may include but will not be limited to the meeting(s) and interviewing involved individuals, reviewing all documents, conducting an investigation, holding an informal hearing, or other appropriate investigative activity. 7) Amfasoft will propose a resolution to the student within 25 days after receiving the complaint. The student will be informed of the proposed resolution in writing (via email or letter). 8) The student has a right to disagree with Amfasoft's proposed resolution. In such a case, the student may directly contact the Chief Academic Officer, Chief of Operations, and the Director of Amfasoft seeking the resolution of the filed complaint. 9) Amfasoft Corporation and its officers will take all possible actions to resolve the complaint within 30 days after receiving the complaint from the student. Verbal Complaints: Please note that a verbal complaint does not qualify under this provision for any actions from Amfasoft Corporation. All complaints must be submitted in writing so that they can be addressed promptly. Amfasoft may either resolve the verbal in an appropriate manner or after thorough investigation reject the verbal complaint. Registrar's Authority and Duties: Record a summary of the complaint, its resolution, and the reasons for the complaint, place a copy of the complaint summary and its resolution, along with any other related documents, in the student's file, and make an appropriate and dated entry in student complaints log. For any unresolved complaints, the Registrar has the authority to recommend possible solutions to resolve the student's complaint to the Director of the School. "A student or any member of the public may file a complaint about this institution with the Bureau for Private Postsecondary Education by calling (888) 370-7589 toll -free or by completing a complaint form, which can be obtained on the Bureau's internet web site www.bppe.ca.eov." Policies Regarding Record Retention Record Retention: Educational Records are kept in a fire-resistant safe cabinet at the Fremont main Administrative office located at 3155 Kearney Street, Suite # 120 Fremont CA 94538. The educational records are all files, records, or documents maintained by Amfasoft, which contain information directly related to the students. Example of education records is the general inquiry form filled by the students at the time of registration, the enrollment agreement papers, job placement files, evaluation sheets, student grades, resume, etc. It is the policy of the school to monitor educational records to ensure that they do not contain information that is inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise inappropriate. The school may destroy records that are no longer useful or pertinent to the students' circumstances. The student records are kept in the administrative office for at least five years from his/her date of registration and student transcripts are maintained indefinitely. Safekeeping and Disaster Recovery: In addition to safekeeping the student records are also scanned and backup copies are maintained in a file server at the main office location. The file server is backed up every night and copies of these files are also stored off -site at safe locations. These records can be reproduced whenever needed as legible printed copies. Student Privacy The only persons allowed access to such records is those who have a legitimate administrative or educational interest. 22 Adding and Dropping Courses After registering for a course, a student may add/drop courses by the add/drop deadline. One week after the course starts and adds courses only on a space -available basis. A student may drop courses without records penalty only during the first week of class. Minimum Terms for Tuition Payments The student is only obligated for the portion of the program cost for each course for which he/she is enrolled. The student must pay the school the applicable cost at the time of registration unless the student and school agree in writing to a tuition payment plan. Students who are on tuition payment plans and whose accounts are more than 10 days past due are suspended from class attendance until satisfactory arrangements are made to bring their account to current status. Students who fail to fulfill the financial arrangements agreed upon are suspended from school and may reenter only upon full payment of the delinquent portion of their account unless the school has agreed in writing to a different payment arrangement. If the student withdraws or is terminated from the program for any reason and subsequently applies to reenter for the other course, the school will determine in its sole discretion whether to allow the applicant to reenter. If the school allows the applicant to reenter, the student must execute a new enrollment agreement and pay all the current tuition costs. Leave of Absence Policy Amfasoft does not promote leave of absences except for eligible cases. The period of the leave of absence will not begin until the school has approved a written and signed request for an approved leave of absence by the student. A leave of absence period may not exceed 180 days within any 12 months. Amfasoft will grant more than one leave of absence if unforeseen circumstances arise, such as medical reasons affecting the student or a member of the student's immediate family, military service requirements, or jury duty, provided that the combined leaves of absence do not exceed 180 days within the 12 months. The program is required to be completed within 1.5 tines the length of the program. If the student does not return following the leave of absence, Amfasoft will terminate the student's enrollment and will apply the school's refund policy by applicable and published requirements. Students must request a leave of absence within an appropriate time before the class. Incomplete Courses Students are required to complete all the missed assignments or projects as a result of absences within 2 weeks after the course is complete. If a student is unable to complete the work, then a failing grade will be given on the missed assignments or projects. Maximum Completion Time for the programs A student will be given not more than 1.5 times or 150% of the standard length of the program in which the student needs to complete the requirement for completing the course. If a student does not complete the program within the maximum time frame, the student will be dropped from the program. 23 Library Amfasoft has an onsite library at Main and branch locations. Students can have access to the textbooks, reference books, Software, Exam cram books, and questions related to certification courses. Students may access the online Alameda County Library (http://www.aclibrary.org). The Fremont Main Library is located 0.2 miles from Amfasoft`s main campus. The address of the Alameda County library is 2400 Stevenson Blvd, Fremont, CA 94538. Students may access the online Santa Clara Library (htto•//library sautaclaraca eov). The Santa Clara library is located 3.0 miles from Amfasoft`s branch campus. The address of the Santa Clara library is 2635 Homestead Road Santa Clara, CA 95051 Classrooms 24 A Schedule of total charges for the period of attendance AND an estimated schedule of total charges for the entire educational program D CE PROD ' i a" TUIT 11° "} ,19 T{":� F (Nonref dable) �gOO O £HER COO (Nonrefun kab Ineluile i� r Accounting: All in One $6028 $75.00 $300 $0.00 $6,403.00 Accounting: All in One & Payroll Certification $10000 $75.00 $425 $10,500.00 Accounting: Taxation $4402.50 $75.00 $225 $0.00 $4,702.50 Accounting: All in One & Taxation $8704.50 $75.00 $300 $9,079.50 Accounting: Taxation & QuickBooks for Accounting $5628 $75.00 $300 $0.00 $6,003.00 Amazon Web Services $3877 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $4,027.00 Big Data $4727.50 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $4,877.50 Big Data and Amazon Web $8004 $75.00 $200 $8,279.00 Services $0.00 Big Data and Data Bricks $8004 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Big Data and Deep Learning $8004 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Big Data and Google Cloud $8004 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Big Data and Microsoft Azure $8004 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Big Data and Python Programming $7504 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $7,779.00 25 EMA im RQ u It �F P}' { Y k s}+�GrYi S3 `�•,..T a' ., iS ' Bookkeeping & MS Office Professional Business Analyst Business Analyst & Oracle . 111 '. 11 11 Financials II Exam Prep Business Analyst& SAP 11 11 '.III 11 11 FIC•® Certified Bookkeeper Computer Technician Fund CornpTlA Strata Certification ® .� FXO xT PR RAMN . TUITI s ' �REGIS<IC ES 0r BOOKi/ TRFs PERIOD rATTENDANCE AND TSTIMA_TED y X + (Nod , ur�dable OTHEWCOST (No>ar fundable s OTAL' OST OREN KIRE; :PR0GRAI4I ' Computerized Accounting & Bookkeeping $3675 $75.00 $250 $0.00 $4,000.00 Computerized Accounting & Bookkeeping & MS $5700 $78.00 $225 $0.00 $6,003.00 Professional Data Bricks $3875 $77.00 $75 $0.00 $4,027.00 Deep Learning $4725 $77.50 $75 $0.00 $4,877.50 Deep Learning and Amazon Web Services $8000 $79.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Deep Learning and Google Cloud $8000 $79.00 $200 $0.00 $8,279.00 Deep Learning and Microsoft Azure $8000 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $8,275.00 Docker $2850 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $3,000.00 Docker and Kubernetes $4810 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $5,085.00 Google Cloud $3875 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $4,025.00 Kubernetes $2850 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $3,000.00 Machine Learning and Data Science $5725 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $6,000.00 Machine Learning, Science annddDeep Learning Data $10050 $75.00 $300 $0.00 $10,425.00 27 IS F 'E, 0 ,F6 0 OU Microsoft Azure $3875 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $4,025.00 Microsoft Azure and Data $5725 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $6,000.00 Bricks Microsoft Certification $13000 $75.00 $500 $0.00 $13,575.00 Package Microsoft: All in One $1800 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $2,075.00 NIS Office Professional & $5325 $75.00 $300 $0.00 $5700.00 QuickBooks Oracle 12c $2300 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $2,575.00 OraclellLIRell2 Project $5625 $75.00 $300 $6,000.00 Management $0.00 Oracle Application DBA 12c $2650 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $2,825.00 Oracle Database 12c- Admin 1 $2875 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $3,150.00 Oracle Database 12c- Adinin $2875 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $3,150.00 if Oracle Developer 12c $2800 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $3,075.00 Oracle Financial Cloud $4285 $75.00 $500 $0.00 $4,860.00 w REGI '14 ST CV PROGRAMA gFl OTHER ' T E S ;t DRF T Oracle Manufacturing Cloud $5300 $75.00 $600 $0.00 $5,975.00 Oracle SQL 12c $2300 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $2,575.00 Oracle Cloud Architecture $4725 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $5,000.00 Payroll Certification $5725 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $5,900.00 Payroll Certification & Taxation $9325 $75.00 $200 $9,600.00 PMI- ACP Exam Prep $3900 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $4,175.00 PMP & PMI-ACP Exam Prep $6000 $75.00 $750 $0.00 $6,825.00 PMI-ACP Exam Prep & MS $5500 $75.00 $250 $0.00 $5,825.00 Project PMP & MS Project $6000 $75.00 $700 $0.00 $6,775.00 Project Management $4000 $75.00 $805 $0.00 $4,880.00 Python Programming $4725 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $4,875.00 QuickBooks for Accounting $1750 $75.00 $375 $0.00 $2,200.00 SalesForce Administrator $4700 $75.00 $100 $4,875.00 $0.00-- 29 OG (a E 0S 0.. Salestorce Developer $5625 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $5,800.00 SAP: All in One $5725 $75.00 $200 $0.00 $6,000.00 SAP: FICO $3000 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $3,150.00 SAP: SD $3000 $75.00 $75 $0.00 $3,150.00 SAP: MM $3000 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $3,175.00 Six Sigma Green Belt $2,975 $75.00 $75.00 $3,625.00 Certification Six Sigma Yellow Belt $1,620 $75.00 $50.00 $2,245.00 Certification Six Sigma Green Belt Certification & Project $6,575 $75.00 $650 $7,300.00 Management Six Sigma Yellow Belt Certification & Project $6,000 $75.00 $625.00 $6,700.00 Management --- Software Quality Assurance $2100 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $2,275.00 Unix System Administrator $900 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $1,075.00 30 PERI D OF , I. . STr r EST XT, F TOT COST, ?OR N PROGRAM Web Development $5775 $75.00 $150 $0.00 $6,000.00 Web Development Android Certified Application $3,775 $75.00 $150 $4,000.00 Developer $0.00 Web Development Android Certified Application $5,625 $75.00 $300 $6,000.00 Engineer $0.00 Window 10 Configuration $2825 $75.00 100 $0.00 $3,000.00 Windows 10 Enterprise Desktop $2825 $75.00 $100 $3,000.00 $0.00 Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Administration $2825 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $3,000.00 Windows Server 2019 Active Directory $2825 $75.00 $100 $3,000.00 $0.00 Windows Server 2019 --- Application hiftastructure $2825 $75.00 $100 $3,000.00 $0.00 Windows Server 2019 Network Infrastructure $2825 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $3,000.00 Windows Server 2019 Server Administration $2825 $75.00 $100 $0.00 $3,000.00 Tuition and fees are subject to change Registration: A Non -Refundable fee STRF Fees: A Non -Refundable state -imposed fee and assessment for the Student Tuition Recovery Fund. Books: • Tuition Paid by WIA: Depending on Arnfasoft's contract with the respective 3' party agency funding the student's education Amfasoft may include and provide wherever applicable, the course books, and software for the courses the student is enrolled in. Student Tuition Recovery Fund (STRF) will not be charged. In such cases, the 31 itemized breakdown is predefined with the contract with each 3`o party or governmental agency providing the student's tuition. Tuition Paid by Individuals: Students have the option to pay the costs of the books and exam fee to Amfasoft or if they prefer, they can indicate that they will purchase from other sources (vendors) at the time of enrollment. The students are required to ensure that the material versions are current and meet the course requirements. These costs are included in the approved total charges and stated in the Enrollment Agreement. Students need to mark their options on the Enrollment Agreement. Amfasoft shall make refunds that are no less than the refunds required under the Act and California Code of Regulations 71750 Amfasoft will not enforce any refund policy that is not specified in the catalog as required pursuant to section 94909(a)(8)(B) of the Code and will refund all institutional charges upon a student's withdrawal. A pro-rata refund pursuant to section 94920(d) of the Code shall be no less than the total amount owed by the student for the portion of the educational program provided subtracted from the amount paid by the student, calculated as follows: The amount owed equals the daily charges for the program - (a total institutional charge, divided by the number of days in the program), multiplied by the number of days the student attended or was scheduled to attend, prior to withdrawal. Except as provided for in subdivision (a)(3) of this section, all amounts paid by the student over what is owed as calculated in subdivision (1) shall be refunded. Except as provided in section 76120, all amounts that the student has paid will be subject to refund. Amfasoft will deduct non-refundable registration fees (not to exceed $250.00) and the student tuition recovery fonds as stated on the first page of the student's enrollment agreement. Also, any specified tuition amount(s) in amendments of student's enrollment agreement or prior accommodations provided and agreed upon by the student and school officials are non-refundable. Refund Policy for Books Supplies & Materials and Exam fee: • Purchased from Amfasoft Corporation: In case of withdrawal, students must return all issued books, supplies, and materials within 10 days period from the date of issuance. All book supplies and materials must be returned in good acceptable condition. In case the returned material is not in an acceptable condition then the refund may not be given for such material. The cost of books, supplies, and materials is non-refundable after 10 days from the date issued by the school or 10 days after withdrawal, whichever occurs earlier. No exchange of any item will be awarded in case the student decides to change the program or course of study. • Purchased from outside vendors: Buying books from outside vendors is the student's responsibility and is not part of Amfasoft Corporation's contract with student or vendor, so in case of withdrawal, the student should follow the specific vendor refund policy. • For students getting Government Funds: In case of withdrawal by the student, refmids are done by the terms and conditions as set forth by the contracting agency representing the training funds and rights of students. TROWWWOM�1 FORPTIVINIII• KI 11 1_ Installment Plan: Students who are paying the course tuition from their funds may request an in-house installment payment plan at the time of enrollment so they can distribute their course payments throughout the study. Installment Policies: Students need to pay the minimum portion of the total tuition fees for the courses enrolled and pay in full to complete their enrollment. • Installment amounts and dates for each installment will be discussed and agreed to by the student. • Sign the Installment payment plan along with their enrollment agreement. 32 • Late payment penalties - $50 late payment fee is charged if payment is more than 7 days late from the installment date. Note: Amfasoft Corporation Refund policy will be applied as per State requirements as disclosed in this catalog. Amfasoft Corporation's student financing programs do not supersede California's Code of Education 94899.5. Federal or State Financial Aid Programs Amfasoft Corporation is NOT engaged in State or Federal Financial Aid programs or Title IV funding at this time. However, Amfasoft accepts WIA funding. Amfasoft Corporation is an approved Training Provider for the Workforce Investment Act (WIA) program. The Workforce Investment Act (WIA) is a federal law that provides training for people who are out of work, and who need the training to change career paths or whose skills need improving to obtain a new job. You must be determined eligible and suitable to receive WIA funds. Amfasoft Corporation offers training programs but does not determine if you qualify for WIA training funds. Students must qualify from their assigned EDD office for the approved training program. An eligibility questionnaire or qualifying brochure can be obtained either from EDD's website at lnttp://www.edd.ca.gov/unemploymentieligibility.htm or by calling (800)300-5616. Refund Payment Methods and Loan Policies Students must discuss the payment options and terms of payment with the Admissions Representative prior to signing the enrollment agreement. • A non-refundable registration fee and a non-refundable student tuition recovery fund are charged as stated explicitly to the student at the time of enrollment in the program. • Students are allowed to make payments via check, credit cards, money orders, personal loans, a loan guaranteed to the student by the Federal or State government, or third -party loans. Individual Student Loans If a student obtains a loan to pay for an educational program, the student will be responsible to repay the full amount of the loan plus interest, less the amount of any refund. If the student has received federal student financial aid funds, the student is entitled to a refund of the money's not paid from federal student financial aid program funds. If the student is eligible for a loan guaranteed by the Federal or State government and the student defaults on the loan, both of the following may occur: (a) The Federal or State government or a loan guarantee agency may take action against the student, including applying for an income tax refund to which the person (student) is entitled to reduce the balance owed on the loan. (b) The student may not be eligible for any other federal student financial aid at another institution or other government assistance until the loan is repaid by the student. 33 Funds paid by Government agencies like WIA: • Amfasoft enters contracts with the above agencies and received payments based on approved funding of the programs that the student is enrolled in. Students are not responsible to make payments in such instances. • If a student is enrolled in a program(s) for which the funds partially approved, then any arrangements made will be considered an amendment of the enrollment agreement and must be stated clearly on the enrollment agreement and agreed upon and signed and dated by the student and the designated Amfasoft Corporation school official. Enforceability of Loans A note, instrument, or other evidence of indebtedness relating to payment for an educational program is not enforceable by an institution unless, at the time of execution of the note, instrument, or other evidence of indebtedness, the institution held an approval to operate. Class make-up policies An enrolled student in a program cans make-up for any missed classes for a maximum of 4 hrs. Any additional time will be charged on an hourly basis and it will be applied to the Student's tuition. The hourly charges may vary between $30 to a maximum of $50 depending on the subject enrolled. The School Director will review and approve such make-up classes on a case by case basis. Student's Right to Cancel Refund Policy Students have the right to cancel the enrollment agreement/contract without any penalty or obligations and obtain a refund of charges paid through the attendance at the first session or the seventh day after enrollment, whichever is later. To Cancel from the Program Students are required to submit a written Notice of Cancellation as enclosed in this catalog. The student may sign and date the Notice of Cancellation and send it to the school, at the address below: Amfasoft Corporation — Main Office Attn: Director of Education 3155 Kearney Street, Suite 140, Fremont, CA 94538 Email: training@amfasoft.com The student may contact the school and request a withdrawal or cancellation from the program, via email or by submitting a signed Notice of Cancellation. Cancellations, Withdrawals, and Refund Policies As per the California Code of Regulation §94920, the following refund policy applies to the students paid from personal funds or private pay students. 34 Notice of Cancellation shall be in writing, and that a withdrawal may be effectuated by the student's written notice or by the student's conduct, including, but not necessarily limited to, a student's lack of attendance. Upon receipt of the Notice of Cancellation from the student, Amfasoft Corporation will send the student a written acknowledgment of the receipt of the request. Institutions shall refund 100 percent of the amount paid for institutional charges, less a reasonable deposit or application fee not to exceed two hundred fifty dollars ($250) if a Notice of Cancellation is made through attendance at the first class session, or the seventh class day after enrollment, whichever is later. The Bureau may adopt by regulation a different method of calculation for instruction delivered by other means, including, but not necessarily limited to, distance education. (Not applied) The institution shall have a refund policy for the return of unearned institutional charges if the student cancels an enrollment agreement or withdraws during a period of attendance. The refund policy for students who have completed 60 percent or less of the period of attendance shall be a pro-rata refund. Amfasoft will inform the student within 45days with the details of the refund money owed and the itemized breakdown of refund. All refund will be paid in 45days of the student's cancellation or withdrawal from the program *If a student has received federal student financial aid funds, the student is entitled to a refund of money not paid from federal student financial aid program funds. *If a student has received third party loans for training and enrolled at Amfasoft Corporation, upon withdrawal from the program, Amfasoft is not responsible for any interested student may owe at the time of withdrawal. Sample Refund Poficv: The student has a right to a full refund of all charges less the amount of the application fee listed in the fee section of this agreement (the amount retained may not exceed $75) if the student cancels this agreement prior to or on the first day of instruction. Thereafter, the student will receive a pro-rata refund as specified in the California Education Code. If a student completed 50% of a course, the refund would be calculated as follows: (If the student paid $1,000 tuition for a 100-hour program, $75 for an application fee, and initially paid $0 for books and supplies) Refund Example: $1,075 (Amount paid for program tuition, application and books) Less $ 75 (Amount retained by the institution for the application fee) Less $ 0 (Amount for books not pail of the refund calculation) Equals $1,000 (Amount subject to the refund calculation) Divided By $ 100 (Hours paid for, but not received) Times $ 50 (Hours completed) Equals $ 500 (Refund Amount) For this same course, the following would apply: Completed: 10% 25% 50% 60% Refund Amount: $900 $750 $500 $400 Also, upon the return of unused or re -saleable equipment or books, the student would be reimbursed for the cost of those returnable materials. Refunds will be paid within 30 days of cancellation or withdrawal. Amfasoft also offers distance educational learning programs. The institution meets the specific minimum operating standards for instruction (5 C.C.R. §71715). 35 Distance education as defined in §94834 of the Ed. Code does not require the physical presence of students and faculty at the same location but provides for interaction between students and faculty by such means as telecommunication, correspondence, electronic and computer augmented educational services, postal service, and facsimile transmission. • Amfasoft ensures that the educational program offered through distance education is appropriate for delivery through distance, Education methods. • Assess each student, before admission, to determine whether each student has the skills and competencies to succeed in a distance education environment. • Ensure that the materials and programs are current, well organized, designed by faculty competent in distance education techniques, and delivered using readily available, reliable technology. • Provide for meaningful interaction with faculty who are qualified to teach using distance education methods. • Maintain clear standards for satisfactory academic progress. • Complete timely student evaluations of learning outcomes by duly qualified faculty, which are appropriate for use with the distance education methods used and evaluated by duly qualified faculty. • Employ a sufficient number of faculty to assure that the institution's response to, or evaluation of, each student lesson is returned to the student within 10 days after the lesson is received by the institution; and, the institution's response to, or evaluation of, each student project or dissertation is returned to the student within the time disclosed in the catalog; Specific Provisions for Instruction Not in Real -Time If you enroll in a distance education program where the instruction is not offered in real-time, the first lesson and any materials shall be transmitted to you within seven days after the institution accepts you for admission. You have the right to cancel the agreement and receive a full refund pursuant to 5 CCR section 71750 before the first lesson and materials are received. Cancellation is effective on the date written notice of cancellation is sent. The institution shall make a refund pursuant to 5 CCR section 71750. If the institution sent the fast lesson and materials before an effective cancellation notice was received, the institution shall make a refund within 45 days after the student's return of the materials. An institution shall transmit all the lessons and other materials to the student if the student: (A) has fully paid for the educational program; and (B) after having received the first lesson and initial materials, requests in writing that all the material be sent. If an institution transmits the balance of the material as the student requests, the institution shall remain obligated to provide the other educational services it agreed to provide, such as responses to student inquiries, student and faculty interaction, and evaluation and comment on lessons submitted by the student, but shall not be obligated to pay any refund after all of the lessons and material are transmitted. Computer Requirements and Recommendations The student must have access to a PC or Mac -based computer to participate in the courses. Students are expected to have access to the technical requirements as Amfasoft is not obligated to and does not supply the needed technologies including software and hardware. Students who do not have personal access to a computer are encouraged to inquire as to the availability at their local public library. For the student to get the most out of our online courses, we recommend that the student have access to the following computer setup. Minimum suggested Windows browser software: Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later Mozilla Firefox 2.0 or later Minimum suggested Mae OS browser software: Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or later 36 Browser Plug -ins: Some of the suggested plug -ins may already be installed on your computer. If they are not, they are available for free download for both the Microsoft Windows and Macintosh operating systems. Adobe Acrobat Reader, which is needed to view and print supplemental PDF files RealOne Player, which is needed to listen to and watch supplemental audio and video Adobe Flash Player and Shockwave Player, which are needed to view other types of multimedia content. Browser Settings: We suggest that you have both JavaScript and cookies enabled in your browser's settings to successfully use our online courses. Operating System and Other Software: In general, the operating system (PC, Macintosh, etc.) your computer uses, as well as what version of that operating system is installed, is not important when you take one of our courses. Meeting the browser requirements above should suffice. Distance Learning Refund Policy The institution shall transmit the fast lesson and any materials to any student after the institution accepts the student for admission. The student has the right to cancel the agreement and receive a full refund before the first lesson and materials are received. Cancellation is effective on the date Amfasoft will receive written notice at 3155 Kearney Street, Suite 120, Fremont, CA 94538, or an email to training@amfasoft.com. If the institution sent the first lesson before an effective cancellation notice was received, Amfasoft shall make a refund within 45 days. Right to Cancel — CCR 71716 (a), (b), (e) The student shall have the right to cancel the agreement and receive a full refund pursuant to section 71750 before the first lesson and materials are received. Cancellation is effective on the date written notice of cancellation is sent. The institution shall make a refund pursuant to section 71750. If the institution sent the first lesson and materials before an effective cancellation notice was received, the institution shall make a refund within 45 days after the student's return of the materials. Ali institution shall transmit all the lessons and other materials to the student if the student: (A) has fully paid for the educational program; and (B) after having received the first lesson and initial materials, requests in writing that all of the material being sent. If an institution transmits the balance of the material as the student requests, the institution shall remain obligated to provide the other educational services it agreed to provide, such as responses to student inquiries, student and faculty interaction, and evaluation and comment on lessons submitted by the student, but shall not be obligated to pay any refund after all of the lessons and material are transmitted. 37 "The State of California established the Student Tuition Recovery Fund (STRF) to relieve or mitigate economic loss suffered by a student in an educational program at a qualifying institution, who is or was a California resident while enrolled, or was enrolled in a residency program, if the student enrolled in the institution, prepaid tuition, and suffered an economic loss. Unless relieved of the obligation to do so, you must pay the state -imposed assessment for the STRF, or it must be paid on your behalf, if you are a student in an educational program, who is a California resident, or are enrolled in a residency program, and prepay all or part of your tuition. You are not eligible for protection from the STRF and you are not required to pay the STRF assessment, if you are not a California resident, or are not enrolled in a residency program " "It is important that you keep copies of your enrollment agreement, financial aid documents, receipts, or any other information that documents the amount paid to the school. Questions regarding the STRF may be directed to the Bureau for Private Postsecondary Education, 2535 Capitol Oaks Drive, Suite 400, Sacramento, CA 95833, (916) 431-6959 or (888) 370-7589. To be eligible for STRF, you must be a California resident or are enrolled in a residency program, prepaid tuition, paid or deemed to have paid the STRF assessment, and suffered an economic loss as a result of any of the following: 1. The institution, a location of the institution, or an educational program offered by the institution was closed or discontinued, and you did not choose to participate in a teach -out plan approved by the Bureau or did not complete a chosen teach -out plan approved by the Bureau. 2. You were enrolled at an institution or a location of the institution within the 120 days before the closure of the institution or location of the institution or were enrolled in an educational program within the 120 days before the program was discontinued. 3. You were enrolled at an institution or a location of the institution more than 120 days before the closure of the institution or location of the institution, in an educational program offered by the institution as to which the Bureau determined there was a significant decline in the quality or value of the program more than 120 days before closure. 4. The institution has been ordered to pay a refund by the Bureau but has failed to do so. 5. The institution has failed to pay or reimburse loan proceeds under a federal student loan program as required by law or has failed to pay or reimburse proceeds received by the institution more than tuition and other costs. 6. You have been awarded restitution, a refund, or another monetary award by an arbitrator or court, based on a violation of this chapter by an institution or representative of an institution, but have been unable to collect the award from the institution. 7. You sought legal counsel that resulted in the cancellation of one or more of your student loans and have an invoice for services rendered and evidence of the cancellation of the student loan or loans. To qualify for STRF reimbursement, the application must be received within four (4) years from the date of the action or event that made the student eligible for recovery from STRF. A student whose loan is revived by a loan holder or debt collector after a period of non -collection may, at any time, file a written application for recovery from STRF for the debt that would have otherwise been eligible for recovery. If it has been more than four (4) years since the action or event that made the student eligible, the student must have filed a written application for recovery within the original four (4) year period, unless the period has been extended by another act of law. However, no claim can be paid to any student without a social security number or a taxpayer identification number." M Job Placement Assistance Following job/ career assistance will be provided by Amfasoft: - Help students prepare their resumes and sharpen interview skills. - Jobs will be posted on the bulletin board. - Individual or group counseling is available - Mock interviews will be taken by the course counselors to see where the students fit in the job market. Career Counseling Career counseling will be given to each student. During the course counseling meeting, the counselor will go over the student's educational records, work experience, and his/her preferences. The counselor also will explain the various job titles and occupations that they can pursue with the enhancement of skills after taking a course or course path. Test Centers: Armfasoft provides proctoring services for Pearson Vue, Comira, Castle, MCAT, and Kryterion testing. Students can register and schedule their certification exams at Amfasoft Test Centers at no additional costs other than the exam feeds for the certification exam being registered by the student. 39 - - ---- - ----COURSE -DEIAILS - - - - -- -- ACCOUNTING: -ALL IN ONE ---- Program Description Accounting: All in One is a comprehensive program that provides students training and hands-on practice in Bookkeeping, QuickBooks & Computerized Accounting. Upon completion of this program, the student will take the certification exam to become a Certified Bookkeeper in the module "Mastering Adjusting Entries". Course Objectives • The participants should be able to record business transactions into an accounting system • Prepare and interpret major financial reports. • Understand the accounting process and to develop skills necessary to evaluate au enterprise's financial position and its operating, investing, and financing activities • Provide the latest up to date on changes in bookkeeping and accounting rules and regulations Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing, SOC Code 43-3031 Office clerks, General- OC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details Principles of Accounting: This course concentrates on the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Topics include analyzing, journalizing, and posting transactions, adjusting entries, completion of the worksheet, financial statements, and the closing process for a service business, Accounting for Cash, Payroll Accounting, and the Combination Journal are also covered. Certification in Bookkeeping module — "Mastering Adjusting Entries": The module is focused on the accrual basis of accounting. The students will learn and have hands-on experience preparing from an unadjusted trial balance to preparing Financial Statements. Computerized Accounting: Student will learn on Microsoft Excel how to prepare Journal Entries, Trial Balances, Adjusting Entries, and Financial Statements. The student will use the formulas in Microsoft Excel to generate reports OuickBooks: Students will learn the installation, creating companies, set up customers, vendors, bank accounts, and items. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Homy Duration Maximum Completion Time Accounting: All in One 240 hour 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge :1 Instructional Material: Textbook QuickBooks Online for Beginners, 2023 Certification in Bookkeeping module — Mastering Adjusting Entries from AlPB Powerpoint slides and related project work Total Charees For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for the entire program: $6 403.00 Tuition Fee: $6028; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $300 The requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to take the final three projects in QuickBooks and take the certification bookkeeping exam in the module — "Mastering Adjusting entries". The student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 41 -- -ACCOUNTING: All in One & Payroll Certification ----- Program Description Accounting: All in One is a comprehensive program that provides students training and hands-on practice in Bookkeeping, QuickBooks & Computerized Accounting. Upon completion of this program, the student will take the certification exam to become a Certified Bookkeeper in the module "Mastering Adjusting Entries". This payroll certification is a valuable, objective credential that verifies a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities in the payroll profession. Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, secure promotions, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession. Course Objectives • The participants should be able to record business transactions into an accounting system • Prepare and interpret major financial reports. • Understand the accounting process and to develop skills necessary to evaluate an enterprise's financial position and its operating, investing, and financing activities • Provide the latest up to date on changes in bookkeeping and accounting rules and regulations • The course will give a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities to demonstrate in the Entry-level Payroll Professional. • Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession of Payroll. • There are no payroll experience requirements to take this exam. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing, SOC Code 43-3031 Office clerks, General- OC Code 43-9061 Payroll and Time Keeping Clerics SOC Code 43-3051 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing Clerks SOC Code 43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details Principles of Accounting: This course concentrates on the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Topics include analyzing, journalizing, and posting transactions, adjusting entries, completion of the worksheet, financial statements, and the closing process for a service business, Accounting for Cash, Payroll Accounting, and the Combination Journal are also covered. Certification in Bookkeeping module — "Mastering Adjusting Entries": The module is focused on the accrual basis of accounting. The students will learn and have hands-on experience preparing from an unadjusted trial balance to preparing Financial Statements. Computerized Accounting: Student will learn on Microsoft Excel how to prepare Journal Entries, Trial Balances, Adjusting Entries, and Financial Statements. The student will use the formulas in Microsoft Excel to generate reports ouickBooks: Students will learn the installation, creating companies, set up customers, vendors, bank accounts, and items. 42 Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Accounting: All in One & 480 hours 24 weeks 36 weeks Payroll Certification Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook QuickBooks online for Beginners, 2023 Certification in Bookkeeping module — Mastering Adjusting Entries from AIPB Powerpoint slides and related project work Mastering Payroll I — Textbook from AIPB Mastering Payroll II — Textbook from AIPB Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for the entire program 10 500 00 Tuition Fee: $10,000; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book $425 Supplies: Pro QuickBooks online for Beginners 2023 The requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to take the final three projects in QuickBooks and take the certification bookkeeping exam in the module — "Mastering Adjusting entries". The student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. A student may take the Payroll two certification exams offered by AIPB 43 - - - -ACCOUNTING= Taxation - Program Description Accounting: Taxation. A program that prepares individuals to provide tax advice and management services to individuals and corporations. Includes instruction in tax law and regulations, tax record systems, individual and corporate income taxation, and tax planning. Course Objectives • Federal Taxation and Understanding Federal Tax Law • Tax Practice, and Procedure • Individual Taxation • Gross Income • Deductions • Prepare for Tax Certification Exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Tax preparer - SCO Code 13-2080 Instruction Details The course, complete with extensive exercises and a final exam review, will provide you with a solid foundation about taxes, and the preparation of an accurate and complete individual income tax return. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Accounting: Taxation 200 Hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook J.K. Lasser's Your Income Tax 2023: For Preparing Your 2023 Tax Return Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for the entire program: $4,702.50 Tuition Fee: $4402.50; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $225 The requirement for completing the program End of the program students is required to take the final exam. The student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. ACCOUNTING: ' All in , Taxation Program Description Accounting: All in One is a comprehensive program that provides students training and hands-on practice in Bookkeeping, QuickBooks & Computerized Accounting. Upon completion of this program, the student will take the certification exam to become a Certified Bookkeeper in the module "Mastering Adjusting Entries", Taxation. A program that prepares individuals to provide tax advice and management services to individuals and corporations. Includes instruction in tax law and regulations, tax record systems, individual and corporate income taxation, and tax planning. Course Objectives • The participants should be able to record business transactions into an accounting system • Prepare and interpret major financial reports. • Understand the accounting process and to develop skills necessary to evaluate an enterprise's financial position and its operating, investing, and financing activities • Provide the latest up to date on changes in bookkeeping and accounting rules and regulations • Federal Taxation and Understanding Federal Tax Law • Tax Practice, and Procedure • Individual Taxation • Gross Income • Deductions • Prepare for Tax Certification Exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing, SOC Code 43-3031 Office clerks, General- OC Code 43-9061 Tax preparer - SCO Code 13-2080 Instruction Details Principles of Accounting: This course concentrates on the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Topics include analyzing, journalizing, and posting transactions, adjusting entries, completion of the worksheet, financial statements, and the closing process for a service business, Accounting for Cash, Payroll Accounting, and the Combination Journal are also covered. Certification in Bookkeeping module — "Mastering Adjusting Entries": The module is focused on the accrual basis of accounting. The students will learn and have hands-on experience preparing from an unadjusted trial balance to preparing Financial Statements. Computerized Accounting: Student will learn on Microsoft Excel how to prepare Journal Entries, Trial Balances, Adjusting Entries, and Financial Statements. The student will use the forniulas in Microsoft Excel to generate reports OuickBooks: Students will learn the installation, creating companies, set up customers, vendors, bank accounts, and items. The course, complete with extensive exercises mid a final exam review, will provide you with a solid foundation about taxes, and the preparation of an accurate and complete individual income tax return. Taxation: The course, complete with extensive exercises and a final exam review, will provide you with a solid foundation about taxes, and the preparation of an accurate and complete individual income tax return. 45 Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Accounting: All in one & Taxation 440 Hours 22 weeks 33 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook - QuickBooks online for Beginners, 2023 - Certification in Bookkeeping module — Mastering Adjusting Entries from AIPB - Powerpoint slides and related project work J.K. Lassoes Your Income Tax 2023: For Preparing Your 2023 Tax Return Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for the entire program: $9,079.50 Tuition Fee: $8704.50; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $300 The requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to take the final tbree projects in QuickBooks and take the certification bookkeeping exam in the module — "Mastering Adjusting entries". The student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. A student may take the Payroll two certification exams offered byA1PB End of the program students is required to take the final exam. The student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. .R ACCOUNTING: Taxation & QuickBooks for Accounting Program Description Accountine: Taxation: A program that prepares individuals to provide tax advice and management services to individuals and corporations. Includes instruction in tax law and regulations, tax record systems, individual and corporate income taxation, and tax planning, OuickBooks for Accounting: The QuickBooks for accounting program validates job -role skulls for entry and advanced level job seekers and seasoned professionals alike. Completion of this course can lead to a successful career as a Bookkeeper, Accountant, Auditing Officials, Financial Clerks, Administrative Services Managers, and Office Clerks Course Objectives • Federal Taxation and Understanding Federal Tax Law • Tax Practice, and Procedure • Individual Taxation • Gross Income • Deductions • Prepare for Tax Certification Exam • Learn the navigation on QuickBooks • Learn how to start and set up the QuickBooks • Accounting behind the setup of QuickBooks • How to start a new company data file? • How to restore and backup data files, Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Tax preparer SOC Code 13-2080 Human Resources Assistants SOC Code 11-3121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details Accountine: Taxation:Tbe course, complete with extensive exercises and a final exam review, will provide you with a solid foundation on the subject of taxes, and the preparation of an accurate and complete individual income tax return. OuickBooks for Accounting: This program will help students learn or review fundamental accounting concepts and principles using QuickBooks and Analysis of business events. It teaches how to set -Lip chart of Accounts, Create new item list, Vendor list, Employer list, etc. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock IIours Duration Accounting: Taxation & QuickBooks 320 Hours 16 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Maximum Completion Time 24 weeks 47 Instructional Material: Textbook J.K. Lass&s Your Income Tax 2023: For Preparing Your 2023 Tax Return QuickBooks online for Beginners, 2023 Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6,003.00 Tuition Fee: $5628; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $300 Requirement for completing the program Lad of the program students are required to take final exam and for QuicicBooks students are required to take final three projects. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Amazon Web Services Program Description Amazon Web Services Solutions Architect Certification training will enable you to design, plan, and scale AWS implementations utilizing more than 70 cloud computing services. Course Objectives • Design one or more services or applications within an organization • Understand the processes of the business well for creating a cohesive product vision. • Responsible for building and integration of computer systems and information for meeting specific needs Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learing/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to ran web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Amazon Web Services 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook AWS: Amazon Web Services. A Complete Guide from Beginners to Advanced. by Steve Fedler Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4.027.00 Tuition Fee: $3,877; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Amazon Web Service certification exam 49 Big Data Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real -world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases • Learn basic principles for working with Big Data • Learn the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Erl, Wajid Khattak, et al. Total Charees for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire uroeram: $4,877.50 Tuition Fee: $4, 727.50; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data Certification exam. 50 Big Data and Amazon Web Services Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real -world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. Amazon Web Services Solutions Architect Certification training will enable you to design, plan, and scale AWS implementations utilizing more than 70 cloud computing services. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and learn basic principles of Big Data • Leam the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms. • Design one or more services or applications within an organization • Understand the processes of the business well for creating a cohesive product vision. • Responsible for building and integration of computer systems and information for meeting specific needs Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Amazon Web Services 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Ed, Wajid Khattak, et al. AWS Certified Solutions Architect Study Guide: Associate SAA-CO1 Exam by Ben Piper and David Clinton Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $8 279 00 Tuition Fee: $8, 004; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Amazon Web Service certification exams 51 Big Data and Data Bricks Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' luiowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. Databricks is a cloud -based data engineering tool used for processing and transforming massive quantities of data and exploring the data through machine learning models. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and learn basic principles of Big Data • Learn the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine leaning algorithms • Understanding of the basics of the Spark architecture • Ability to apply the Spark Data Frame API to complete individual data manipulation tasks. • Leam the skills to pass the certification exam and to gain the industry recognition Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Data Bricks 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Ed, Wajid Khattak, et al. Azure Databricks A Complete Guide - 2019 Edition by Gerardus Blokdyk Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $8,279.00 Tuition Fee: $8,004; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Data Bricks certification exams 52 Sig Data and Deep Learning Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. In this course we will learn about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and learn basic principles of Big Data • Learn the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms. • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Leaning approaches Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaming/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Deep Learning 480 hours 24 weeks 36 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Erl, Wajid Khattak, or al. Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of: Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow , Yoshua Bengio , et al. Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $8 279 00 Tuition Fee: $8,004; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Boots: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Deep Learning certification exams 53 Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides bands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become au expert in Big Data. This course teaches the important concepts and terminology for working with Google Cloud. The courses explain how the cloud computing evolved and how the unique features of Google's approach to it. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and learn the basic principles of Big Data • Learn the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms. • Learn and compare many of the computing and storage services available in Google Cloud Platform • Learn about important resource and policy management tools used • Learn the skills needed to be successful in a cloud architecture role. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaming/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. Students will learn how to analyze and deploy infrastructure components such as networks, storage systems, and application services. Students will be prepared to take the Google Cloud certification exam. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Google Cloud 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Erl, Wajid Khattak, et al. Google Cloud Certified Professional Cloud Architect: Introducing Google Cloud (Third Edition) by Soumen Chatteriee Tuition Fee: $8,004; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Google Cloud certification exams 54 Big Data and Microsoft Azure Program Description This course will teach students to work on various real world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution Wategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. Microsoft Azure is a cloud platform that provides infastucture, managed services that you might need for your business applications. It is suited for businesses that want to leverage cloud servers. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and team basic principles of Big Data • Learn the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms • Deploy and configure Azure infrastructure • Implement workloads and security on Azure • Create and deploy apps on Azure • Implement Azure authentication and secure data Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. This course provides you with a deep understanding of the entire administrative lifecycle in Azure environments. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Microsoft Azure 400 hours 20 hours 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Erl, Wajid Khattak, et al. Exam AZ-300 & AZ-301 Study & Lab Guide Part 1: Microsoft Certified Azure Solutions Architect Expert by Harinder Kohli Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 8 279 00 Tuition Fee: $8,004; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Microsoft Azure certification exams 55 Big Data and Python Programming Program Description This course This course will teach students to work on various real -world big data projects using different Big Data tools as a part of solution strategy. The course will provide students' knowledge and skills to process big data on platforms that can handle the variety, velocity, and volume of data. This comprehensive training on framework provides hands on experience for solving real time industry based big data projects to become an expert in Big Data. development, style, and testing. Course Objectives • Student will learn how to format data using new technologies and techniques • Learn about the fundamentals of databases and learn basic principles of Big Data • Loam the basic tools for statistical analysis, R and Python, and several machine learning algorithms. • Learn how python supports other programming tasks related to web servers and big data analytics Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn tools and analytical methods to use data for decision -making, collect and organize data at scale, and gain an understanding of how data analysis can help to inform change within organizations. This course will develop both the technical and computational skills that are in high demand across a range of industries. The course gives practical exercises to familiarize students with the format of big data and how to handle and analyze large, complex and data structures. The course will provide hands-on guided practice labs using graphics and Gills to help develop fluency and understanding of python programming. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Big Data and Python Programming 480 hours 24 weeks 36 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Big Data Fundamentals: Concepts, Drivers & Techniques (The Pearson Service Technology Series from Thomas Erl) by Thomas Erl, Wajid IChattak, et al. Python for Beginners: 2 Books in 1: Python Programming for Beginners, Python Workbook by PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES ACADEMY Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $7,779.00 Tuition Fee: $7,504; Registration Fee: $75 (Nan -refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Python Programming certification exams 56 Bookkeeping & MS Office Professional Program Description This comprehensive program teaches students from Basic, Intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Office suite including Microsoft Word, Excel and Power point, Access and Bookkeeping. Students will be prepared for an entry-level to Mid -level Office Administration and Bookkeeping position. Course Objectives • Microsoft Word — To recognize and identify how Word handles simple and intermediate word processing features Create, edit, save, open, and close documents. • Microsoft Excel — Learn how to create new worksheet from beginning level to intermediate level. • Microsoft Power point — Learn how to create new slides from design layout • Understand basic bookkeeping principles • Record manual transactions and draw up a trial balance Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Secretaries slid Administrative Assistants SOC Code 43-6010 Financial Clerks SOC Code 43-3000 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing SOC Code 43-3031 Instruction Details Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerics, General SOC Code 43-9061 Microsoft Word: Microsoft® Office Word 2016 — The students will learn how to create and edit documents, save, open or close documents, apply formatting options, set tabs and indents, change the view mode, manipulate the text using features such as copy and paste, and preview and then print the document. This course is designed for students who desire the skills necessary to create, edit, format, and print basic Microsoft Office Word 2016 documents. Microsoft Excel: Microsoft@ Office Excel 2016 — The students will learn how to create, edit, and format new spreadsheets into a more visually effective spreadsheet. The student will execute simple and complex formulas, create new templates, charts, pivot table, use excel as a database, and review the page setup functions for printing. Microsoft Power point: Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2016 — Student will learn how to create new presentation slides using the slide layout and design template. The student will calm how to use the animation and sounds on the presentation slides to make it professional and innovative slide show presentation. Bookkeeping concepts - Basic bookkeeping principles and transaction entries. 57 Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Bookkeeping & MS 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Office professional Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: - Microsoft Office 2016: Introductory (Shelly Cashman Series(r) Office 2016) by Gary B. Shelly and Misty E. Vermaat - - Power point slides and Microsoft and Bookkeeping related project work Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4,002.00 Tuition Fee: $3, 602; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $325 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam in Microsoft Office suite Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and bookkeeping concepts. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. M Business Analyst Program Description Program will teach how to interact with Business users, Stakeholders, and Customers to identify information needs, gathering requirements, and initiating process changes, defining business processes and identifying risks and impact analysis on functionality, workflow, and Business rules. Course Objectives • Work with business users to document project scopes • Plan and analysis activity including quality and reviews • Break down complex business scenarios or problems into process and data models • Upon completion of this program the student will be ready for an entry-level to Mid -level Office Management Analyst job. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Management Analyst SOC Code 13-1111 Financial Analyst SOC Code 13-2051 Instruction Details Business analysts study the overall business and information needs of an organization, in order to develop solutions to business and related technology problems. Student will learn the powerful quantitative methods to make more effective business decisions. The business analyst (BA) plays a key role in the development and execution of company projects. The BA is responsible for gathering input, analyzing the needs of the project, documenting the criteria to be met, sharing information among project team members, and presenting findings to company executives Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Business Analyst 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Materials Book: The Business Analyst's Handbook [Paperback] IIoward Podeswa CBAP / CCBA Certified Business Analysis Study Guide Seven Steps to Mastering Business Analysis Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program : $4,627.50 Tuition Fee: $4,327.50; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Boots: $225 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 59 Business Analysta Oracle Financials Program Description Business Analyst: Program will teach how to interact with Business users, Stakeholders, and Customers to identify information needs, gathering requirements, and initiating process changes, defining business processes and identifying risks and impact analysis on functionality, workflow, and Business rales. Oracle Financials: This course explains how an Oracle Re112 Financials System is implemented & used by a company. The course provides the knowledge necessary for end -users & implementers to understand & use Oracle Financial Applications. Course Objectives • Work with business users to document project scopes • Plan and analysis activity including quality and reviews • Break down complex business scenarios or problems into process and data models • Upon completion of this program the student will be ready for an entry-level to Mid -level Office Management Analyst job. • Various development methodologies • Iiow to write a test plan • Test types to be considered • Effective and efficient test writing techniques Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Management Analyst SOC Code 13-1111 Financial AnalystSOC Code 13-2051 Computer and Information Analyst SOC Code 15-1120 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Instruction Details Business analysts study the overall business and information needs of an organization, in order to develop solutions to business and related technology problems. Student will learn the powerful quantitative methods to make more effective business decisions. The business analyst (BA) plays a key role in the development and execution of company projects. The BA is responsible for gathering input, analyzing the needs of the project, documenting the criteria to be met, sharing information among project team members, and presenting findings to company executives Oracle System Administration: This course gives better understand how to effectively control security, monitor your system, and handle day-to-day system administrator tasks for Oracle E-Business Suite applications, so that your organization can more rapidly realize the full value of Oracle E-Business Suite. Oracle General Ledger: This course will help you maximize accounting process efficiency across the enterprise, while still achieving a high level of information and setup security. It will teach you how Oracle General Ledger integrates with the eBusiness Suite of applications. Oracle Accounts Payable: R12.x Oracle Payables Management Fundamentals. This course will be applicable for students who have implemented Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12 or Oracle E-Business Suite 12.1. In this course, students will learn how to set up and use Oracle Payables to manage the accounts payable process. Oracle Accounts Receivables: This R12.X Oracle Receivables Management training teaches you to set up and use Oracle Receivables to manage receivables processing. Learn to manage parties & customer accounts, process invoices using Auto -Invoice, enter & complete invoices 60 Program In Duration: Course Name Clock hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Business Analyst 440 hours 22 weeks 33 weeks Oracle Financials IIi/Rel12 Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Materials Book: CBAP / CCBA Certified Business Analysis Study Guide Total Charees For Period of Attendance & Estimated charees for entire oroaram 6 003 00 Tuition Fee: $5928; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable) Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Students should complete the program at Amfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center Student required completing the program and may take the following exams 1ZO-516 Oracle EBS R12.1 General Ledger Essentials 1ZO-517 Oracle EBS R12.1 Payables Essentials 1ZO-518 Oracle EBS R12.1 Receivables Essentials 61 -Business Analyst & PMI- ACP Exam -Prep- Program Description Business Analyst: Program will teach how to interact with Business users, Stakeholders, and Customers to identify information needs, gathering requirements, and initiating process changes, defining business processes and identifying risks and impact analysis on functionality, workflow and Business rules. PMI-ACP Exam Prep: This program prepares individual with Agile Certified Practitioner Certification: PMI-ACP certification. The student will able to use agile practices in their projects, while demonstrating their increased professional versatility through agile tools and techniques. PMI-ACP certification carries a higher level of professional credibility as it requires a combination of agile training, experience working on agile projects, and examination on agile principles, practices, tools, and techniques. This global certification also supports individuals in meeting the needs of organizations that rely on project practitioners to apply a diversity of methods to their project management. Course Objectives • Work with business users to document project scopes • Plan and analysis activity including quality and reviews • Break down complex business scenarios or problems into process and data models • Upon completion of this program the student will be ready for an entry-level Management Analyst job. • Understanding of the principles and values behind Agile and Scrum • Understanding of Agile and Scram values, principles, and preparation for certification Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Management Analyst SOC Code 13-1111 Financial Analyst SOC Code 13-2051 Computer and Information Analyst SOC Code 15-1120 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Other management occupations SOC Code 11-9000 Management occupation SOC Code 11-0000 to Mid -level Office Instruction Details Business analysts: Study the overall business and information needs of an organization, in order to develop solutions to business and related technology problems. Student will learn the powerful quantitative methods to make more effective business decisions. The business analyst (BA) plays a key role in the development and execution of company projects. The BA is responsible for gathering input, analyzing the needs of the project, documenting the criteria to be met, sharing information among project team members, and presenting findings to company executives. PMI- ACP Exam Prep: This course is designed to provide an overview of Scrum as well as an understanding of the responsibilities of the roles in a Scrum project to provide a foundation for understanding the methodology. 62 Program in Duration: Course Name Business Analyst & PMI-ACP Exam Prep Clock Hours Duration 360 hours 18 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Materials Maximum Completion Time 27 weeks Book: CBAP / CCBA Certified Business Analysis Study Guide PMI-ACP Exam Pren, Second Edition: A Course in a Book for Passing the PMI Aizile Certified Practitioner (PMI- ACP,) Exam Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6,003.00 Tuition Fee: $5628; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $300 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam. Student may take the PMI- ACP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) and Student will get the course completion certificate. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 63 - - - - - -Business-Analyst & SAP FICO - -- Program Description Business Analyst: Program will teach how to interact with Business users, Stakeholders, and Customers to identify information needs, gathering requirements, and initiating process changes, defining business processes and identifying risks and impact analysis on functionality, workflow, and Business rules. SAP: FICO: This course is essential study for users of all R/3 modules, regardless of the organization's business/industry classification. To fully exploit the functionality of R/3 3.0, business users need to be both confident and proficient in the use of all the main navigational and systems functionality of SAP. This course will provide R/3 users with the knowledge and skills to perform regular tasks and procedures, including customizing activities in Financial and Controlling. Course Objectives • Work with business users to document project scopes • Plan and analysis activity including quality and reviews • Break down complex business scenarios or problems into process and data models • Upon completion of this program the student will be ready for an entry-level to Management Analyst job. • Develop strong conceptual and practical knowledge in all areas of FICO. • Provide SAP users with the knowledge and skills to perform regular task and procedures. • Grow FICO professionalism with practical examples of real -world scenarios. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Financial Specialist Computer and Information Analyst Computer Systems Analysts Other management occupations Management occupation Financial Analyst— all others SOC Code 13-2000 SOC Code 15-1120 SOC Code 15-1121 SOC Code 11-9000 SOC Code 11-0000 SOC Code 13-2099 Mid -level Office Instruction Details Business analysts study the overall business and information needs of an organization, in order to develop solutions to business and related technology problems. Student will learn the powerful quantitative methods to make more effective business decisions. The business analyst (BA) plays a key role in the development and execution of company projects. The BA is responsible for gathering input, analyzing the needs of the project, documenting the criteria to be met, sharing information among project team members, and presenting findings to company executives SAP: FICO module is a powerful, integrated environment, dynamically interfacing Accounts Receivable/Payable functions with General Ledger and Assets Accounting. You will usually encounter both FI and CO (Cost Center Controlling) in a business environment. The procedures for Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable are similar in R/3. • Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Business Analyst 360 hours 18 weeks 27 weeks SAP - FICO Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Materials Book: CBAP / CCBA Certified Business Analysis Study Guide Required Textbook: Configuring SAP ERP Financials and Controlling by Peter Jones. - Power point slides and SAP related project work Supplies: SAP GUI CD Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6 003 00 Tuition Fee: $5728; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. End of the program students are required to take a final exam and a project in Financial and Controlling. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 65 --- ---CC-NA & CCNP--Package-- ---- -- -- Program Description This is a comprehensive package which provides hands on training and preparation for certification exams. The course covers CCNA&CCNP. The CCNA Routing and Switching validates the ability to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot medium -size routed and switched networks. Course Objectives • This program of study prepares the student to become a CISCO Certified Network Associate • Extend IP addresses, using VLSM and route summarization. Configure OSPF, EIGRP, and BGP. • Control network activity using access list -based features. • Configure Cisco routers with Ethernet LAN and serial WAN interfaces Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Compu ter Network support specialist SOC Code 1.5-1231 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1241 Network and Computer system Administrator SOC Code 15-1244 Instruction Details The 100-101 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 1 (ICNDI): Student will be prepared to take ICNDI exam. This is the first step in achieving the CCNA Routing and Switching certification. The exam tests a student's knowledge and skills required to successfully install, operate, and troubleshoot a small branch office network. The exam includes topics on the Operation of IP Data Networks; LAN Switching Technologies; IP Addressing (IPv4 & IPv6); IP Routing Technologies; IP Services (DHCP, NAT, ACLs); Network Device Security; Basic Troubleshooting. The 200-101 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 2 (ICND2): Student will be prepared to take ICND2 exam. This exam is associated with the CCNA Routing and Switching certification. The exam tests a student's knowledge and skills required to successfully install, operate, and troubleshoot a small to medium -size enterprise branch network. The exam includes topics on LAN switching technologies, B? routing technologies, IP services (FHRP, syslog, SNMP v2 and v3), troubleshooting, and WAN technologies. CCNP - Imnlementing Cisco IP Routing (ROUTE): Students will learn to plan, configure and verify the implementation of secure enterprise LAN and WAN routing solutions using a range of routing protocols. CCNP - Imnlementin2 Cisco IP Switched Networks (SWITCH): Students will learn to plan, configure and verify the implementation of complex enterprise switching solutions using Cisco's Campus Enterprise Architecture. CCNP - Troubleshooting and Maintaining Cisco IP Networks (TSHOOT) - Students will learn to (1) plan and perform regular maintenance on complex enterprise routed and switched networks and (2) use technology -based practices and a systematic ITIL-compliant approach to perform network. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time CCNA & CCNP 320 hours 16 weeks 24 weeks •0 Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook • CCNA 200-301 • CCNP 300-101, 115,135 Total Charges For Period of Attendance &Estimated charges for entire program: $10 005 Tuition Fee: $9530; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Boole• $400 Requirement to obtain certification from Cisco Students may take the following certification examinations offered by Cisco. • CCNA 200-301 • CCNP 300-101, 115,135 67 - - ---_ -- ----CCNA-I-& II - - - -- --- - - Program Description CCNA 200-301 is the new industry standard networking certification for network administrators, support engineers and data center operations. The course enables you to demonstrate your skills and knowledge of IT fundamentals. The course will allow you to market yourself to a competitive IT Industry. Course Objectives Candidates after completing the program will able to take the Cisco CCNA 200-301 certification exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Network support specialist SOC Code 15-1231 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1241 Network and Computer system Administrator SOC Code 15-1244 Instruction Details Student will be prepared to take CCNA 200-301 exam. This is the first step in achieving the CCNA Routing and Switching certification. The exam tests a student's knowledge and skills required to successfully install, operate, and troubleshoot a small branch office network. The exam includes topics on the Operation of IP Data Networks; LAN Switching Technologies; IP Addressing (IPv4 & IPv6); If Routing Technologies; IP Services (DHCP, NAT, ACLs); Network Device Security; Basic Troubleshooting. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration CCNA I & II 280 hours 14 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook • CCNA 200-301 Maximum Completion Time 21 weeks Total Charees For Period of Attendance & Estimated char¢es for entire oroeram: $6,000.00 Tuition Fee: $5, 700; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $225 Requirement to obtain certification from Cisco Students may take the following certification examinations offered by Cisco. • CCNA 200-301 m CCNP Program Description The CCNP program will cover CCNP route, CCNP switch, CCNP Trouble shoot. The CCNA Routing and Switching validates the ability to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot medium -size routed and switched networks. In CCNP route you will learn how to implement advanced routing within network. IN CCNP switch you will learn how to manage switches in an enterprise campus environment. CCNP troubleshoot consists of practicing these skills and reinforcing the concepts by putting them to use in a controlled environment. The program teaches how to plan, implement, and manage local and wide -area enterprise networks as you prepare for the three exams you need to pass to earn the CCNP Routing and Switching certification: 300-101 ROUTE, 300-115 SWITCH, 300-135 TSHOOT Course Objectives • Extend IP addresses, using VLSM and route summarization. • Configure Cisco routers with Ethernet LAN and serial WAN interfaces • The program will give through hands-on training and preparation for three (3) certification exams. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Network support specialist SOC Code 15-1231 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1241 Network and Computer system Administrator SOC Code 15-1244 Instruction Details CCNP - Implementing Cisco IP Routing (ROUTE): Students will learn to plan, configure and verify the implementation of secure enterprise LAN and WAN routing solutions using a range of routing protocols. CCNP - Implementing Cisco IP Switched Networks (SWITCH): Students will learn to plan, configure and verify the implementation of complex enterprise switching solutions using Cisco's Campus Enterprise Architecture. CCNP - Troubleshooting and Maintaining Cisco IP Networks (TSHOOT) - Students will learn to (1) plan and perform regular maintenance on complex enterprise routed and switched networks and (2) use technology -based practices and a systematic ITIL-compliant approach to perform network. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time CCNP 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: CCNA I & II or equivalent knowledge or experience 69 Instructional Material: Textbook CCNP Routing and Switching certification:300-101 ROUTE, 300-115 SWITCH, 300-135 TSHOOT Tuition Fee: $5753; Registration Fee: $75(Non-refundable); Book: $175 Requirement to Obtain Certification from Cisco Students may take the following certification examinations offered by Cisco. • CCNP -ROUTE 300-101 • CCNP- SWITCH 300-115 • CCNP -TSHOOT 300-135 70 Certified Bookkeeper Program Description This program is designed for experienced bookkeepers who want to prepare for national certification. Certified Bookkeeper program is endorsed by the American Institute of Professional Bookkeepers. This program helps you to get in depth knowledge and prepare you to pass the certification exam. The program prepares students for careers in accounting and bookkeeping. The program allows students to select a specific accounting and bookkeeping jobs. Course Objectives • Obtain entry level positions as Bookkeeping, Accounting • Apply the concepts of accrual accounting to transactions that span fiscal periods • Trace the effect of accrual and deferral transactions to financial statements Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Bookkeeping, Accounting and Auditing SOC Code 43-3030 Instruction Details In this Course, students leam Adjustments, Bank Reconciliation, Depreciation and Payroll Book I and Inventory. After completion of this course the student will be qualified to take certification exams. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Certified Bookkeeper 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Prerequisite: Basic Computer knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Mastering Adjusting Entries — AIPB Bank Reconciliation — AIPB Depreciation — AIPB Payroll Book I — AIPB Inventory — AIPB Fraud and Prevention - AIPB Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6 003 00 Tuition Fee: $5678; Registration Fee: $75 (Non- refundable); Boots: $250 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the following certification exams: Mastering Adjusting Entries, Bank Reconciliation, Depreciation, Payroll Book I, Inventory and Fraud and Prevention from AIPB 71 Certified Bookkeeper & Quickbooks Program Description This program is designed for experienced bookkeepers who want to prepare for national certification. Certified Bookkeeper program is endorsed by the American Institute of Professional Bookkeepers. This program helps you to get in depth knowledge and prepare you to pass the certification exam. The program prepares students for careers in accounting and bookkeeping. The program allows students to select a specific accounting and bookkeeping jobs. The QuickBooks for accounting program validates job -role skills for entry and advanced level job seekers and seasoned professionals alike. Completion of this course can lead to a successful career as a Bookkeeper, Accountant, Auditing Officials, Financial Clerks, Administrative Services Mangers, and Office Clerks. Course Objectives Obtain entry level positions as Bookkeeping, Accounting • Apply the concepts of accrual accounting to transactions that span fiscal periods • Trace the effect of accrual and deferral transactions to financial statements • Learn the navigation on QuickBooks • Learn how to start and setup the QuickBooks • Accounting behind the setup of QuickBooks • How to start a new company data file? • How to restore and backup data files. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Bookkeeping, Accounting and Auditing SOC Code 43-3030 Human Resources Assistants SOC Code 11-3121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details In this Course, students learn Adjustments, Bank Reconciliation, Depreciation and Payroll Book I and Inventory. After completion of this course the student will be qualified to take certification exams. This program will help students learn or review fundamental accounting concepts and principles through the use of QuickBooks and Analysis of business events. It teaches how to setup chart of Accounts, Create new item list, Vendor list, Employer list, etc. Program In Duration: Course Name Certified Bookkeeper & QuickBooks Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Prerequisite: Basic Computer knowledge 72 Instructional Material: Textbook Mastering Adjusting Entries — AIPB Bank Reconciliation — AIPB Depreciation — AIPB Payroll Book I — AIPB Inventory — AIPB Fraud and Prevention — AIPB QuickBooks online for Beginners, 2023 Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire uro ram 7 979 00 Tuition Fee: $7,504; Registration Fee: $75 (Non- refundable); Book: $400 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the following certification exams: Mastering Adjusting Entries, Bank Reconciliation, Depreciation, Payroll Book I, Inventory and Fraud and Prevention fiom AIPB 73 —COMPTIA A+ Computer Technician Fundame - -- Program Description This program A+ certification is an entry level program for a career in PC support. The core training for this program is defined by the competencies emphasized by CompTIA A+ Essentials curriculum. Course Objectives Hands on Practice on the system and prepares for the A+ Core Hardware exam Hands on practice and prepares for A+ OS Technologies exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1150 Computer Network Support Specialist SOC Code 15-1152 Instruction Details The course focus on CompTIA A+ Certification exam preparation. Student will gain the needed knowledge computer hardware and operating systems. The course will cover the essential principles of installing, building, upgrading, repairing, configuring, troubleshooting, optimizing, diagnosing, and preventive maintenance and you'll learn elements of customer service and communication skills necessary to work with clients. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Comptia A+ Computer Technician Fundamentals 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4.077.00 Tuition Fee: $3750; Registration Fee: $77 (Non-refundable); Book: $250 Requirement for completing the program: Student will get to train and prepare individuals to achieve CompTlA A+ Certification by passing the following exams. CompTIA A+ Certification All -in -One Exam Guide, Tenth Edition (Exams 220-1001 & 220-1002) qw- 74 COMPTIA Network+ Program Description This course is intended for entry-level computer support professionals with basic knowledge of computer hardware, software, and operating systems, who wish to increase their knowledge and understanding of networking concepts and skills to prepare for a career in network support or administration, or to prepare for the CompTIA Network+ exam. You will identify and describe all the major networking technologies, systems, skills, and tools in use in modern PC -based computer networks. Course Objectives Hands on Practice on the system and prepares for the Network+ exam Hands on practice and prepares for A+ OS Technologies exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1150 Computer Network support Specialist SOC Code 15-1152 Instruction Details The course focuses on CompTIA Network+ Certification exam preparation. Student will gain the needed knowledge computer hardware and operating systems. The course will cover the essential principles of installing, building, upgrading, repairing, configuring, troubleshooting, optimizing, diagnosing, and preventive maintenance and you will learn elements of customer service and communication skills necessary to work with clients. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time CompTIA Network+ 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: CompTIA Network+ All-hn-One Exam Guide, Eighth Edition (Exam N 10-008) Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3 051 50 Tuition Fee: $2900; Registration Fee: $76.50 (Non-refundable); Book: $75 Requirement for completing the program: Student will get to train and prepare individuals to achieve CompTIA Network+ Certification by passing the following exams: Exam N10-007: CompTIA Network+ 'cIpTifib AUTHORtZEC} , PARTNER 75 -- - ---- COMPTIA-Strata Certification Program Description The Strata IT Fundamentals certification is ideal for individuals and students preparing to enter the IT workforce and professionals changing careers to IT or technology -related fields Course Objectives Prepare students for certification exams. Hands on practice and prepares for Network+ OS Technologies exams Obtain entry level positions as Computer Support Specialists Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC CODE 15-1150 Computer Network Support Specialist SOC CODE 15-1152 Instruction Details IT Fundamentals - Fundamentals of PC Functionality measures a candidate's knowledge of basic ICT vocabulary and PC components. The exam covers the basics of setting up a PC workstation, installing software and recognizing / preventing security threats. CompTIA Network+: The course contains concise information on security essentials and standards, using practical examples and insights drawn from real -world experience and covers key exam topics including network technologies, media and topologies, devices, management, tools, and security. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time CompTIA Strata Cert. 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: CompTIA Strata IT Fundamentals Quick Reference by Darril Gibson CompTIA Network+ All -In -One Exam Guide, Eighth Edition (Exam N10-008) Tuition Fee: $5275; Registration Fee: $78 Book: $150 Requirement for completing the program: CompTIA Network+ All -In -One Exam Guide, Eighth Edition (Exam N10-008) 76 Computerized Accounting & Bookkeeping Program Description This comprehensive program centers on the Application of Accounting and Procedures by Data entry of Business transactions into a computerized system. It specializes in computerized accounting which leads to careers in an Accounting, Bookkeeping and Financial Industries. Course Objectives • Appreciate the advantages of computerized accounts • Ensure data accuracy and confidentiality is adhered to during financial transactions • Implement appropriate back-up procedures for the computerized accounts system Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Administrative Services Managers SOC Code 11-3011 Business Operations Specialists SOC Code 13-1000 Financial Clerks SOC Code SOC Code 43-3000 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing SOC Code 43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details This course is designed to help students understand the basic principles of the accounting cycle. The course is emphasis on the analysis and recording of business transactions; preparation and interpretation of financial statements; accounting systems and banking. Student will learn how to record journal entries, prepare trial balances, reconcile the bank statements using Microsoft Excel and QuickBooks Software. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Computerized Accounting & Bookkeeping 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 4 000 00 Tuition Fee: $3675; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $250 Instructional Material: Textbook: -PowerPoint slides -Quickbooks online for Beginners 2023 Supplies: QuickBooks online version software Requirement for completing the program: Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects 77 Program Description This comprehensive program centers on the Application of Accounting and Procedures by Data entry of Business transactions into a computerized system. It specializes in computerized accounting which leads to careers in an Accounting, Bookkeeping and Financial Industries. It also teaches students from Basic, and Intermediate levels of Microsoft Office suite including Microsoft Word, Excel, Power point, and Access. Course Objectives • Appreciate the advantages of computerized accounts • Ensure data accuracy and confidentiality is adhered to during financial transactions • Implement appropriate back-up procedures for the computerized accounts system • Microsoft Word — To recognize and identify how Word handles simple and intermediate word processing features Create, edit, save, open, and close documents. • Microsoft Excel — Learn how to create new worksheet from beginning level to intermediate level. • Microsoft Power point— Learn how to create new slides from design layout • Understand basic bookkeeping principles • Record manual transactions and draw up a trial balance • Identify the main components of a computer system Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Administrative Services Managers SOC Codel1-3011 Financial Clerks SOC Code 43-3000 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing SOC Code 43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details Computerized Accounting: This course is designed to help students understand the basic principles of the accounting cycle. The course is emphasis on the analysis and recording of business transactions; preparation and interpretation of financial statements; accounting systems and banking. Student will learn how to record journal entries, prepare trial balances, reconcile the bank statements using Microsoft Excel and QuickBooks Software. Microsoft Word: Microsoft© Office Word 2016 — The students will learn how to create and edit documents, save, open or close documents, apply formatting options, set tabs and indents, change the view mode, manipulate the text using features such as copy and paste, and preview and then print the document. This course is designed for students who desire the skills necessary to create, edit, format, and print basic Microsoft Office Word 2016 documents. MicrosoftExcel: MicrosoftV Office Excel 2016 — The students will learn how to create, edit, and format new spreadsheets into a more visually effective spreadsheet. The student will execute simple and complex formulas, create new templates, charts, pivot table, use excel as a database, and review the page setup functions for printing. Microsoft Power point: Microsoft® Office PowerPoint 2016 — Student will learn how to create new presentation slides using the slide layout and design template. The student will earn how to use the animation and sounds on the presentation slides to make it professional and innovative slide show presentation. m Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Computerized Accounting & MS 280 hours 14 weeks 15 weeks Office professional Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 6 003 00 Tuition Fee: $5700; Registration Fee: $78 (Non-refundable); Book: $225 Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook: -Microsoft Office 2016: Introductory (Shelly Cashman Series(r) Office 2016) by Gary B. Shelly and Misty E. Vennaat -PowerPoint slides - Quickbooks online for Beginners 2023 supplies: QuickBooks online version 2023 software Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam in Microsoft Office suite Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and bookkeeping concepts. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 79 Data Bricks Program Description Databricks is a cloud -based data engineering tool used for processing and transforming massive quantities of data and exploring the data through machine teaming models. Course Objectives • Understanding of the basics of the Spark architecture • Ability to apply the Spark Data Frame API to complete individual data manipulation tasks. • Learn the skills to pass the certification exam and to gain the industry recognition Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Flours Duration Maximum Completion Time Data Bricks 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Azure Databricks A Complete Guide - 2019 Edition by Gerardus Blokdvk Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4,027.00 Tuition Fee: $3,875; Registration Fee: $77 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Data Bricks certification exam �- 01 Deep Learning Program Description In this course we will learn about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. Course Objectives • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Learning approaches Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Deep Learning 240 hours 12 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Inowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow , Yoshua Bengio , et al. Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire urogram• $4 877 50 Tuition Fee: $4, 725; Registration Fee: $77.50 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Deep Learning certification exam. 01 Deep Learning and Amazon Web Services Program Description In this course we will learn about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. Amazon Web Services Solutions Architect Certification training will enable you to design, plan, and scale AWS implementations utilizing more than 70 cloud computing services. Course Objectives • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Learning approaches • Design one or more services or applications within an organization • Understand the processes of the business well for creating a cohesive product vision. • Responsible for building and integration of computer systems and information for meeting specific needs Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Sob Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Deep Learning and Amazon Web Services 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Inowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio , et al. AWS Certified Solutions Architect Study Guide: Associate SAA-COl Exam by Ben Piper and David Clinton Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $8,279.00 Tuition Fee: $8, 000; Registration Fee: $79 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Deep Learning and Amazon Web Services certification exams M Deep Learning and Google Cloud Program Description In this course we will learn about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. This course teaches the important concepts and terminology for working with Google Cloud. The courses explain how the cloud computing evolved and how the unique features of Google's approach to it. Course Objectives • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Leanring approaches • Learn and compare many of the computing and storage services available in Google Cloud Platform • Learn about important resource and policy management tools used • Loam the skills needed to be successful in a cloud architecture role. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. Students will learn how to analyze and deploy infrastructure components such as networks, storage systems, and application services. Students will be prepared to take the Google Cloud certification exam. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Deep Learning and Google Cloud 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow , Yoshua Bengio , et al. Google Cloud Certified Professional Cloud Architect: Introducing Google Cloud (Third Edition) by Soumen Chatteriee Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire program: $8 279 00 Tuition Fee: $8,000; Registration Fee: $79 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Deep Learning and Google Cloud certification exams .31 Deep Learning and Microsoft Azure Program Description In this course we will learn about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. Microsoft Azure is a cloud platform that provides infrastructure, managed services that you might need for your business applications. It is suited for businesses that want to leverage cloud servers. Course Objectives • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Learning approaches • Deploy and configure Azure infrastructure • Implement workloads and security on Azure • Create and deploy apps on Azure • Implement Azure authentication and secure data Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. This course provides you with a deep understanding of the entire administrative lifecycle in Azure environments. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Deep Learning and Microsoft Azure 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of'. Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow , Yoshua Bengio , or al. Exam AZ-300 & AZ-301 Study & Lab Guide Part 1: Microsoft Certified Azure Solutions Architect Expert by Harinder Kohli Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $8,275.00 Tuition Fee: $8,000; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book, $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Deep Learning and Microsoft Azure certification exams :A Docker Program Description This course will train you to install Docker on various platforms. You will learn how to assimilate basic container and learn the life cycle of the container and the various stages of development. You will also learn the difference between the container and the virtual machine. Course Objectives • Ways to nin applications on the deployed Kubemetes environment and access the deployed applications • Enable the ability to use the same APIs for all your private and public data centers. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details You will learn how to install your own local registry, volumes, container networking, orchestrating containers, and will learn how to debug your containers. You will build an HTTP server image, run as a service, and connect to it. Also, you will learn how to create a swarm and prepare your containers for production. Program In Duration: Course Name Docker Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 100 hours 5 weeks 7 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Docker Quick Start Guide: Learn Docker like a boss, and finally own your applications by Earl Wand Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire program: $3 000 00 Tuition Fee: $2,850; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Docker certification exam 85 Program Description This course will train you to install Docker on various platforms. You will learn how to assimilate basic container and learn the life cycle of the container and the various stages of development. You will also learn the difference between the container and the virtual machine. This course offers an introduction to Kubemetes and provides instruction on how to deploy a stand-alone and multi - tier application. You will learn how to install and use Kubernetes on your local workstation Course Objectives • Ways to run applications on the deployed Kubernetes environment and access the deployed applications • Enable the ability to use the same APIs for all your private and public data centers. • How to install Docker and Kubernetes locally Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details You will learn how to install your own local registry, volumes, container networking, orchestrating containers, and will learn how to debug your containers. You will build an HTTP server image, run as a service, and connect to it. Also, you will learn how to create a swarm and prepare your containers for production. Students will have a solid understanding of the origin, architecture and building blocks for Kubernetes. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Docker and Kubernetes 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Docker Quick Start Guide: Learn Docker like a boss, and finally own your applications by Earl Wand Kubernetes: Build and Deploy Modern Applications in a Scalable Infrastructure. The Complete Guide to the Most Modern Scalable Software Infrastructure. (Docker & Kubernetes Book 2) Book 2 of 2: Docker & Kubernetes I by Jordan Liov Total Charles for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $5,085.00 Tuition Fee: $4,810; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Big Data and Amazon Web Services certification exams Fro Google Cloud Program Description This course teaches the important concepts and terminology for working with Google Cloud. The courses explain how the cloud computing evolved and how the unique features of Google's approach to it. Course Objectives • Learn and compare many of the computing and storage services available in Google Cloud Platform • Learn about important resource and policy management tools used • Learn the skills needed to be successful in a cloud architecture role. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaming/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details Students will learn bow to analyze and deploy infrastructure components such as networks, storage systems, and application services. Students will be prepared to take the Google Cloud certification exam. Program In Duration: Course Name Google Cloud Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Google Cloud Certified Professional Cloud Architect: Introducing Google Cloud (Third Edition) by Soumen Chatteriee Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire nroaram• $4 025 00 Tuition Fee: $3,875; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Google Cloud certification exam. 87 Kubemetes Program Description This course offers an introduction to Kubemetes and provides instruction on how to deploy a stand-alone and multi - tier application. You will leans how to install and use Kubemetes on your local workstation Course Objectives • Ways to run applications on the deployed Kubemetes environment and access the deployed applications • Enable the ability to use the same APIs for all your private and public data centers. • How to install Kubemetes locally Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to imi web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Kubemetes 100 hours 5 weeks 7 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Kubemetes: Build and Deploy Modern Applications in a Scalable Infrastructure. The Complete Guide to the Most Modem Scalable Software Infrastructure. (Docker & Kubemetes Book 2) Book 2 of 2: Docker & Kubemetes I by Jordan Liov Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3,000.00 Tuition Fee: $2,850; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Kubemetes certification exam Linux System Administration Program Description Linux Administrator is responsible for developing and maintaining Linux deployment standards, maintaining existing systems and implementing new technologies. Linux is a Unix -like operating system that was designed to provide personal computer users a free or very low-cost operating system comparable to traditional. Course Objectives Linux administration course teaches students how to install, configure and maintain a Linux system in a networked environment. Upon completion of this course, students will be prepared to competently maintain a Linux system in a networked business environment. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer System Analyst SOC Code 15-1211 Computer User support Analyst SOC Code 15-1232 Instruction Details This program covers basic installation, operating, and troubleshooting services for the Linux operating system and hardware on workstations and servers. Basic system administration tasks are also covered. This course will prepare for Linux Certification exam. Program hi Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Linux System Administration 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire Program: $3 595 00 Tuition Fee: $3370; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $150 Instructional Material: Oracle Linux Fundamentals- eBook from Oracle University Requirement for completing the program: Student are required to take 1 ZO-409 Exam: Oracle Linux Fundamentals -- -- - Machine Learning -and DataScience --- - - ----I Program Description This package provides an understanding of the foundations of data science and its applications and a broad introduction to machine learning and algorithms and learn how the data science process can be used to address business problems. Course Objectives • How machine leaming uses algorithms to search for patterns in data • Learn the principles of machine learning and the importance of algoriduns. • Understanding of machine learning • Learn how complex data can be harnessed to grow and scale an organization Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The courses will discuss about the recent applications of machine learning, such as to robotic control, data mining, autonomous navigation, bioinformatics, speech recognition, and text and web data processing. The course will teach how to develop your planning and strategy skills by implementing a data science project. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Machine Learning and Data Science 300 hours 15 weeks 22.5 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Guide for Beginners to Understand Data Science Through the Business Applications Kindle Edition by Samuel Hack Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms by Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben - David Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire Program: $6,000.00 Tuition Fee: $5, 725.00; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete the projects in Machine Learning and Data Science. Student will get the course completion certificate Cl Machine Learning, Data Science and Deep Learning Program Description This package provides an understanding of the foundations of data science and its applications and a broad introduction to machine Teaming and algorithms and learn how the data science process can be used to address business problems. In this course you will also team about the basics of deep neural networks, and their applications to various tasks. The course aim is to present the mathematical, statistical, and computational challenges of building stable representations for high -dimensional data. Course Objectives • Design one or more services or applications within an organization • Understand the processes of the business well for creating a cohesive product vision. • Responsible for building and integration of computer systems and information for meeting specific needs • Learn the tools required for building Deep Learning models. • Explore multiple architectures and understand how to fine-tune and continuously improve models • Learn how the same task can be solved using multiple Deep Learning approaches • How machine learning uses algorithms to search for patterns in data • Learn the principles of machine learning and the importance of algorithms. • Understanding of machine learning • Leam how complex data can be harnessed to grow and scale an organization Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The courses will discuss about the recent applications of machine learning, such as to robotic control, data mining, autonomous navigation, biomformatics, speech recognition, and text and web data processing. The course will teach how to develop your planning and strategy skills by implementing a data science project. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Students will have significant familiarity with the subject and be able to apply Deep Learning to a variety of tasks. They will also be positioned to understand much of the current literature on the topic and extend their knowledge through further study. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Machine Learning, Data Science and Deep Learning 540 hours 27 weeks 40.5 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 91 Instructional Material: Textbook Deep Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series) Part of Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning series (21 Books) I by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio , et al. Guide for Beginners to Understand Data Science Through the Business Applications Kindle Edition by Samuel Hack Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $10,425.00 Tuition Fee: $10,050.00; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $300.00 Requirement for completing the program Student may take the Machine Learning, Data Science and Deep Learning certification exam 92 Microsoft Azure Program Description Microsoft Azure is a cloud platform that provides infrastructure, managed services that you might need for your business applications. It is suited for businesses that want to leverage cloud servers. Course Objectives • Deploy and configure Azure infrastructure • Implement workloads and security on Azure • Create and deploy apps on Azure • Implement Azure authentication and secure data Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details This course provides you with a deep understanding of the entire administrative lifecycle in Azure environments. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Microsoft Azure 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Exam AZ-300 & AZ-301 Study & Lab Guide Part 1: Microsoft Certified Azure Solutions Architect Expert by Harinder Kohli Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire Program: $4 025 00 Tuition Fee: $3,875; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Microsoft Azure certification exam 93 -- Microsoft Azure and Data -Bricks Program Description Microsoft Azure is a cloud platform that provides infrastructure, managed services that you might need for your business applications. It is suited for businesses that want to leverage cloud servers. Databricks is a cloud -based data engineering tool used for processing and transforming massive quantities of data and exploring the data through machine learning models. Databricks is a cloud -based data engineering tool used for processing and transforming massive quantities of data and exploring the data through machine learning models. Course Objectives • Deploy and configure Azure infrastructure • Implement workloads and security on Azure • Create and deploy apps on Azure • Implement Azure authentication and secure data • Understanding of the basics of the Spark architecture • Ability to apply the Spark Data Frame API to complete individual data manipulation tasks. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaming/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Tides/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details This course provides you with a deep understanding of the entire administrative lifecycle in Azure environments. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to run web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. The course will teach students how to transform their businesses using cloud. The students will able to learn how to secure cloud computing service platform, its advantages on functionality to help businesses scale and grow. Student will also learn to ran web and application servers in the cloud to host dynamic websites. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Microsoft Azure and Data Bricks 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Exam AZ-300 & AZ-301 Study & Lab Guide Part 1: Microsoft Certified Azure Solutions Architect Expert by Harinder Kohli Azure Databricks A Complete Guide - 2019 Edition by Gerardus Blokdyk Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6,000.00 Tuition Fee: $5,725; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Microsoft Azure and Data Bricks certification exams E. Microsoft Certification Package Program Description Prepare for certification in Windows 10 Configuration and learn everything you need to pass the exam. This series is for anyone who wants to achieve MCTS 70-680 certification. This course is intended for Windows 10 desktop support technicians who resolve Tier 1 and 2 problems on desktop computers. Candidates for the Microsoft Certified Technology Specialist in Windows Server 2019 Active Directory Configuration (MCTS: WS08 Active Directory Configuration) demonstrate an IT professional's in-depth, current skills on Active Directory, network infrastructure, or applications infrastructure. Exam 70-640. This exam measures your ability to accomplish the technical tasks listed below. The student will be able to work with Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Infrastructure. The program provides the skills necessary to gain Microsoft's Server 2019 MCITP Network Administrator (Microsoft Certified IT Professional) certification. The MCITP credential provides widely recognized, objective validation of an individual's ability to perform critical, current information technology (IT) job duties using Microsoft technologies to the best advantage. The program Windows Server Administration Tools enables IT administrators to manage roles and features that are installed on computers that are running Windows Server® 2019 R2, Windows ServergO 2019, or Windows ServerQD 2019, from a remote computer that is running Windows 10 or Windows 10 with SPl. Course Objectives Complete and detailed walkthrough of Windows 10 installation, upgrades, migration and deployment Detailed instruction on VPN's, encryption, file management and automated backup configurations Identify and Resolve Desktop Application Issues Identify the Cause of and Resolve Networking Issues Manage and Maintain Systems That Run Windows 10 Support Mobile Users Identify the Cause of and Resolve Security Issues Describe the features and functionality of Active Directory Domain Services. Perform secure and efficient administration of Active Directory. Improve the security of authentication in an AD DS Domain. Configure Domain Name System. Administer AD DS domain controllers. Manage sites and Active Directory Replication. Monitor maintain and back up directory Service to ensure Directory Service continuity. Manage multiple domains and forests. Manage User Desktops with Group Policy. Manage enterprise security and configuration by using Group Policy settings. Secure administration. Design IIS for Web -based applications. Design file and print service specific to the needs of a given scenario Design file replication and caching to support branch office and mobile users. Identify different ways that applications and data can be configured to support business continuity and select an appropriate method for a given scenario Design a virtualization infrastructure. Design and implement a WSUS solution Install and configure Windows 2019 Server Install, configure, manage, and support a network infrastructure that uses Microsoft Windows 2019 server Gain skills needed to create a networking services infrastructure design that supports the required network applications Learn network solution technologies including DHCP, IP, OSPF, RIP, and IGMP 95 Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC CODE 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC CODE 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC CODE 15-1152 Instruction Details Focused on Windows 10 configuration, this course targets the MCTS Exam for Windows 10 Configuring and includes the following skills based instructional topics: hnstall or upgrade to Windows 10; migrate user data. Deploy system images and configure application compatibility. Implement IPv4, IPv6, wireless, VPN, mobile, and remote connectivity. Set up Internet Explorerg and Windows Firewall. Configure Windows BitLocker®, UAC, and access to shared resources. Manage devices, drivers, and disks. Monitor, update, back up, and performance -tune your system. Focused on planning and managing a client life -cycle strategy, designing a standard image and client configurations, planning Windows 10 client deployment, managing application compatibility, and identifying and resolving issues with deployment and configuration. Focused on Windows Server 2019 networking, this course covers configuring remote access, Network Access Protection (NAP), network authentication,lPv4 and IPv6 addressing, and Domain Name System (DNS) replication; capturing performance data and monitoring event logs; and managing file and print services. Focused on Windows Server 2019 administration, this course covers planning server roles; maintaining server security; planning data storage, network load balancing, and server backups; managing software deployment and versioning; monitoring IPv6, server performance and capacity, and Active Directory® replication; scheduling server deployments; and designing a rollback contingency plan. Students will learn how to design application infrastructure solutions based on Windows Server 2019 to meet varying business and technical requirements. Focused on Windows Server 2019 enterprise administration, topics include planning networks and application services; Microsoft has training will give more effective and productive after achieving this valuable technical certification. Focused on Windows Server 2019 networking, this course covers configuring remote access, Network Access Protection (NAP), network authentication, IPv4 and IPv6 addressing, and Domain Name System (DNS) replication; capturing performance data and monitoring event logs; and managing file and print services. Focused Windows Server 2019 Applications Infrastructure technologies, this course covers Terminal Services, Web Services infrastructure and security, Media Server, Microsoft Windows® SharePoint© Services server options, File Server, Print Services, network maintenance, and Simple Network Management Protocol. Program In Duration: Course Name Completion Time Microsoft Certification Package Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Clock Hours Duration Maximum 700 Hours 35 weeks 52.5 weeks 96 Instructional Material: Exam 70-680: Windows 10 Configuration with Lab Manual Set (Microsoft Official Academic Course Series) by Microsoft Official Academic Course MCITP Self -Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-685): Windows 10, Enterprise Desktop Support Technician (Pro - Certification... by Tony Northrup and J.C. Mackin Self -Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-640): Configuring Windows Server 2019 Active Directory (Self -Paced Training Kits... by Dan Holme, Nelson Ruest, Danielle Ruest and Jason Kellington MCITP Guide to Microsoft Windows Server 2019, Enterprise Administration (Exam # 70-647) (Mots) by Darril Gibson Self -Paced Training Kit Exam 70-642: Configuring Windows Server 2019 Network Infrastructure by Tony Northrup and J.C. Mackin Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $13575.00 Tuition Fee: $13000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book. $500 Requirement for completing the program: Student required completing the program and may take the exam offered by Microsoft. 97 Program Description Microsoft Office 2016 is the current version of the company's software package that features several productivity applications, including Word, PowerPoint, and Excel. Course Objectives • Use an integrated software package, specifically the applications included in the Microsoft Office suite • Demonstrate marketable skills for enhanced employment opportunities • Describe proper computer techniques for designing and producing various types of documents • Demonstrate the common commands and techniques used in working with the Windows desktop • Use WordPad and MSWord to create various types of documents • Create headings and titles with Word Art • Create and format spreadsheets, including the use of mathematical formulas • Demonstrate a working knowledge of computer database functions, including putting, processing, querying and outputting data • Define computer terminology in definition matching quizzes • Use a presentation application to create a presentation containing both text and graphics • Copy data from one MS Office application to another application in the suite • Use e-mail and the Internet to send Word and Excel file attachments Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Customer Service SOC CODE 43-4051 Database Administrator SOC CODE 15-1140 Office Administrator SOC CODE 43-0000 Instruction Details This course uses the Microsoft Office suite to teach students computer basics, including Windows, word processing, spreadsheets, data processing, graphics, Internet, and e-mail. Students learn how to use all the applications in the MS Office suite and how to transfer data from one application to another. After course completion, students will be able to use these programs for business and personal use Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Microsoft All in One 80 hours 4 weeks 8 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: - Microsoft Office 2016: Introductory (Shelly Cashman Series(r) Office 2016) by Gary B. Shelly and Misty E. Vermaat Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $2075.00 Tuition Fee: $1800; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam in Microsoft Office suite Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Hc: MS Office Professional & QuickBooks for Accounting Program Description MS Office Professional: This comprehensive program teaches students from Basic, Intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Office suite including Microsoft Word, Excel and Power point, Access and Bookkeeping. Students will be prepared for an entry-level to Mid -level Office Administration and Bookkeeping position. OuickBooks for Accounting: The QuickBooks for accounting program validates job -role skills for entry and advanced level job seekers and seasoned professionals alike. Completion of this course can lead to a successful career as a Bookkeeper, Accountant, Auditing Officials, Financial Clerks, Administrative Services Mangers, and Office Clerks Course Objectives • Microsoft Word — To recognize and identify how Word handles simple and intermediate word processing features Create, edit, save, open, and close documents. • Microsoft Excel — Learn how to create new worksheet from beginning level to intermediate level. • Microsoft Power point — Learn how to create new slides from design layout • Understand basic bookkeeping principles • Record manual transactions and draw up a trial balance Identify the main components of a computer system Learn the navigation on QuickBooks Learn how to start and setup the QuickBooks Accounting behind the setup of QuickBooks How to start a new company data file? How to restore and backup data files. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Administrative Services Managers SOC Code 11-3011 Financial Clerks SOC Code 43-3000 Bookkeeping, Accounting & Auditing SOC Code43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Instruction Details MS Office Professional: Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Human Resources Assistants SOC Code 11-3121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Microsoft Word: Microsoftm Office Word 2016 — The students will learn how to create and edit documents, save, open or close documents, apply formatting options, set tabs and indents, change the view mode, manipulate the text using features such as copy and paste, and preview and then print the document. This course is designed for students who desire the skills necessary to create, edit, format, and print basic Microsoft Office Word documents. Microsoft Excel: Microsoft@ Office Excel 2016 — The students will learn how to create, edit and format new spreadsheets into a more visually effective spreadsheet. The student will execute simple and complex formulas, create new templates, charts, pivot table, use excel as a database, and review the page setup functions for printing. Microsoft Power point: Microsoft® Office PowerPoint 2016 — Student will learn how to create new presentation slides using the slide layout and design template. The student will earn how to use the animation and sounds on the presentation slides to make it professional and innovative slide show presentation. OttickBooks for Accounting: This program will help students learn or review fundamental accounting concepts and principles using QuicicBooks and Analysis of business events. It teaches how to setup chart of Accounts, Create new item list, Vendor list, Employer list, etc. Program in Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time MS 320 hours 16 weeks 24 weeks Office professional & QuickBooks for Accounting Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: - Microsoft Office 2016: Introductory (Shelly Cashman Series(r) Office 2016) by Gary B. Shelly and Misty E. Vennaat - - Power point slides and Microsoft and Bookkeeping related project work Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $5,700.00 Tuition Fee: $5,325; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $ 300 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam in Microsoft Office suite Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and bookkeeping concepts. For QuickBooks students are required to take three final projects. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 100 Oracle 12c Program Description This Oracle Database 12c: Administration Workshop I Release 2 course explores the fundamentals of basic database administration. Expert Oracle University instructors will reinforce topics with structured hands-on practices that will prepare you for the corresponding Oracle Certified Associate exam. This program focuses on Oracle Database Administration II, backup recovery, networking, and performance tuning. Included are theory and hands-on practice using the Oracle database engine, Oracle server, Oracle NET, Oracle Enterprise Manager, and tuning tools. Course Objectives • Retrieve row and column data from tables with the SELECT statement. • Create reports of sorted data. • Display data from multiple tables. • Use DML statements to manage data. • Use DDL statements to manage • Manage data concurrency • Monitor performance • Describe Oracle Database Architecture • Install Oracle Grid Infrastructure. • Create and manage users. • Install and configure an Oracle Database. • Create and manage storage structures. • Administer the Oracle Database. • Understand the Oracle database architecture and how its components work and interact with one another. • Perform backup and recovery • Back and recover a database (and its parts) with RMAN (command -line and Enterprise Manager) • Use flashback technology to view past states of data and to revert either objects or the entire database back to a past state • Use an appropriate and flexible memory configuration for your database • Identify burdensome database sessions and poorly performing SQL • Configure the Oracle Database for optimal recovery • Configure the database instance such that resources are appropriately allocated among sessions and tasks • Schedule jobs to run inside or outside of the database • Use compression to optimize database storage and duplicate a database Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Database Administrator SOC Code 15-1141 101 Instruction Details Oracle Database 12c Administration I: This Oracle Database I Ig: Administration Workshop I — In this course you will learn how to create an operational database and effectively manage the various structures in an effective and efficient manner. This includes performance monitoring, database security, user management and backup/recovery techniques. Oracle Database 12c Administration II: This Oracle Database I Ig: Administration Workshop II Release 2 training takes the database administrator beyond the basic tasks covered in the fast workshop. You will begin by gaining a deep understanding of the most important responsibilities a DBA has: performing backup and recovery. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle 12c 240 hours 12 weeks IS weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer knowledge Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle Database 12c- Admin I Oracle University eBook- Oracle Database 12c- Admin II Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $5700.00 Tuition Fee: $5375; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $250 Requirement for completing the program: Student required completing the program and may take the exam: Oracle Database 12c: Administration 1 exam (lZ0-052) offered by Oracle. Student required completing the program and may take the exam: Oracle Database 12c: Administration II - 1ZO-053 offered by Oracle. 102 Oracle M/11e112 Project Management Program Description This course explains how an Oracle Re112 Financials System is implemented & used by a company. The course provides the knowledge necessary for end -users & implementers to understand & use Oracle Financial Applications and Project Management Course Objectives • Various development methodologies • How to write a test plan • Test types to be considered • Effective and efficient test writing techniques • Teach Project management principles according to the Project management Institute, A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge, (PMBOK® Guide)- Sixth Edition, Project Management Institute, Inc. • Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. • Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Financial Managers SOC Code 11-3031 General and Operations Manager SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production manager SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Manager SOC Code 11-3061 Managers, All others SOC Code 11-9199 Industrial Engineers SOC Code 17-2112 Financial Analyst SOC Code 13-2051 Instruction Details Oracle Financials III/ReII2: The course is comprehensive of Oracle Financials Re112 & Project Management. Students will learn modules required for Oracle Financials I Ii/ReII2 such as AOL, SYSTEM ADMIN, GL, AR, and AP. The course will enhance your understanding of configuration and implementation for all modules. Project Management: Project Management Professional (PMP®). In this course, you gain skills to help you prepare for the PMP© exam through practice exams and workshops. The course covers essential project management skills which include: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring, Mapping, Controlling and Closing process. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oraclel li/ReI12 Project Management 520 hours 26 weeks 36 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 103 Instructional Material: Textbook Oracle University eBook- Oracle Financials l li/Re112 Oracle University eBook— System Administration Oracle University eBook— General Ledger Oracle University eBook— Accounts Receivable Oracle University eBook— Accounts Payable PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy Supplies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6000.00 Tuition Fee: $5625; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $300 Requirement to obtain Certification from Oracle and Project Management Institute Students should complete the program at Amfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center Student may take the PMP certification exam Student required completing the program and may take the following exams 1ZO-516 Oracle EBS R12.1 General Ledger Essentials 1ZO-517 Oracle EBS R12.1 Payables Essentials 1ZO-518 Oracle EBS R12.1 Receivables Essentials 104 Oracle Application DBA 12c Program Description This course explains how to go about installing & maintaining oracle e-business suite release 12.x system both standard & express install types are covered in detail maintenance topics include a detail examination of the standard tools & utilities and an in depth look at patching as oracle e-business suite system. Students will be able to make informed decisions about how to install an oracle e-business suite that meets their specific requirements & maintain the system. Course Objectives • Understand and implement function security • Define and administer concurrent managers • Manage concurrent programs • Understand and implement Oracle User Management • Manage printers and printing • Understand auditing functionality • Understand selected DBA duties with the Oracle E-Business Suite • Manage profile options and Data Security • Administer folders • Incorporate custom help files • Manage document sequences Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer and Information System SOC CODE 11-3021 Computer Programmers SOC CODE 15-1131 Software Developers and Programmers SOC CODE 15-1130 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details This course gives better understand how to effectively control security, monitor your system, and handle day-to-day system administrator tasks for Oracle E-Business Suite applications, so that your organization can more rapidly realize the full value of Oracle E-Business Suite. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Application DBA12c 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Oracle Database 12c Administration I & II Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle Application DBA 12c 105 Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $2825.00 Tuition Fee: $2650; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program at Amfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center Student required completing the program and may take the exam: 1 ZO-206 offered by Oracle. 106 Oracle Database 12c- Administration I Program Description This Oracle Database I Ig: Administration Workshop I Release 2 course explores the fundamentals of basic database administration. Expert Oracle University instructors will reinforce topics with structured hands-on practices that will prepare you for the corresponding Oracle Certified Associate exam. Course Objectives • Install Oracle Grid Infrastructure. • Create and manage users. • Install and configure an Oracle Database. • Create and manage storage structures. • Administer the Oracle Database. • Understand the Oracle database architecture and how its components work and interact with one another. • Perform backup and recovery. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Database Administrator SOC Code 15-1140 Instruction Details Oracle Database 12c Administration I: This Oracle Database I Ig: Administration Workshop I — In this course you will learn how to create an operational database and properly manage the various structures in an effective and efficient manner. This includes performance monitoring, database security, user management and backup/recovery techniques. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Database 12c: Admin I 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Introduction to Oracle 12c Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle Application Database 12c: Admin I Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 3150 00 Tuition Fee: $2875; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: Student required completing the program and may take the exam: Oracle Database 12e: Administration 1 exam (lZ0-052) offered by Oracle. 107 Oracle Database 12c- Administration I1 Program Description This program focuses on Oracle Database Administration II, backup recovery, networking, and performance tuning. Included are theory and hands-on practice using the Oracle database engine, Oracle server, Oracle NET, Oracle Enterprise Manager, and tuning tools. Course Objectives • Manage data concurrency • Monitor performance • Describe Oracle Database Architecture • Back and recover a database (and its parts) with RMAN (command -line and Enterprise Manager) • Use flashback technology to view past states of data and to revert either objects or the entire database back to a past state • Use an appropriate and flexible memory configuration for your database • Identify burdensome database sessions and poorly performing SQL • Configure the Oracle Database for optimal recovery • Configure the database instance such that resources are appropriately allocated among sessions and tasks • Schedule jobs to run inside or outside of the database • Use compression to optimize database storage and duplicate a database Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Database Administrator SOC Code 15-1140 Instruction Details Oracle Database 12c- Administration II: This Oracle Database I Ig: Administration Workshop II Release 2 training takes the database administrator beyond the basic tasks covered in the first workshop. You will begin by gaining a deep understanding of the most important responsibilities a DBA has: performing backup and recovery. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Database Admin II 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Oracle Database 12C: Administration I My] Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle Application Database 12c Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire Program: $3150 00 Tuition Fee: $2875; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: Student required completing the program and may take flee exam: Oracle Database 120: Administration H - 1Z0- 053offered by Oracle. 109 -- - -- -- - - - Oracle Developer 12c Program Description This training track will prepare students for Oracle PUSQL Developer Certified Associate. An Oracle SQL and PUSQL developer can work as a database developer where he will be working with database objects or can work on any enterprise -wide application which is using Oracle as a back end. Course Objectives • Understand the environment and context in which PUSQL operates. • Consider the advantages and benefits of PL/SQL within a database environment. • Declaring program variables and complex data types. • Developing logic within PUSQL program blocks. • Build Oracle Forms/Reports by using Oracle Forms/Report • Working in a graphical user interface environment include three tear methodology • Customize forms with user input items groups. • Modify data access by creating event -related triggers. • Build a variety of standard and custom repots • Retrieve, display, and format data in specific styles such as tabular, matrix, mailing labels, and letter reports Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers SOC Code 15-1252 Instruction Details Oracle PL/SOL: It offers students an extensive introduction to PL/SQL programming language, and in addition, students learn to create PL/SQL blocks Oracle Forms and Reports: This course cover the Form/Report Builder tool which allows developing sophisticated applications which can be deployed in either a Client/Server of web environment. Course considered include use of the wizards, building master -detail data blocks, including GUI controls, customized menu bars and many other subjects Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Developer 12c 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -requisite: Introduction to SQL Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle PUSQL, Oracle Fortis and Oracle Reports 110 Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire program 3075.00 Tuition Fee: $2800; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement to obtain Certification from Oracle Requirement for completing the program at Amfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center Student required completing the program and may take the following exams 1Z0-141 Oracle Forms: Build Internet Applications 1ZO-147 Program with PL/SQL ill -- - - --- - - - -Oracle-Financial Cloud -- Program Description This course explains how an Oracle Re112 Financials System is implemented & used by a company. The course provides the knowledge necessary for end -users & implementers to understand & use Oracle Financial Applications using cloud. Course Objectives -Various development methodologies -How to write a test plan -Test types to be considered -Effective and efficient test writing techniques Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer and Information System SOC Code 11-3021 Computer Programmers SOC Code 15-1131 Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details Oracle System Administration: This course gives better understand how to effectively control security, monitor your system, and handle day-to-day system administrator tasks for Oracle E-Business Suite applications, so that your organization can more rapidly realize the full value of Oracle E-Business Suite. Oracle General Ledger: This course will help you maximize accounting process efficiency across the enterprise, while still achieving a high level of information and setup security. It will teach you how Oracle General Ledger integrates with the eBusiness Suite of applications. Oracle Accounts Payable: R12.x Oracle Payables Management Fundamentals. This course will be applicable for students who have implemented Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12 or Oracle E-Business Suite 12.1. In this course, students will learn how to set up and use Oracle Payables to manage the accounts payable process. Oracle Accounts Receivables: This R12.X Oracle Receivables Management training teaches you to set up and use Oracle Receivables to manage receivables processing. Learn to manage parties & customer accounts, process invoices using Auto -Invoice, enter & complete invoices Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Financials Cloud 240 Hours 12 Weeks 18 Weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 112 Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook- Oracle Financials 1li/Re112 Oracle University eBook — System Administration Oracle University eBook — General Ledger Oracle University eBook—Accounts Receivable Oracle University eBook — Accounts Payable Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4860 00 Tuition Fee: $4285; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book. $500 Requirement to obtain Certification from Oracle Students should complete the program at Amfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center Student required completing the program and may take the following exams 1ZO-516 Oracle EBS R12.1 General Ledger Essentials 1ZO-517 Oracle EBS R12.1 Payables Essentials 1ZO-518 Oracle EBS R12.1 Receivables Essentials 113 Program Description This course explains how an Oracle Re112 Manufacturing module is implemented & used by a company. The course provides the knowledge necessary for end -users & implementers to understand and use Oracle Manufacturing Applications. In this course students learn key concepts and terms specific to using & administrating Oracle Manufacturing. Course Objectives • Use Oracle Manufacturing open interfaces and APIs • Understand Oracle Inventory's major features and processes • Understand Bills of Material and Engineering's major features and processes • Understanding Oracle Order Management • Describing the Order Management Process Flow • Understanding Oracle Work in Process Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer and Information System SOC Code 11-3021 Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-I100 Instruction Details Oracle Order Management: This course, students learn about the basic order capture and order fulfillment flows that Oracle Order Management facilitates, and also learn how to perform setup steps, including transaction type, document sequence, order import, and hold setup, that enable these flows Oracle Inventory: Student will learn how to focus on the features, functions, and benefits of the Oracle Inventory application. Students will learn how to set up items, how to use the various inventory controls available, how to do transactions, transfers, and inventory moves, inventory replenishment, cycle counting and physical inventory. Students will also learn where Inventory fits in the overall enterprise structure. Oracle Bill of Materials: Students will leans to use Oracle Bills of Material to define different types of bills of material to accommodate various business models and scenarios. Additionally, students will learn to use Oracle Engineering to create and implement engineering change orders. They will learn how to set up, implement, and use bill of material and engineering information Oracle Work in Process: This course will demonstrate how to set up your environment, use multiple manufacturing modes, create discrete jobs, manage resources and material, and perform shop floor transactions. 114 Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Manufacturing Cloud 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material Oracle University eBook- Oracle Bill of Materials Oracle University eBook — Oracle Inventory Oracle University eBook — Oracle Work in Process Oracle University eBook— Order Management Total Charges For Period of Attendance &Estimated charges for entire Program 5975 00 Tuition Fee: $5300; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $600 Requirement to obtain Certification from Oracle Students should complete the program at Amfasoft— Oracle Authorized Education Center Student required completing the program and may take the following exams 1ZO-521 Oracle EBS R12.1 Order Management Essentials 1ZO-519 Oracle EBS R12.1 Inventory Essentials 115 Oracle SQL 12c Program Description This Oracle Database: Introduction to SQL training helps you write subqueries, combine multiple queries into a single query using SET operators and report aggregated data using group functions. Learn this and more through hands-on exercises. Course Objectives • Understand the basic concepts of relational databases ensure refined Code by developers. • Create reports of sorted and restricted data. • Run data manipulation statements (DML). • Control database access to specific objects. • Manage schema objects. • Manage objects with data dictionary views. • Retrieve row and column data from tables Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Database Administrator SOC Code 15-1140 Instruction Details Oracle SQL - This course will help you understand the advanced features of SQL. Learning these features will help you query and manipulate data within the database, use the dictionary views to retrieve metadata and create reports about their schema objects. Some of the date -time functions available in the Oracle Database are also covered. This course also discusses how to use the regular expression support in SQL through expert instruction. Program In Duration: Course Name Oracle SQL 12c Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic computer knowledge Instructional Material: Oracle University eBook Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program:$2575.00 Tuition Fee: $2300; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: Students should complete the program at Arnfasoft — Oracle Authorized Education Center. Student required completing the program and may take the following exams Oracle SQL: Exam 1ZO-051 116 Oracle Cloud Architecture Program Description This course is designed to help prepare you for the fundamentals of Cloud Infrastructure and lay the foundation for all your cloud certification Course Objectives • Teach the skills needed to become a cloud architect for OCI • Demonstrate how to lift and shift applications to the cloud • Students will be prepared for Oracle Cloud Architecture certification exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The course will teach about the Oracle Cloud Infrastructure services to design and implement a secure and scalable cloud solution that meets the clients need. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Oracle Cloud Architecture 240 hours 12 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Oracle Cloud Architecture Ebook Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 5 000 00 Tuition Fee: $4,725; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $200.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Oracle Cloud Architecture certification exam 117 Payroll Certification Program Description This payroll certification is a valuable, objective credential that verifies a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities in the payroll profession. Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, secure promotions, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession. Course Objectives The course will give specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities to demonstrate in the Entry level Payroll Professional. Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession of Payroll. There are no payroll experience requirements to take this exam. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Payroll and Time Keeping Clerics SOC Code 43-3051 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing Clerks SOC Code 43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details This payroll certification is a valuable, objective credential that verifies a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities in the payroll profession. The course covers the skills and knowledge to pass the Fundamental Payroll Certification (FPC) exam. The FPC is a certification credential for payroll beginners and service and support professionals with payroll knowledge. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Payroll Certification 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks: Mastering Payroll I — Textbook from AIPB Mastering Payroll 11— Textbook from AIPB Total Charges for Period of Attendance &Estimated charges for entire program: $5900.00 Tuition Fee: $5725; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Payroll two certification exams offered by AIPB 118 Payroll Certification & Taxation Program Description This payroll certification is a valuable, objective credential that verifies a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities in the payroll profession. Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, secure promotions, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession. Taxation.: A program that prepares individuals to provide tax advice and management services to individuals and corporations. Includes instruction in tax law and regulations, tax record systems, individual and corporate income taxation and tax planning. Course Objectives The course will give specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities to demonstrate in the Entry level Payroll Professional. Certification helps individuals demonstrate their payroll expertise, advance their careers, and enhance their standing within the profession of Payroll. There are no payroll experience requirements to take this exam. • Federal Taxation and Understanding Federal Tax Law Tax Practice, and Procedure • Individual Taxation • Gross Income • Deductions • Prepare for Tax Certification Exam Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Payroll and Time Keeping Clerks SOC Code 43-3051 Bookkeeping, Accounting, and Auditing Clerks SOC Code 43-3031 Receptionists and Information Clerks SOC Code 43-4171 Office Clerks, General SOC Code 43-9061 Instruction Details This payroll certification is a valuable, objective credential that verifies a specified level of knowledge, skills, and abilities in the payroll profession. The course covers the skills and knowledge to pass the Fundamental Payroll Certification (FPC) exam. The FPC is a certification credential for payroll beginners and service and support professionals with payroll knowledge. The course, complete with extensive exercises and a final exam review, will provide you with a solid foundation about taxes, and the preparation of an accurate and complete individual income tax return. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Payroll Certification & Taxation 440 hours 22 weeks 33 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 119 Instructional Material: Textbooks: Mastering Payroll I — Textbook from AIPB Mastering Payroll II — Textbook from AIPB J.K. Lasser's Your Income Tax 2023: For Preparing Your 2023 Tax Return Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $9,600.00 Tuition Fee: $9325; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Payroll two certification exams offered by AIPB End of the program students are required to take final exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 120 PMI- ACP Exam Prep , Program Description This program prepares individual with Agile Certified Practitioner Certification: PMI-ACP certification. The student will able to use agile practices in their projects, while demonstrating their increased professional versatility through agile tools and techniques. PMI-ACP certification carries a higher level of professional credibility as it requires a combination of agile training, experience working on agile projects, and examination on agile principles, practices, tools, and techniques. This global certification also supports individuals in meeting the needs of organizations that rely on project practitioners to apply a diversity of methods to their project management. Course Objective • Understanding of the principles and values behind Agile and Scrum • Understanding of Agile and Serum values, principles and preparation for certification Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Project Management Specialist SOC Code 13-1082 Managers, All others SOC Code 11-9199 Instruction Details PMI- ACP Exam Prep: This course is designed to provide an overview of Scrum as well as an understanding of the responsibilities of the roles in a Scrum project to provide a foundation for understanding the methodology. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time PMI- ACP Exam Prep 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Iznowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks PMI-ACP Exam Prep, Eight Edition: A Course in a Book for Passing the PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI- ACP) Exam Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire Program: $4 175 00 Tuition Fee: $3900; Registration Fee: (Non -Refundable): $75; Books: $200 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the PMI- ACP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) and Student will get the course completion certificate. It¢gis>es¢d � • ' F.dirc¢#on Isiv»ider — 121 PMI- ACP Exam Prep & Proj'eet Management Program Description Project Management: Helps individuals gain skills to prepare for the PMP© exam through practice exams and workshops. The student learning outcomes are consistent with the skills requirements and objectives of the program as stated by several employers within the community. They reflect the required occupational and academic knowledge, skills, and competencies PMI- ACP Exam Prep: This program prepares individual with Agile Certified Practitioner Certification: PMI-ACP certification. The student will able to use agile practices in their projects, while demonstrating their increased professional versatility through agile tools and techniques. PMI-ACP certification carries a higher level of professional credibility as it requires a combination of agile training, experience working on agile projects, and examination on agile principles, practices, tools, and techniques. This global certification also supports individuals in meeting the needs of organizations that rely on project practitioners to apply a diversity of methods to their project management. Course Objectives Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Understanding of the principles and values behind Agile and Serum Understanding of Agile and Scram values, principles, and preparation for certification Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Project Management Specialist SOC Code 13-1082 Managers, All others SOC Code 11-9199 General and Operations Managers SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production Managers SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Managers SOC Code 11-3061 Instruction Details Project Management: This comprehensive course provides participants with an overview of the essential elements of Project Management and the project management life cycle. The course is designed to help you to get hands-on experience, and to prepare for the PMP exam. The course covers essential project management skills which include: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring, Mapping, Controlling and Closing process. PMI- ACP Exam Prep: This course is designed to provide an overview of Scrum as well as an understanding of the responsibilities of the roles in a Serum project to provide a foundation for understanding the methodology. Program In Duration: Course Name Project Management & PMI-ACP Exam Prop Clock Hours Duration 400 hours 20 weeks Maximum Completion Time 30 weeks 122 Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks: PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy PowerPoint Materials and Projects PMI-ACP Exam Prep, Second Edition: A Course in a Book for Passing the PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI- ACP) Exam Supplies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6 825.00 Tuition Fee: $6,000; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Books: $750 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the PMP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) & Student may take the PMI- ACP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) and Student will get the course completion certificate. 32cgiseieri .- f • - �diuv'xsi3n:z... 123 PMI--ACP- Exam Prep & MS-P-r-oject. - -- -- -- Program Description PMI-ACP Exam Prep: This program prepares individual with Agile Certified Practitioner Certification: PMI-ACP certification. The student will able to use agile practices in their projects, while demonstrating their increased professional versatility through agile tools and techniques. PMI-ACP certification carries a higher level of professional credibility as it requires a combination of agile training, experience working on agile projects, and examination on agile principles, practices, tools, and techniques. This global certification also supports individuals in meeting the needs of organizations that rely on project practitioners to apply a diversity of methods to their project management. MS Project: MS Project programs are designed to give professionals the knowledge to plan and lead complex projects in their organization effectively. And, to provide them with practical experiences that will build their confidence in this important field. Course Objective • Understanding of the principles and values behind Agile and Scrum • Understanding of Agile and Scrum values, principles, and preparation for certification Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Project Management Specialist SOC Code 13-1082 Managers, All others SOC Code 11-9199 General and Operations Managers SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production Managers SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Managers SOC Code 11-3061 Instruction Details PMI- ACP Exam Prew This course is designed to provide an overview of Serum as well as an understanding of the responsibilities of the roles in a Scrum project to provide a foundation for understanding the methodology. MS Proiect: This program also includes Microsoft Project applications training. MS project course will give students opportunity to work with a project plan once it reaches the project implementation phase. Program Iu Duration: Course Name PMI- ACP Exam Prep & MS Project Clock Hours Duration 320 hours 16 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Maximum Completion Time 24 weeks 124 Instructional Material: Textbooks: PMI-ACP Exam Prep, Second Edition: A Course in a Book for Passing the PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP) Exam Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire nro2ram•$5 825 00 Tuition Fee: $5500; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book. $250 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the PMI- ACP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) and Student will get the course completion certificate. Fdncsxtinix 125 - - --- -- - PMP---& MS PROJECT Program Description Project Management and MS Project programs are designed to give professionals the knowledge to plan and lead complex projects in their organization effectively. And, to provide them with practical experiences that will build their confidence in this important field. Course Objective Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita% Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Create and Manage A Project Schedule Using MS Project 2010 Manage Tasks by Organizing Tasks and Setting Task Relationships. Manage Resources for A Project. Finalize A Project Plan. Exchange Project Plan Data with Other Applications. Update A Project Plan. Manage Project Costs. Teach Project management principles according to the Project management Institute, A Guide to the Project Management Body of I{nowledge, (PMBOI .6 Guide)- Fifth Edition, Project Management Institute, Inc. 2013 Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Financial Managers SOC Code 11-3031 General and Operations Manager SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production manager SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Manager SOC Code 11-3061 Managers, All others SOC Code 11-9199 Instruction Details Proiect Management: This comprehensive course provides participants with an overview of the essential elements of Project Management and the project management life cycle. The course is designed to help you to get hands-on experience, and to prepare for the PMP exam. MS Project: This program also includes Microsoft Project applications training. MS project course will give students opportunity to work with a project plan once it reaches the project implementation phase. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time PMP & MS Project 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks 126 Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks Microsoft© Project 2010 Step by Step (Step by Step (Microsoft)) Chatfield, Carl PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy Sunulies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire nro ram 6 775 00 Tuition Fee: $6000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $700 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the PMP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) and Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the MS Project exam. MS project course will give students opportunity to work with a project plan once it reaches the project implementation phase. Xegfsreree�„, • - Edracrrrrrr}�; . 127 ---- - - Project Management Program Description Project Management helps individuals gain skills to prepare for the PMP® exam through practice exams and workshops. The student learning outcomes are consistent with the skills requirements and objectives of the program as stated by several employers within the community. They reflect the required occupational and academic knowledge, skills and competencies Course Objectives Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations General and Operations Managers SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production Managers SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Managers SOC Code 11 -3 061 Managers, All Other SOC Code 11-9199 Instruction Details Project Management: This comprehensive course provides participants with an overview of the essential elements of Project Management and the project management life cycle. The course is designed to help you to get hands-on experience, and to prepare for the PMP exam. The course covers essential project management skills which include: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring, Mapping, Controlling and Closing process. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Project Management 240 hours 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks: Maximum Completion Time 18 weeks PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy power point Materials and Projects Supplies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4880.00 Tuition Fee: $4000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book $250; Exam Fees: $555 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the PMP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) • �12cb+istxrrx:d' . +a. t 4 �'1'wliunYloas : '�. 'Prrrviclra• 7 129 Python Programming - Program Description This course teaches you the programming and problem -solving techniques using Python. The course emphasizes principles of software development, style, and testing. Course Objectives • Learn the skills necessary to perform python related programming techniques • Learn how python supports other programming tasks related to web servers and big data analytics Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Software Developers, Applications SCO Code 15-1132.00 Instruction Details The course will provide hands-on guided practice labs using graphics and GUIs to help develop fluency and understanding of python programming. Program In Duration: Course Name Python Programming Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 240 hours 12 weeks 15 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook Python for Beginners: 2 Books in 1: Python Programming for Beginners, Python Workbook by PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES ACADEMY Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4,875.00 Tuition Fee: $4,725; Registration Fee: $75 (Non-refundable); Book: $75.00 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to complete all the projects and lab work assigned during the program. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. Student may take the Python Programming certification exam 130 QuickBooks for Accounting Program Description The QuickBooks for accounting program validates job -role skills for entry and advanced level job seekers and seasoned professionals alike. Completion of this course can lead to a successful career as a Bookkeeper, Accountant, Auditing Officials, Financial Clerks, Administrative Services Mangers, and Office Clerks. Course Objectives Learn the navigation on QuickBooks Learn how to start and setup the QuickBooks Accounting behind the setup of QuickBooks How to start a new company data file? How to restore and backup data files. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Human Resources Assistants SOC Code 11-3121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details This program will help students learn or review fundamental accounting concepts and principles through the use of QuickBooks and Analysis of business events. It teaches how to setup chart of Accounts, Create new item list, Vendor list, Employer list, etc. Program In Duration: Course Name QuickBooks for Accounting Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Instructional Material: Textbook: QuickBooks 2021 for Dummies Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time 120 hours 6 weeks 9 weeks Total Chargcs For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $2 200 00 Tuition Fee: $1750; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $375.00 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take final three projects in QuickBooks 131 Salesforce Administrator Program Description As an administrator with broad knowledge of Salesforce applications, you configure and manage Sales and Service Cloud applications and suggest ways for your company to get even more from additional features and capabilities. With an Administrator credential you will demonstrate core knowledge and your ability to take on the responsibilities of this job. It is an important investment in your career as an Administrator. Course Objectives Describe the Organization Setup Identify the User Setup Distinguish Global User Interface Explain Security and Access Describe the Standard and Custom Objects Describe Sales Cloud and Service Applications Describe the Activity and Data Management Describe the Content and Folder Management Describe Analytics — Reports and Dashboards Describe Workflow Automation Identify Desktop and Mobile Administration Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC Codel5-1150 Computer Programmers SOC Code 15-1131 Computer and information Analyst SOC Code 15-1120 Instruction Details: To enable participants to have understanding of Sales force CRM business functionality, configurations and other administrative tasks. The course structure is also designed for participants to clear sales force certification for administration. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Salesforce Administrator 200 hours 10 weeks 15 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material: Salesforce CRM - The Definitive Admin Handbook - Fifth Edition power point slides and projects Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4,875.00 Tuition Fee: $4700; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book $100; Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Salesforce Administrator certification exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 132 ilesforce Develom Program Description As a developer with broad knowledge of Salesforce applications, you configure and manage Sales and Service Cloud applications and suggest ways for your company to get even more from additional features and capabilities. With a developer credential you will demonstrate core knowledge and your ability to take on the responsibilities of this job. It is an important investment in your career as an Administrator. Course Objectives Describe components for Application Design Overview of Force.com Platform List and describe Data Model List and describe User Interface Business Logic • Data Management Reporting and Analytics Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1150 Computer Programmers SOC Code 15-1131 Computer and information Analyst SOC Code 15-1120 Instruction Details To enable participants to understand Sales force CRM business functionality, configurations and development of applications using apex/visual force pages'/web services. Upon successful completion of course participants will be able to clear sales force developer certification. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Salesforce Developer 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge and programming skills Instructional Material: Practical Salesforce.com Development without Code: customizing Salesforce. on the force.com platform Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $5800 00 Tuition Fee: $5625; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Salesforce Developer certification exam. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 133 - - - --- - - - -----SAP:-All in One Program Description This course is essential study for users of all R/3 systems regardless of the organization's business/industry classification. To fully exploit the functionality of R/3, business users need to be both confident and proficient in the use of all the main navigational and systems functionality of SAP. This course will provide R/3 users with the knowledge and skills to perform regular tasks and procedures, including customizing activities. The program covers introduction to SAP, Financial, Controlling and Sales and Distribution modules. In Financials the topics will cover are Accounts Receivable/Payable functions with General Ledger and Assets Accounting. Course Objectives • Review SAP main Modules and functionalities • Navigate within SAP ECC 6.0 version • Review SAP technical and implementation considerations Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer and Information System SOC Code 11-3021 Computer Programmers SOC Code 15-1131 Software Developers and Programmers SOC Code 15-1130 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Computer Operators SOC Code 15-1100 Instruction Details SAP: FICO module is a powerful, integrated environment, dynamically interfacing Accounts Receivable/Payable functions with General Ledger and Assets Accounting. Student will encounter both FI and CO (Cost Center Controlling) in a business environment. SAP: SD module provides the overview of business process in Sales and Distribution and also to process inquiries, quotations, orders, billing, shipping and sales and distribution. The course shows how to process sales and use the function during presale phases. Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Program Duration Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion time SAP: All in One 320 hours 16 weeks 24 weeks Instructional Material: - Required Textbook: Configuring SAP ERP Financials and Controlling by Peter Jones. - Implementing SAP R/3 Sales and Distribution by Williams, Glynn C. - Power point slides and SAP related project work Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6000.00 Tuition Fee: $5725; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $200 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam with one project in each module. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 134 SAP: FICO Program Description This course is essential study for users of all R/3 modules, regardless of the organization's business/industry classification. To fully exploit the functionality of R/3 3.0, business users need to be both confident and proficient in the use of all the main navigational and systems functionality of SAP. This course will provide R/3 users with the knowledge and skills to perform regular tasks and procedures, including customizing activities in Financial and Controlling. Course Objectives • Develop strong conceptual and practical knowledge in all areas of FICO. • Provide SAP users with the knowledge and skills to perform regular task and procedures. • Grow FICO professionalism with practical examples of real -world scenarios. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Financial Analyst SOC Code 13-2051 Computer and Information Analyst SOC Code 15-1120 Instruction Details SAP: FICO module is a powerful, integrated environment, dynamically interfacing Accounts Receivable/Payable functions with General Ledger and Assets Accounting. You will usually encounter both FI and CO (Cost Center Controlling) in a business environment. The procedures for Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable are similar in R/3. Program Duration Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion time SAP - FICO 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material: - Required Textbook: Configuring SAP ERP Financials and Controlling by Peter Jones. - Power point slides and SAP related project work Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 3150 00 Tuition Fee: $3000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $7S Book: $75 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam and a project in Financial and Controlling. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 135 1 Program Description This course covers the Sales and Distribution module in SAP application. Student will learn the business process related to sales and distribution, billing, shipping, and orders. Course Objectives • Understanding Overview of SD Processes • Understanding Basic Organizational Model in SAP • SAP Organizational Units & definitions • Different data types in SAP SD • Different Master data types in SAP SD Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Sales Manager SOC Code l l-2022 Instruction Details SAP: SD module provides the overview of business process in Sales and Distribution and to process inquiries, quotations, orders, billing, shipping and sales and distribution. The course shows how to process sales and use the function during presale phases. Program and Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time SAP SD 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks - Implementing SAP R/3 Sales and Distribution by Williams, Glynn C. - Power point slides and SAP: SD related project work: Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3150.00 Tuition Fee: $3000; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $75 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take a final exam and SD project. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. f cml SAP: MM Program Description This course offers students learn SAP ERP. The Overview of business processes in Materials management, SAP implementation tools and ASAP, Material Planning and Forecasting, Inventory Management, Invoice Verification, Classification in MM, Setting up a model company. Course Objectives • To provide students with a complete knowledge of Warehouse, Inventory Management and Procurement Supply Chain System implementation using SAP ERP. • Project Management and some background of the SAP Transportation System is also part of this Module. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Marketing Manager SOC Code I1-2021 Purchasing Manager SOC Code 11-3061 Instruction Details Student will understand and learn how Material Management integrates with Financials. The students will able to develop reports in SAP. SAP MM class includes hands-on, real -world project exercises. Program and Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time SAP MM 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -Requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge, understanding of business processes Instructional Material: Textbook - SAP MM-Functionality and Technical Configuration (2nd Edition) Martin Murray C. - Power point slides and SAP related project work Total Charees For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire mro¢ram• $3175 00 Tuition Fee: $3000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book $100 Requirement for completing the program End of the program students are required to take a final exam and MM project. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 137 Sig Sigma Green Belt Program Description The Six Sigma methodology has become the gold standard for process improvement in today's technology world. Organizations that master these principles typically experience greater efficiency, fewer defects, and less waste, leading to increased productivity and profitability. Consequently, getting certified can lead to a wide range of exciting and rewarding career opportunities. Course Objectives • Use a structural approach to process improvement • Learn the skills to anticipate and control the problems in a process • Learn the use of DMAIC — Define, Measure, Analyze, Implement and Control methodology Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Business Optimization IT Manager Supply Chain Manager Business Process Analyst Continuous Improvement Manager Instruction Details The student will become proficient in analytic tools. The course will teach students the methodology of DMAIC by using the tools. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Six Sigma Green Belt 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks: Six Sigma Green Belt Study Guide: Test Prep and Practice Test Questions for the ASQ Six Sigma Green Belt Certification Exam [2nd Edition] Total Charles for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire nro2ram: $3,625.00 Tuition Fee: $3,475; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $75 Requirement for completing the program: Student will receive a course completion certificate after completing the course. Student needs to take the Six Sigma Green Belt Certification exam in order to get the credentials. 138 Six Sigma Green Belt and Project Management Program Description The Six Sigma methodology has become the gold standard for process improvement in today's technology world. Organizations that master these principles typically experience greater efficiency, fewer defects, and less waste, leading to increased productivity and profitability. Consequently, getting certified can lead to a wide range of exciting and rewarding career opportunities. Project Management helps individuals gain skills to prepare for the PMP® exam through practice exams and workshops. The student learning outcomes are consistent with the skills requirements and objectives of the program as stated by several employers within the community. They reflect the required occupational and academic knowledge, skills and competencies Course Objectives • Use a structural approach to process improvement • Learn the skills to anticipate and control the problems in a process • Learn the use of DMAIC — Define, Measure, Analyze, Implement and Control methodology Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Business Optimization IT Manager Supply Chain Manager Business Process Analyst General and Operations Managers SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production Managers SOC Code 11 -3 05 1 Purchasing Managers SOC Code 11-3061 Managers, All Other SOC Code 11-9199 Instruction Details Six Sigma Green Belt: The student will become proficient in analytic tools. The course will teach students the methodology of DMAIC by using the tools. Project Management: This comprehensive course provides participants with an overview of the essential elements of Project Management and the project management life cycle. The course is designed to help you to get hands-on experience, and to prepare for the PMP exam. The course covers essential project management skills which include: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring, Mapping, Controlling and Closing process. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Six Sigma Green Belt 400 hours 20 weeks 30 weeks &Project Management Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 139 Instructional Material: Textbooks: Six Sigma Green Belt Study Guide: Test Prep and Practice Test Questions for the ASQ Six Sigma Green Belt Certification Exam [2nd Edition] PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy power point Materials and Projects Supplies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $7,300.00 Tuition Fee: $6,575; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book- $650 Requirement for completing the program: Student will receive a course completion certificate after completing the course. Student needs to take the Six Sigma Green Belt Certification exam in order to get the credentials. Student may take the PMP certification exam from Project Management Institute (PMI) • F� catiuvi � P'roviel¢r M,] Six Sigma Yellow Belt Program Description Six Sigma Yellow Belt course provides the student with basic knowledge. Yellow Belt provides an entry-level way to start teaming the concepts involved with implementing Six Sigrna.The student will gain experience in improving business processes, business performances, quality assurance, and problem -solving skills. Course Objectives - The participants should be able to learn the fundamental of the Six Sigma Yellow Belt. - Learn the tools to define, analyze, improve, and measure the business processes. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Business Optimization IT Manager Supply Chain Manager Business Process Analyst Continuous Improvement Manager Instruction Details Students will learn the basics of Six Sigma. Students will be able to utilize the knowledge and hands on experience from this course to get into a supportive role in any industry globally. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Six Sigma Yellow Belt 80 hours 4 weeks 6 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbooks: Six Sigma: A Complete Step -by -Step Guide: A Complete Training & Reference Guide for White Belts, Yellow Belts, Green Belts, and Black Belts Paperback — July 24, 2018 Total Charees for Period of Attendance & Estimated charees for entire oroeram 2 245 00 Tuition Fee: $2,120; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book $50 Requirement for completing the program: Student will receive a course completion certificate after completing the course. Student needs to take the Six Sigma Yellow Belt Certification exam in order to get the credentials. 141 Program Description Six Sigma Yellow Belt course provides the student with basic knowledge. Yellow Belt provides an entry-level way to start learning the concepts involved with implementing Six Sigma.The student will gain experience in improving business processes, business performances, quality assurance, and problem -solving skills. Project Management helps individuals gain skills to prepare for the PMP® exam through practice exams and workshops. The student learning outcomes are consistent with the skills requirements and objectives of the program as stated by several employers within the community. They reflect the required occupational and academic knowledge, skills and competencies Course Objectives • The participants should be able to learn the fundamental of the Six Sigma Yellow Belt. • Learn the tools to define, analyze, improve, and measure the business processes. • Prepare students for the PMP certification exam using PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam. • Satisfy PMI's PM education requirement of 35 contact hours. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Business Optimization IT Manager Supply Chain Manager Business Process Analyst Continuous Improvement Manager General and Operations Managers SOC Code 11-1021 Industrial Production Managers SOC Code 11-3051 Purchasing Managers SOC Code 11-3061 Managers, All Other SOC Code 11-9199 Instruction Details Six Sigma Yellow Belt: Students will learn the basics of Six Sigma. Students will be able to utilize the knowledge and hands on experience from this course to get into a supportive role in any industry globally, Project Management: This comprehensive course provides participants with an overview of the essential elements of Project Management and the project management life cycle. The course is designed to help you to get hands-on experience, and to prepare for the PMP exam. The course covers essential project management skills which include: Initiating, Planning, Executing, Monitoring, Mapping, Controlling and Closing process. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Project Management 240 hours 12 weeks 18 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge 142 Instructional Material: Textbooks: Six Sigma: A Complete Step -by -Step Guide: A Complete Training & Reference Guide for White Belts, Yellow Belts, Green Belts, and Black Belts Paperback— July 24, 2018 PMP Exam Prep, Eighth Edition: Rita's Course in a Book for Passing the PMP Exam [Paperback] Rita Mulcahy power point Materials and Projects Supplies: PMP Exam Simulation software, flash cards Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program 6 700 00 Tuition Fee: $6,000; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $625,00 Requirement for completing the program: Student will receive a course completion certificate after completing the course. Student needs to take the Six Sigma Yellow Belt Certification exam in order to get the credentials. Student may take the PMP certification exam from Project Management hnstitute (PMI) R g�st8s�ed a: : F�sFC�2�lipJ>. • - 143 ---- --- ----Software Quality Assurance-- ---- - -- Program Description The program teaches the basic software testing and Automation testing. Course Objectives Software Testing - Basics Design test strategy, test plan, test cases, test results Applying test methods in the software QA Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1150 Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 15-1121 Instruction Details The student will team how to write Test plans, Test cases and Test scripts and understand the Software Development Life cycle and Role of QA. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Software Quality Assurance 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Mastering Software Quality Assurance: Best Practices, Tools and Techniques for Software Developers by Murali Chemmuri Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire urogram: $2275.00 Tuition Fee: $2100; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program: Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the examination and the projects. 144 Unix system administrator Program Description The student learning the Unix Operating system and the skills required to operate the system. The program will teach the mechanisms for booting a computer, logging in, running applications, storing and retrieving files, etc. Course Objectives -Describe the architecture of the UNIX operating system -Log on and off the UNIX system -Use the UNIX system documentation -Communicate with other users on a system using the mail and write commands -Organize and manipulate files and directories -Use of the vi text editor to create and modify files -Use selected features of the korn shell -Use UNIX utilities to create simple tools for the information processing Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Computer and Information Systems Managers Computer Systems Analysts SOC Code 11-3021 SOC Code 15-1121 Computer Systems Administrator Network and computer system Administrator SOC Code 15-1140 SOC Code 15-1142 Computer Support Specialists, All Other SOC Code 15-1150 Instruction Details This course offers a comprehensive hands-on introduction to the UNIX operating system from logging in to file handling and management. Systems and network administrators and anyone in network operations will benefit from learning basic delivery structure, shell utilities and shell scripting. This course combines lecture with lab work and home exercises. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock IIours Duration Maximum Completion Time Unix System Achninistration 160 hours 8 weeks 12 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Instructional Material: Learning the UNIX Operating System, Fifth Edition by Jerry Peek, Grace Todino-Gonguet and John Strang Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $1075.00 Tuition Fee: $900; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Unix Administration exam 145 Web Development Program Description A course in web development that provides Web application developers with the fundamentals of the JavaScript programming language, with a focus on using Java/J2EE, XML as a client -side language for web -based applications. Course Objectives Creating many effective online applications and positively linking business processes to the Internet Obtain entry level positions as Java Developer and Web Application Developer. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Web Developers SOC Code 15-1134 Instruction Details Java: Basic Java is a foundation course that gives knowledge in the industry- standard Java Programming language using JDeveloper while and learning standard object -oriented programming concepts using Oracle's award -winning development tool. Enhance programming productivity with wizard -assisted based development for Java components. J2EE: This course also covers J2EE application and usages. You will learn main concepts like Java syntax, Data Types and Operators, Data security through encapsulation etc. XML: XML and applications use XML Exposure to Schemas, DTD, and Entities Program in Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Web Development Java/J2EE, XML 300 15 weeks 22.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Head First Servlets and JSP: Passing the Sun Certified Web Component Developer Exam Bryan Basham, et al Head First Java, 2nd Edition Kathy Sierra, and Bert Bates Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $6,000.00 Tuition Fee: $5, 775; Registration Fee (Non —Refundable): $75; Book $150 Requirement for completing the program: Satisfactory completion of the Web Development is required to receive course completion certificate 146 Program Description The course covers wide range of Android development topics. Provide essential lessons on various SDK libraries and steps to build location aware applications using GPS. Exam Code: AND-401 Course Objectives This course that provides the required knowledge and skills to design and build a complete AndroidTM application. It delivers an extensive training on the main Android SDK components and its interactions. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Web Developers SOC Code 15-1134 Instruction Details Course covers a wide range of Android development topics. Provides essential lessons on various Android SDK libraries. Step by step lab exercises to build Android Applications. Program in Duration: Course Name Web Development Android Certified Application Developer Clock Hours Duration 200 10 weeks Maximum Completion Time Pre -requisite: Knowledge of "Java Fundamentals for Android Development" Instructional Material: 15 weeks Textbook: AndroidTM Application Development Version 7, Nougat. Exam Code AND-401 Total Charges for Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $4,000.00 Tuition Fee: $3,775; Registration Fee (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $150 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take Exam Code: AND-401. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the certification exam. 147 Program Description The course covers the topics for Android Application development, Android Security Essentials and Monetizing Android Application. The course will provide training to achieve the certifications in three exams: AND-401, AND-402 and AND-403 Course Objectives This course provides hands on training in java fundamentals for Android development, security essentials and teach the different techniques to monetize your application, add advertisements without degrading user experience, create Android applications with in-app billing. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaming Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Web Developers SOC Code 15-1134 Instruction Details Course covers java fundamentals for Android development and wide range of Android development topics. Provides essential lessons on various Android SDK libraries. Step by step lab exercises to build Android Applications. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Web Development Android Certified Engineer 300 15 weeks 22.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Knowledge of "Java Fundamentals for Android Development' Instructional Material: Textbooks: AndroidTm Application Development Exam Code AND-401 Android Security Essentials Exam Code AND-402 Monetize Android Applications Exam Code AND-403 Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program:$6,000.00 Tuition Fee: $5625; Registration Fee (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $ 300 Requirement for completing the program: End of the program students are required to take Exam Code: AND-401, AND-402 and AND-403. Student will get the course completion certificate after completing the certification exams. r�,c4 ro`q, fn iCf:3 Windows 10 Configuration Program Description Prepare for certification in Windows 10 Configuration and learn everything you need to pass the exam. This series is for anyone who wants to achieve MCTS 70-680 certification Course Objectives -Prepares you for Microsoft's 70-680 exam: Windows 10, Configuration -Complete and detailed walkthrough of Windows 10 installation, upgrades, migration and deployment -Detailed instruction on VPN's, encryption, file management and automated backup configurations Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1152 Instruction Details Focused on Windows 10 configuration, this course targets the MCTS Exam for Windows 10 Configuring and includes the following skills based instructional topics: Install or upgrade to Windows 10; migrate user data. Deploy system images and configure application compatibility. Implement IPv4,1Pv6, wireless, VPN, mobile, and remote connectivity. Set up Internet Explorerg and Windows Firewall. Configure Windows BitLockerV, UAC, and access to shared resources. Manage devices, drivers, and disks. Monitor, update, back up, and performance -tune your system Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows 10 Configuration 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3000.00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Instructional Material: Textbook: Exam 70-680: Windows 10 Configuration with Lab Manual Set (Microsoft Official Academic Course Series) by Microsoft Official Academic Course Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Exam 70-680: Windows 10 Configuration 149 - - - -Windows 10-Enterprise Desktop-- - - --- Program Description This course is intended for Windows 10 desktop support technicians who resolve Tier 1 and 2 problems on desktop computers. Course Objectives •Identify and Resolve Desktop Application Issues •Identify the Cause of and Resolve Networking Issues -Manage and Maintain Systems That Run Windows 10 -Support Mobile Users •Identify the Cause of and Resolve Security Issues Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1152 Instruction Details Focused on planning and managing a client life -cycle strategy, designing a standard image and client configurations, planning Windows 10 client deployment, managing application compatibility, and identifying and resolving issues with deployment and configuration Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows 10 Enterprise Desktop 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook: MCITP Self -Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-685): Windows 10, Enterprise Desktop Support Technician (Pro - Certifrcation... by Tony Northrup and J.C. Mackin Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program:$3000.00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the (Exam 70-685): Windows 10, Enterprise Desktop Support Technician 150 Windows Server 2019 Active Directory Program Description Candidates for the Microsoft Certified Technology Specialist in Windows Server 2019 Active Directory Configuration (MCTS: WS08 Active Directory Configuration) demonstrate an IT professional's in-depth, current skills on Active Directory, network infrastructure, or applications infrastructure. Exam 70-640 Course Objectives -Describe the features and functionality of Active Directory Domain Services. -Perform secure and efficient administration of Active Directory. •Improve the security of authentication in an AD DS Domain. -Configure Domain Name System. -Administer AD DS domain controllers. -Manage sites and Active Directory Replication. -Monitor, maintain and back up directory Service to ensure Directory Service continuity. -Manage multiple domains and forests. -Manage User Desktops with Group Policy. -Manage enterprise security and configuration by using Group Policy settings. -Secure administration. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Code 15-1152 Instruction Details Focused on Windows Server 2019 Applications Infrastructure technologies, this course covers Terminal Services, Web Services infrastructure and security, Media Server, Microsoft WindowsO SharePoint® Services server options, File Server, Print Services, network maintenance, and Simple Network Management Protocol Program In Duration: Course Name Clock IIours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows Server 2019 Active Directory 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charees For Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire oroaram• $3000 00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Instructional Material: Textbook: Self -Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-640): Configuring Windows Server 2019 Active Directory (Self -Paced Training Kits... by Dan Hohne, Nelson Ruest, Danielle Ruest and Jason Kellington Requirement for completing the program: Student may need to take the Exam- 70-640 151 --Windows-Server 2019 Application Infrastructure Program Description Focused Windows Server 2019 Applications Infrastructure technologies, this course covers Terminal Services, Web Services infrastructure and security, Media Server, Microsoft Windows® SharePoint@ Services server options, File Server, Print Services, network maintenance, and Simple Network Management Protocol. Course Objectives Implementing and Configuring a Windows Deployment Infrastructure Configuring Server Storage and Clusters Installing and Configuring Terminal Services Configuring and Managing a Terminal Services Infrastructure • Installing and Configuring Web Applications Managing Web Server Security Configuring FTP and SMTP Services Configuring Windows Media Services Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Codel5-1152 Instruction Details Students will learn how to design application infrastructure solutions based on Windows Server 2019 to meet varying business and technical requirements. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Flours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows Server 2019 Application Infrastructure 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3000.00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: (Non Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Instructional Material: Textbook: MCITP Guide to Microsoft Windows Server 2019, Application rnfrastmcture (Exam # 70-647) (Mots) by Darril Gibson Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Exam 70-647: Windows Server 2019 Application Infrastructure 152 Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Administration Program Description This exam measures your ability to accomplish the technical tasks listed below. The student will be able to work with Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Administration. Course Objectives • Design IIS for Web -based applications. • Design file and print service specific to the needs of a given scenario • Design file replication and caching to support branch office and mobile users. • Identify different ways that applications and data can be configured to support business continuity and select an appropriate method for a given scenario • Design a virtualization enterprise administration. • Design and implement a WSUS solution. Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Code15-1152 Instruction Details Students will learn how to design application infrastructure solutions based on Windows Server 2019 to meet varying business and technical requirements. Focused on Windows Server 2019 enterprise administration, topics include planning networks and application services; Microsoft has training will give more effective and productive after achieving this valuable technical certification. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Administration 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire program 3000 00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee., (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Instructional Material: Textbook: MCITP Guide to Microsoft Windows Server 2019, Enterprise Administration (Exam # 70-647) (Mots) by Danil Gibson Requirement for completing the program: Student may take the Exam 70-647: Windows Server 2019 Enterprise Administration 153 Windows Server 2019 Network -Infrastructure -- Program Description The program provides the skills necessary to gain Microsoft's Server 2019 MCITP Network Administrator (Microsoft Certified IT Professional) certification. The MCITP credential provides widely recognized, objective validation of an individual's ability to perform critical, current information technology (IT) job duties using Microsoft technologies to the best advantage. Course Objectives • Identify the tasks involved in supporting Windows 2019 networks • Understand how networking concepts that are implemented in Windows 2019 • Install and configure Windows 2019 Server • Install, configure, manage, and support a network infrastructure that uses Microsoft Windows 2019 server • Gain skills needed to create a networking services infrastructure design that supports the required network applications • Learn network solution technologies including DHCP, IP, OSPF, RIP, and IGMP • Gain the knowledge and skills needed to design a security framework for small, medium, and enterprise networks by using Microsoft Windows 2019 technologies Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Leaning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Code15-1152 Instruction Details Focused on Windows Server 2019 networking, this course covers configuring remote access, Network Access Protection (NAP), network authentication, IPv4 and IPv6 addressing, and Domain Name System (DNS) replication; capturing performance data and monitoring event logs; and managing file and print services Program In Duration: Course Name Completion Time Windows Server 2019 Network Infrastructure Clock Hours Duration Maximum 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Total Charges For Period of Attendance & Estimated charges for entire program: $3000.00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: $75; Book $100 Pre -requisite: Basic Computer Knowledge Instructional Material: Textbook: Self -Paced Training Kit Exam 70-642: Configuring Windows Server 2019 Network Infrastructure by Tony Northrup and J.C. Mackin Requirement for completing the program: Student may need to take the Exam- 70-642 154 I Windows Server 2019 Server Administration Program Description The program Windows Server Administration Tools enables IT administrators to manage roles and features that are installed on computers that are running Windows Server© 2019 R2, Windows ServerOO 2019, or Windows Server® 2019, from a remote computer that is running Windows 10 or Windows 10 with SPl. Course Objectives Implement, maintain, troubleshoot, and debug SQL Server 2019 Use SQL Server 2019 integration, reporting, and analysis tools to access and process the data necessary to create business solutions Course Delivery Option: Classroom, Online/Distance Learning Sequence and frequency of class sessions: Every 6 weeks Related Job Titles/Occupations Network & Computer System Administrators SOC Code 15-1140 Computer Network Architects SOC Code 15-1143 Computer Network Support Specialists SOC Codel5-1152 Instruction Details Focused on Windows Server 2019 administration, this course covers planning server roles; maintaining server security; planning data storage, network load balancing, and server backups; managing software deployment and versioning; monitoring IPv6, server performance and capacity, and Active Directory© replication; scheduling server deployments; and designing a rollback contingency plan. Program In Duration: Course Name Clock Hours Duration Maximum Completion Time Windows Server 2019 Server Administration 100 hours 5 weeks 7.5 weeks Pre -requisite: Basic Computer I{nowledge Total Charles For Period of Attendance & Estimated char es for entire nroeram• $3000 00 Tuition Fee: $2825; Registration Fee: (Non —Refundable): $75; Book: $100 Instructional Material: Self -Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-646): Windows Server 2019 Server Administrator by Ian McLean and Orin Thomas Requirement for completing the program: Student may need to take the Exam 70-646: Windows Server 2019 Server Administrator. 155 156 ® Employment fp�Doy0'0men!�alijorniaI DIRECTIVE Date: November 10, 2021 Number: WSD21-03 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES EXECUTIVE SUMMARY CALIFORNIA )Workforce Development Board This policy provides guidance and establishes the procedures applicable to the training providers and programs listed on the state and local Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL) under the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA). This policy applies to Local Workforce Development Boards (Local Boards), and is effective on the date of issuance. This policy contains some state -imposed requirements. All state -imposed requirements are indicated by bold, italic type. This Directive finalizes Workforce Services Draft Directive ETPL Policy and Procedures (WSDD- 215), issued for comment on September 3, 2020. The Workforce Development Community submitted 131 comments during the draft comment period. A summary of comments, including all changes, is provided as Attachment 8. This policy supersedes Workforce Services Directive W10A Eligible Training Provider List - Policy and Procedures (WSD15-07) dated November 10, 2015. Retain this Directive until further notice. REFERENCES • Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (Public Law 113-128) Sections 3, 116, 122, 123, 129, 134, and 404 Title 20 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 677: Performance Accountability Under Title I of the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (Uniform Guidance), Sections 677.150 and 677.230 • Title 20 CFR Part 680: Adult and Dislocated Worker Activities Under Title I of the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (DOL Exceptions), Sections 680.200, 680.210, 680.230, 680,300, 680.310, 680.320, 680.330, 680.340, 680.350, 680.410, 680.420, 680.430, 680.450, 680.460, 680.470, 680.480, 680.490, 680.500, 680.520, and 680.530 The EDD is an equal opportunity employer/program. Auxiliary aids and services are available upon request to individuals with disabilities. Revised February 22, 2023 Page 1 of 5 DIC: 12 EXHIBIT C • Title 20 CFR Part 681: Youth Activities Under Title I of the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (DOL Exceptions), Sections 681.480 and 681.540 • Title 34 CFR Part 600: Definitions (Department of Education), Section 600.2 • Training and Employment Guidance Letter (TEGL) 8-19, Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) Title I Training Provider Eligibility and State List of Eligible Training Providers (ETPs) and Programs (January 2, 2020) • TEGL 3-18, Eligible Training Provider (ETP) Reporting Guidance under the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) (August, 31, 2018) • TEGL 19-16, Guidance on Services provided through the Adult and Dislocated Worker Programs under the WIOA and the Wagner-Peyser Act Employment Services, as amended by title III of WIOA, and for Implementation of the WIOA Final Rules (March 1, 2017) • TEGL 13-16, Guidance on Registered Apprenticeship Provisions and Opportunities in the WIOA (January 12, 2017) • California Cade of Regulations Division 7.5 • California Education Code Sections 94801.5, 94850.5, and 94874 • California Unemployment Insurance Code (CUIC) Section 14005 • CU I C Section 14230 • Workforce Services Directive WSD22-08, ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (January 17, 2023) • WSD22-01, Performance Guidance (July 18, 2022) • WSD19-10, Recovery of WIOA Tuition and Training Refunds (February 20, 2020) • WSD19-06, CaUOBSActivity Codes (December 27, 2019) • WSD17-01, Nondiscrimination and Equal Opportunity Procedures (August 1, 2017) • California's Unified Strategic Workforce Development Plan BACKGROUND WIOA Section 122 requires states to establish and maintain a list of training providers who are eligible to receive WIOA Title I, subtitle B funds for training services. An America's Job Center of CaliforniasM (AJCC) may issue an Individual Training Account (ITA) to a WIOATitle I, subtitle B eligible individual (out of school youth age 16-24, adult or dislocated worker) to fund training services. The Employment Development Department (EDD) is the entity responsible for publishing, disseminating, and maintaining the comprehensive California (CA) ETPL with performance and cost information. In addition, the EDD is responsible for ensuring programs meet the eligibility criteria and performance levels established in this Directive; removing programs that do not meet the program criteria or performance levels established in this Directive; and taking enforcement actions against providers that intentionally provide inaccurate information, or that substantially violate the requirements of WIOA. Page 2 of 5 EXHIBIT C Likewise, the Local Board is responsible for carrying out the procedures outlined in this Directive; work with the state to ensure there are sufficient numbers and types of providers of training services with expertise in assisting individuals with disabilities, and adults in need of adult education and literacy activities; developing and maintaining a local ETPL; and ensuring the dissemination of the CA and local ETPL through the AJCCs, including in formats accessible to individuals with disabilities. In cooperation with stakeholders, the State has adopted the following principles when developing the CA ETPL policies and procedures: 1. Simplicity — Avoid imposing burdens that inhibit the participation of quality training providers. 2. Customer Focus —The policies and procedures support the collection and presentation of easily accessible and reliable training program information for both individuals seeking career and occupational training information, and career planners who assist participants eligible for training services. 3. Informed Consumer Choice — The CA ETPL includes locally approved training programs that lead to self -sustainable careers in the local/regional economy, as supported by current labor market information identifying industry sectors and occupational clusters that are high -growth, high -demand, projecting skills shortages, and/or vital to the regional economy. 4. Training Delivery Flexibility — Policies and procedures that foster and support the inclusion of various types of training delivery that expand opportunities for consumer choice. 5. Quality — Ensure a comprehensive list of quality training programs that meet minimum performance standards, and provide industry -valued skills in priority industry sectors. Information must be accurate, transparent, accessible, and user-friendly. 6. Respect for Local Autonomy —The policy remains supportive of the autonomy WIOA grants to the Local Boards. In addition, this policy and Local Board policies should align with the three policy objectives outlined in the California Unified Strategic Workforce Development Plan: 1. Fostering demand -driven skills attainment — Workforce and education programs need to align program content with the state's industry sector needs so as to provide California's employers and businesses with the skilled workforce necessary to compete in the global economy. 2. Enabling upward mobility for all Californians — Workforce and education programs need to be accessible for all Californians, especially populations with barriers to employment, and ensure that everyone has access to a marketable set of skills, and is Page 3 of 5 EXHIBIT C able to access the level of education necessary to get a good job that ensures both long- term economic self-sufficiency and economic security. 3. Aligning, coordinating, and integrating programs and services — Workforce and education programs must economize limited resources to achieve scale and impact, while also providing the right services to clients, based on each client's particular and potentially unique needs, including any needs for skills -development. POLICY AND PROCEDURES This policy establishes the types of allowable training services, consumer choice, the difference between the state and local ETPL, the requirement for Local Boards to establish a ETPL policy, eligibility criteria and procedures for initial and continued eligibility for CA ETPL training providers and programs, the federally mandated Eligible Training Provider Performance Report (ETP Report), and the roles and responsibilities of the Local Boards and the EDD in maintaining the integrity of the CA ETPL. The following attachments to this Directive provide guidance and resources when implementing the CA ETPL: 1. ETPL Policy and Procedures Contains detailed information on initial and continued eligibility requirements, and the roles and responsibilities of the Local Boards, and the EDD in maintaining the integrity of the CA ETPL and the quality of the training programs offered on it. 2. ETPL Definitions Includes definitions relevant to the ETPL Policy and Procedures. 3. ETPL Local Board Delegation and Cancelation Form This form is utilized to delegate or cancel the delegation of a Local Board's ETPL responsibilities to another Local Board. The delegation includes both state and local ETPL functions. This form is required to be submitted annually. 4. CA ETP Assurances Form This form must be completed by the provider to ensure they will provide the data necessary to complete the annual ETP Report. This form must be submitted annually. 5. CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart Decision trees designed to assist Local ETPL Coordinators with determining initial and continued eligibility for the various provider types and programs. Page 4 of 5 EXHIBIT C 6. Local ETPL Coordinator Contact Form A form for Local Boards to designate the Local ETPL Coordinators and provide their contact information. Summary of Comments A list of all comments received during the comment period, and responses to those comments from the EDD. 8. Errata Chronology A list of changes that were made to the Directive and its attachments. UQW97, The information contained in this Directive should be shared with Local ETPL Coordinators, and all other staff involved in the administration of the ETPL. I ► II11ta If you have any questions, contact the State ETPL Coordinator at wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov. /s/JAVIER ROMERO, Deputy Director Workforce Services Branch Attachments: 1. ETPL Policy and Procedures (DOCX) 2. ETPL Definitions (DOCX) 3. ETPL Local Board Delegation and Cancelation Form (DOCX) 4. CA ETP Assurances Form (DOCX) 5. CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart (PDF) 6. Local ETPL Coordinator Contact Form (DOCX) 7. Summary of Comments (DOCX) 8. Errata Chronology (DOCX) Page 5 of 5 EXHIBIT C ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 ETPL Policy and Procedures Contents A. Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 B. Allowable Types of Training Services................................................................................... 2 C. State and Local ETPLs........................................................................................................... 2 D. Local Board Policy................................................................................................................ 3 E. Consumer Choice.................................................................................................................6 F. CA ETPL Application Process................................................................................................ 6 ETPL Application Process by Provider Category..................................................................... 7 G. CA ETPL Initial Eligibility....................................................................................................... 8 Training Provider Initial Eligibility Criteria.............................................................................. 8 Training Program Initial Eligibility Criteria............................................................................ 11 H. CA ETPL Continued Eligibility Criteria................................................................................ 13 Training Provider Continued Eligibility Criteria.................................................................... 13 Training Program Continued Eligibility Criteria.................................................................... 13 I. Approval and Denial of Training Provider/Program.......................................................... 15 Approval of Training Provider/Program............................................................................... 15 Denial of a Training Provider/Program................................................................................. 15 J. Delisting Training Providers/Programs.............................................................................. 16 K. Placing Delisted Training Providers/Programs Back on the ETPL...................................... 18 L. Appeals...............................................................................................................................18 Appealsto EDD..................................................................................................................... 19 M. Maintenance of the CA ETPL.......................................................................................... 20 N. ETP Report.......................................................................................................................... 20 O. Technical Assistance and Resources.................................................................................. 20 TrainingProviders................................................................................................................. 21 LocalETPL Coordinators ........................................................................................................21 WSD21-03 Page 1 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 A. Introduction This policy establishes the types of allowable training services, consumer choice, the difference between the state and local Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL), the requirement for Local Workforce Development Boards (Local Boards) to establish an ETPL policy, eligibility criteria and procedures for initial and continued eligibility for Eligible Training Providers (ETP) and programs, the federally mandated Eligible Training Provider Performance Report (ETP Report), and the roles and responsibilities of the Local Boards and the Employment Development Department (EDD) in maintaining the integrity of the state ETPL. This document contains detailed information on initial and continued eligibility requirements, and the roles and responsibilities of the Local Boards, and the EDD in maintaining the integrity of the state ETPL and the quality of the training programs offered on it. B. Allowable Types of Training Services The following are the allowable types of training for the Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) Title I program: a. Occupational skills training, including nontraditional employment. b. On -the -Job Training (OJT). c. Incumbent Worker Training (IWT). d. Programs that combine workplace training with related instruction, which may include cooperative education programs. e. Training programs operated by the private sector. f. Skill upgrading and retraining. g. Entrepreneurial training. h. Job readiness training provided in combination with the training services described in (a) through (g) above. Adult education and literacy activities, including activities of English language acquisition and integrated education and training programs, provided concurrently or in combination with services provided with the training services described in (a) through (g) above. Customized training conducted with a commitment by an employer, or group of employers, to employ an individual upon successful completion of the training. While all of the above are allowable training services under WIOA, service types b, c, and i are not required to be on the ETPL. C. State and Local ETPLs Local Boards and the EDD are responsible for working together to identify ETPs for the state ETPL. The state ETPL creates a pool of ETPs that Local Boards can utilize to establish their local ETPL. In California, the state ETPL is called the California (CA) ETPL. Each Local Board must maintain a local list of training providers and programs. Local Boards may add additional local requirements for providers and/or programs (except for WSD21-03 Page 2 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 apprenticeship programs) to be eligible on the local ETPL. Local Boards must include all CA ETPL approved apprenticeship programs on their local ETPL. Adding additional local requirements may result in providers that are on the CA ETPL, but may not be eligible for inclusion on the local ETPL. While additional requirements may be added for the local ETPL, Local Boards may only include training providers on their list that are approved for the CA ETPL. If the Local Board is reviewing provider and/or program applications for inclusion on the ETPL, the Local Board must conduct the state eligibility review first, and then determine eligibility for inclusion on their local ETPL. When conducting the state eligibility review, the Local Board must do so using only the state's requirements, and not the Local Board's additional requirements. Local Boards that do not add additional requirements must include all of the providers/programs on the CA ETPL on their local ETPL, whereas Local Boards with additional requirements may have a subset of the state list as depicted in the diagram below: Note — Providers on the local ETPL must be on the CA ETPL. Note — Additional functionality is being added to the CalJOBSsM system to enable Local Boards to identify the training providers and programs approved for their local ETPL. D. Local Board Policy Each Local Board must develop local policies that provide sufficient consumer protection and oversight of training providers. These policies must meet the minimum requirements of the procedures outlined in this Directive, and may include additional requirements as deemed appropriate by the Local Board. Such policies must include, but are not limited to, processes that achieve the following: • Ensure participants can avail themselves of, and are made aware of, grievance/complaint procedures. Please reference Workforce Services Directive WIOA Grievance and Complaint Resolution Procedures (WSD18-05) for guidance. • Recover WIOA training funds. Please reference Recovery of WIOA Tuition and Training WSD21-03 Page 3 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Refunds (WSD19-10) for guidance on recovering training funds. • Outline any additional eligibility requirements providers and/or programs (except apprenticeship programs) must meet to be listed on the local ETPL. o These requirements must support the creation of a list that ensures provider performance, job -driven training, informed consumer choice, continuous improvement, and cost-effective investment of public funds. o Requirements may include, but are not limited to: ■ Additional performance requirements. ■ Program location. ■ Accreditation requirements. ■ Cost. Include the timeline for initial and continued eligibility review for inclusion on the local ETPL o Continued eligibility review for the CA ETPL must be completed annually, and review for the local ETPL must be completed at least once every two years. o Within the federally required timeline in the previous bullet, Local Boards have discretion on when they conduct initial and continued eligibility for inclusion on the local ETPL. The following are just a few examples of options for local review: ■ Review entire local ETPL every two years. ■ Review each provider/program annually. ■ Review on the anniversary of when the provider/program established continued eligibility on the local ETPL. • Process for delisting training provider/programs from the local ETPL. Provide comparable training opportunities if the training provider goes out of business. If the training provider is a Bureau of Private Postsecondary Education (BPPE) approved provider, the policy should include the requirement to coordinate with BPPE's Office of Student Assistant Relief. Ensure training programs lead to at least one of the following: 1) credentials and/or certificates valued by employers, or 2) training -related employment as a result of gaining measurable technical skills for a specific occupation. This requirement ensures that training programs lead to high -quality jobs, as described in the California Unified Strategic Workforce Development Plan. Job quality serves the workforce development system and broader public sector by protecting investments in training. Please see ETPL Definitions (Attachment 2) for a definition of a postsecondary credential, as well as a definition of a training program that leads to employment. o Please note, a program on the ETPL that only leads to employment will negatively affect a Local Board's Credential Attainment rate, since all individuals in an education or training program are included in the measure. Please refer to CaIJOBSActivity Codes (WSD19-06) Attachment 3 for a list of activity codes that place individuals into the Credential Attainment performance measure. WSD21-03 Page 4 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Verify and document participant attendance at regular intervals throughout the length of the training program. Per WSD19-10, the Local Board should check with the training provider to ensure clients are still in the training program each month. If not able to check monthly, the Local Board must check at least quarterly. • Require providers to maintain sufficient records and to make these records available for monitoring or audit by either the Local Board and/or the state. • Ensure there are no conflicts of interest between the Local Board and the provider, which includes, but is not limited to the following: o A prohibition on the payment of referral fees by training providers to Local Board staff, including America's Job Center of California" (AJCC) operator staff. o Decisions made by the Local Board regarding ETPs and their programs is in compliance with WIOA Section 107(h). • Outline the requirement of the Local Board to keep all training provider and program eligibility documents (either physical or electronic), and the process to provide them to the EDD within five business days, if requested. • Explain the Local ETPL Coordinator's responsibilities, which, at minimum, must include the following: o Requirement to provide technical assistance to all training providers with programs located within the Local Workforce Development Area (Local Area) seeking to be listed on the CA ETPL. o Requirement for reviewing and approving or denying providers and programs for initial eligibility in a timely manner: ■ The review must include eligibility for the CA ETPL that meets requirements outlined in this Directive. ■ The review must include eligibility for the local ETPL that meets requirements outlined in the Local Board's local ETPL policy. Requirement for reviewing and approving or denying providers and programs for continued eligibility in a timely manner: ■ The review must include eligibility for the CA ETPL that meets requirements outlined in this Directive. ■ The review must include eligibility for the local ETPL that meets requirements outlined in the Local Board's local ETPL policy. o Method and timeline for notifying providers if they or their program(s) are removed from the CA and/or local ETPL. • Describe the appeal process that meets the requirements outlined in this Directive. In addition, Local Board policies shall include the following for training providers who are deemed exempt per California Education Code (CEC) Section 94874, and are not regionally accredited by an accrediting institution: • Verification of the instructor's credentials or experience. WSD21-03 Page 5 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 • Ensure the financial stability of the training provider. • Annual inspection of the schools or training programs. • Ensure actual instruction is taking place. • Ensure instructional equipment and instruction meet current industry standards. Local Boards may delegate their responsibility of the ETPL to another Local Board to act on their behalf in making nominations for training providers and programs to be listed on the CA ETPL, and the creation of their local ETPL. To delegate, or cancel an existing delegation, please complete and submit the ETPL Local Board Delegation and Cancelation Form (Attachment 3). Any Local Boards that delegate their ETPL responsibilities to another Local Board must complete this form annually between July 15C and July 30". Due to the signature requirement (physical or electronic signature), this form should be emailed as an attachment. E. Consumer Choice Training services must be provided in a manner that maximizes informed consumer choice in selecting an eligible provider and program. Each Local Board must make the local ETPL available to customers. Additionally, the Local Board must make available information identifying ETPs for OJT, customized training, and IWT. After consultation with a career planner, an individual who has been determined eligible for training services may select an ETP from the Local Board's local ETPL. Unless the program has exhausted training funds for the program year, the Local Board must refer the individual to the selected provider, and establish an Individual Training Account (ITA) for the individual to pay for training. A referral may be carried out by providing a voucher or certificate to the individual to obtain training. The cost of the referral of an individual with an ITA to a training provider is paid by the applicable Adult, Dislocated Worker, or Youth program. F. CA ETPL Application Process For a provider to be listed on the CA ETPL, the provider must have its information entered into the CaIJOBS ETPL module. It is the Local ETPL Coordinator's role to provide assistance and guidance to training providers who register in CaIJOBS. Once all necessary information is entered, the Local ETPL Coordinator must review and nominate the training provider and/or program to the State ETPL Coordinator for inclusion on the CA ETPL ensuring all information provided is complete, accurate, and current, and is in alignment with this Directive. The EDD will review applications for the CA ETPL within 30 days of receipt from the Local Board. WSD21-03 Page 6 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Once the provider and/or program is approved and included on the CA ETPL, the Local Board must review, and approve or deny the training provider for inclusion on their local ETPL ensuring all information is in alignment with their Local Board policy. ETPL Application Process by Provider Category 1. In -State Training Provider All training providers that have a training site(s) in CA and wish to be listed on the CA ETPL are required to be registered in CaIJOBS. The training provider shall provide all the training provider information required in the CaIJOBS ETPL module. The training provider must upload a signed CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4) to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. If the in -state training provider is a Department of Labor (DOL) Registered Apprenticeship or California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR), Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS) approved apprenticeship, please see the Training Provider Initial Eligibility section below. Local Boards must review and nominate a provider headquartered in their Local Area for the CA ETPL if the provider meets state eligibility requirements. If a provider has multiple locations, the Local Board(s) in the area of the provider locations must nominate the program(s) to the State ETPL Coordinator. 2. Distance Education Training Providers All Distance Education training providers that wish to be listed on the CA ETPL are required to be registered in CaIJOBS. The training provider shall provide all the training provider information required in the CaIJOBS ETPL module. The training provider must upload a signed CA ETPAssurances Form (Attachment 4) to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. The State ETPL Coordinator will determine if a Distance Education training provider is eligible to be on the CA ETPL using the eligibility criteria in this Directive. If a Local ETPL Coordinator is contacted by a Distance Education training provider, the provider should be referred to wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov for assistance. 3. Out -of -State Training Providers All training providers, other than Distance Education training providers, that have training sites located only outside of CA cannot be listed on the CA ETPL. Local Boards cannot utilize an ITA with out-of-state training providers unless leveraging an approved ETPL reciprocal agreement. Please see ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (WSD22-08) for more information on the use of approved agreements. Please reference the CaIJOBS ETPL Module Guide Card (located on the Staff Online Resources page in CaIJOBS) for detailed information on the CaIJOBS process for registering new training providers. WSD21-03 Page 7 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 G. CA ETPL Initial Eligibility Training Provider Initial Eligibility Criteria Initial eligibility applies to providers previously not listed on the CA ETPL under the WIOA or the Workforce lnvestmentAct of 1998 (WIA). The initial eligibility period is one year (365 days). The Local ETPL Coordinator is responsible for reviewing the training provider's initial eligibility prior to nominating for inclusion on the CA ETPL. The following institution types are eligible for inclusion on the CA ETPL: 1. Adult education secondary schools, as long as the activities are provided in combination with occupational skills training. 2. Pre -apprenticeship and apprenticeship providers. 3. Private postsecondary institutions. 4. Public postsecondary institutions. The initial eligibility process for each for the training provider types listed above is based on the following: 1. Adult Education Secondary Schools Training providers must be an eligible provider of adult education and literacy activities under Title II of WIOA. Adult education and/or literacy activities must be offered concurrently, or in combination with, occupational skills training. A list of Title II providers can be found on the California Department of Education (CDE) website. 2. Pre -apprenticeship and Apprenticeship Providers a. Pre -apprenticeship Provider Training providers must have a letter of commitment from a DOL registered or DIR DAS approved apprenticeship program. To be listed on the CA ETPL, the pre -apprenticeship program must award an industry -recognized credential or certificate. The state will not enter information on pre -apprenticeship training programs, this information will be entered by Local Boards, if necessary. Pre -apprenticeship programs are considered Individualized Career Services under WIOA, and thus are not required to be on the ETPL. Pre -apprenticeship programs that do not result in an industry -recognized credential or certificate cannot be listed on the ETPL; however, those pre -apprenticeship programs that do provide an industry -recognized certificate or credential can be listed on the ETPL and used in conjunction with an ITA. The California Workforce Development Board (State Board) and each Local Board must ensure that federal WIOA funds awarded for pre -apprenticeship training in the building and construction trades fund programs and services that follow the Multi -Craft Core Curriculum (MC3) implemented by the CDE and that develop a plan to help increase the representation of women in those trades. WIOA prohibits Title I funds from being used for "construction, purchase of facilities or buildings, or other capital expenditures for improvements to land or buildings except with WSD21-03 Page 8 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 prior approval." b. DOL Registered Apprenticeships and DiR DAS Approved Apprenticeships DOL registered apprenticeships and DIR DAS approved apprenticeships are automatically eligible to be listed on the CA ETPL and do not have any eligibility requirements. The state will reach out to new apprenticeship programs to inform them of the opportunity to join the CA ETPL. If the provider opts into the ETPL, the apprenticeship program will be placed on the ETPL by the state. The State Board and Local Boards shall, to the maximum extent feasible, coordinate their pre -apprenticeship and apprenticeship training programs with one or more DIR DAS approved apprenticeship for the occupation and geographic area. 3. Private Postsecondary Institutions (for -profit or non-profit) Training providers be must be accredited by the Accrediting Commission for Schools (ACS) Western Association of Schools and Colleges (WASC); the WASC Senior College and University Commission (WSCUC); have current BPPE Approval to Operate; current Verification of Exemption by BPPE; or are deemed exempt per California Education Code (CEC) Section 94874. Note that providers who are deemed exempt are not required to have a Verification of Exemption. However, if EDD is unable to determine the specific exemption that the provider falls under, then EDD reserves the right to request that the provider obtain a Verification of Exemption from the BPPE. Providers that fall under exemptions (a), (d), (f), or (h) of CEC Section 94874 are not eligible for the ETPL. A Distance Education provider without a physical presence in California that offers postsecondary distance education to California students for a fee must be registered with the BPPE. Private Distance Education higher education institutions that are degree granting, non-profit, and accredited are not required to register with BPPE, but must be accredited by the ACS WASC, the WSCUC, or an agency recognized by the U.S. Department of Education. For more information on the BPPE Out -of -State Institution registration, please see the BPPE Out -of -State Institution Registration webpage. For a directory of accredited schools, please visit ACS WASC and WSCUC. For more information regarding BPPE Approval to Operate, or current Verification of Exemption, please visit the BPPE website. If the training provider has a BPPE Approval to Operate, Verification of Exemption, or Out -of -State Institution Registration, the document must be uploaded to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. 4. Public Postsecondary Institutions a. Public Postsecondary Community Colleges WSD21-03 Page 9 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Training providers must be accredited by the WASC Accrediting Commission for Community and Junior Colleges (ACCJC). The following website can be utilized to search for the WASCACCJC accredited colleges: WASC ACCCC. For public postsecondary community colleges not WASC ACCJC accredited, but are currently in the initial accreditation process, the Local Board can nominate the training provider, and the State Board and the EDD will determine whether the community college meets the training provider initial eligibility criteria. b. CA State University (CSU) and University of CA (UC) Training providers must be accredited by the WSCUC. The following website can be utilized to search for WSCUC accredited colleges: WSCUC. In addition to the above requirements, all training providers (with the exception of apprenticeship programs) must meet the following: All training providers are subject to the Equal Opportunity and Nondiscrimination requirements found in Section 188 of WIOA. All Local Boards must ensure a training provider is in compliance prior to nominating the training provider to be on the CA ETPL. Equal Opportunity and Non -Discrimination procedures should be posted at the AJCC and approved training providers' facilities, and provided to each participant upon enrollment in a CA ETPL training program. It is critical for Local Boards to utilize EDD- provided monitoring tools to evaluate the providers, and to upload appropriate documents to the Documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. It is also important to note that all site locations for a provider must be in compliance with WIOA Section 188. For more information, refer to Nondiscrimination and Equal Opportunity Procedures (WSD17-01). Provide information supporting the provider's partnership with business. This may include information about the quality and quantity of employer partnerships. • Enter program(s) of training services into CaIJOBS. The training provider should only enter the program(s) desired to be on the CA ETPL. If the program is offered with multiple modes of delivery, curriculum, or course lengths, the program must be entered separately for each variation. Please reference ETPL Definitions (Attachment 2) for the definition of a Training Program. A signed copy of the CA ETPAssurances Form (Attachment 4) is uploaded to the Documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. This form must be uploaded annually, prior to the provider being reviewed for eligibility. Once the training provider completes the CA ETPL application on CaLIOBS, the Local ETPL Coordinator is responsible for reviewing the provider's information and either denying their inclusion on the CA ETPL, or nominating them for review by the State ETPL Coordinator through the CaIJOBS approval process. The Local ETPL Coordinator must review and nominate, or deny a training provider profile within 30 days of the completed application date. WSD21-03 Page 10 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 The Local Board that contains the headquarters of the provider is responsible for nominating the provider profile. Please reference the Approval or Denial of Training Provider/Program section of this attachment for additional information. Training Program Initial Eligibility Criteria Initial eligibility applies to a program previously not listed on the CA ETPL under the WIOA or the WIA. The initial eligibility period is one year (365 days). After a training provider meets the training provider initial eligibility criteria listed above, been nominated by the Local Board, and approved by the State ETPL Coordinator, each individual training program must meet the following requirements to be listed on the CA ETPL: The training program must be for occupations in in -demand industry sectors identified by the state, region, or Local Board. In -demand or priority industry sector information must be verified with the State Board and/or Local Board. The training program provides training services that lead to an industry -recognized credential, national or state certificate, or degree, including all industry appropriate competencies, licensing and/or certification requirements, or employment in a specific occupation after receiving measurable technical skills. Please note the training program does not have to issue the credential, but the training program should prepare the individual to obtain the credential. For example, a Class A Truck Driving program does not issue the Class A driver's license, but it should prepare the individual to pass the state -issued exam to obtain the license. For more information on if a training leads to an industry -recognized credential, please see DOL's Credential Attainment Decision Tree. The cost in the Cost Details tab in the program wizard should match the cost of a member of the general public enrolling in the program without assistance from WIOA. This information should be available in the provider's brochure or website. If the Local Board works out a different cost with the provider, then the cost information in the training activity code will need to be updated to reflect the different cost. The mode of instruction, and class schedule(s) are consistent with the provider's advertised brochure/website. If a program is offered with multiple modes of instruction (e.g., online and in -person) or durations, the program needs to be entered separately for each variation. For providers with a 8PPE Approval to Operate, the training program and its location are 8PPE approved'. For WASC accredited training providers where the program's instruction and/or curriculum development is entirely sub -contracted to another entity or third party vendor, the training provider directly receiving tuition and related instruction fees ' For providers with a BPPE Approval to Operate, not all BPPE training programs are automatically eligible to be listed on the CA ETPL. WSD21-03 Page 11 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 (e.g., ITA) must meet the requirements outlined in this directive, and register in CaIJOBS as a provider. See ETPL Definitions (Attachment 2) for the definition of third - party subcontracting and what is considered allowable. • Program must provide and meet the following performance metrics based on aggregate data for all students in the program to ensure the program supports the ability for the individual to obtain an industry -recognized postsecondary credential, and/or employment upon completion of the program. The provider must provide performance data for the prior complete program year (July 1—June 30). o Public Postsecondary Community Colleges, CSUs, UCs, and Adult Education Secondary Schools are required to provide performance information for consideration of placement on the CA ETPL, but due to heavy state oversight, investment, and the inability to capture true program outcome data, these institution types are not required to meet a specific performance threshold to be listed on the CA ETPL. The following performance data must be provided and listed in CaIJOBS: ■ Of individuals that exited the program, the percentage who successfully completed the training program (did not withdraw or transfer out of the program). ■ Of individuals that successfully completed the training program, the percentage who are employed within six months of graduating from the training program. For occupations for which the state requires passing an examination, the six month period begins after the announcement of the examination results for the first examination available after a student completes the program. o Private Postsecondary Institutions are required to meet and provide the following performance data in CaIJOBS: ■ Of individuals who exited the program, 50% successfully completed the training program (did not withdraw or transfer out of the program). ■ Of individuals who successfully completed the training program, 50% are employed within six months of graduating from the training program. For occupations for which the state requires passing an examination, the six month period begins after the announcement of the examination results for the first examination available after a student completes the program. Please note —Apprenticeship programs are not subject to program initial eligibility criteria. Once the training provider enters the program into CalJOBS, the Local ETPL Coordinator is responsible for reviewing the program information and either denying their inclusion on the CA ETPL, or nominating them for review by the State ETPL Coordinator through the CaIJOBS approval process. The Local ETPL Coordinator must review and nominate, or deny a training program within 30 days of the completed application date. WSD21-03 Page 12 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 The Local Board where the program is located is responsible for nominating the program. Please reference the Approval or Denial of Training Provider/Program section of this attachment for additional information. For more information regarding the training provider and program initial eligibility process, please refer to the CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart (Attachment 5). H. CA ETPL Continued Eligibility Criteria Training Provider Continued Eligibility Criteria Continued eligibility applies to all training providers listed on the CA ETPL at any time under the WIOA or WIA, and whose initial eligibility has expired. A training provider's initial and continued eligibility is valid for 365 days after the provider is approved for the ETPL. Since providers can be reviewed year-round, all active training providers on the CA ETPL will be evaluated annually by the EDD no earlier than 60 days, and no later than 30 days prior to the provider's eligibility expiration date to ensure they continue to meet eligibility to be retained on the CA ETPL. To determine continued eligibility, the EDD must verify that the training provider continues to meet the requirements outlined in the Training Provider Initial Eligibility Criteria section of this Directive. DOL registered apprenticeships and DIR DAS approved apprenticeships do not have any continued eligibility requirements and will remain on the ETPL. It is recommended that apprenticeships update their program information annually. In addition, providers on the CA ETPL for two full program years (July 1—June 30) must have at least one Title 1, subtitle B enrollment during the previous two program years. If removed due to enrollment requirements, a provider must wait six (6) months from removal to submit their ETPL application for reinstatement and will not be held to the enrollment requirement when determining continued eligibility for placement back onto the list. Training Program Continued Eligibility Criteria Continued eligibility applies to all training programs listed on the CA ETPL at any time under the WIOA or WIA and whose initial eligibility has expired. A training program's initial and continued eligibility is valid for 365 days after the program is approved for the ETPL. Since programs can be reviewed year-round, all active training programs on the CA ETPL will be evaluated annually by the Local Board no earlier than 60 days, and no later than 30 days prior to the program's eligibility expiration date to ensure they continue to meet eligibility to be retained on the CA ETPL. Training providers must reapply for WIOA program certification using CaIJOBS. All applications for continued eligibility of training programs will be evaluated as they are received, by the Local Board and EDD, to ensure they continue to meet eligibility to be retained on the CA ETPL. The Local Board where the program is located is responsible for evaluating the program. WSD21-03 Page 13 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 After a training provider has met the training provider continued eligibility criteria listed above, each individual training program must meet the following requirements to retain their listing on the CA ETPL: • Training program information is reviewed and updated in CaIJOBS. • Training program meets all requirements outlined above in the Training Program Initial Eligibility Criteria section of this attachment. CA ETPL training programs must meet performance metrics to retain their eligibility on the ETPL. The EDD will negotiate with DOL to establish yearly performance goals based on the WIOA primary indicators of performance. For continued eligibility, CA ETPL training programs (with the exception of apprenticeship programs, Adult Education programs, Community Colleges, UCs and CSUs) must meet or exceed the performance metrics required in initial eligibility, as well as the negotiated state -level Title I Adult performance goals. The EDD will publish the state -level negotiated performance goals in a Workforce Services Information Notice located on the EDD website. The continued eligibility performance calculations for each program is based on WIOA participant performance, and is verified using the federal ETP Report published annually by the state. Providers are required to collect and submit aggregate performance data for all students to EDD. The following outlines the performance metrics for continued eligibility: o The program must meet the following performance metric for all students for the most recent complete program year (July 1—June 30): ■ Of individuals who exited the program, 50% successfully completed (did not withdraw or transfer) the program. o The program must meet the following performance metrics for WIOA participants for the most recent complete program year (July 1—June 30)2: ■ Employment Rate 2°d Quarter after Exit meets the state's negotiated goal for the Title I Adult program. ■ Employment Rate 4t' Quarter after Exit meets the state's negotiated goal for the Title I Adult program. ■ Median Earnings meet the state's negotiated goal for the Title I Adult program. ■ Credential Attainment meets the state's negotiated goal for the Title I Adult program (if applicable). ■ Measurable Skill Gains meets the state's negotiated goal for the Title I Adult program. 2 With the exception of completers, providers will be held accountable for the performance measures in which two complete years of data is available for their program(s) on the ETP Report. WSD21-03 Page 14 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Please see CalJOBS ETPL Module Guide Card (located on the Staff Online Resources page in CaIJOBS) for instructions on how providers reapply for WIOA program certification in CaIJOBS. For detailed information regarding the definitions and calculations of the WIOA primary indicators of performance, please see Performance Guidance (WSD22-01). Please refer to the CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart (Attachment 5) to determine if a training provider and its program(s) meet the continued eligibility criteria to remain on the CA ETPL. I. Approval and Denial of Training Provider/Program Approval of Training Provider/Program After reviewing to ensure the provider/program meets the eligibility criteria above, the Local Board can nominate the training provider/program to the state for review. If nominating the provider to the State ETPL Coordinator, the signed CA ETPAssurances Form (Attachment 4) must be uploaded to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. The State ETPL Coordinator will review providers within 30 days of their nomination by the Local Board. The EDD will review the provider/program's information to ensure it meets all initial or continued eligibility requirements outlined in this Directive. If eligible, the State ETPL Coordinator will approve the provider/program for the CA ETPL, and notify the Local ETPL Coordinator. if the Local Board has additional local ETPL eligibility requirements, the Local ETPL Coordinator must review all CA ETPL approved distance education programs, as well as all in- state CA ETPL approved programs located in the Regional Planning Unit for inclusion on their local ETPL. If the Local Board does not have additional local ETPL eligibility requirements, all approved CA ETPL programs must be included on the Local Board's local ETPL. Denial of a Training Provider/Program After review, if a Local Board determines the training provider/program does not meet the requirements to be listed on the CA ETPL, the Local Board must inform the training provider in writing with the reason(s) for the denial, and provide information on the Local Board appeal process within 30 days of receipt of the application. A copy of the written notification provided to the provider must be uploaded to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS within 10 business days of issuance. If the Local Board nominates a provider/program to the state for review, but upon review, the State ETPL Coordinator denies the training provider/program listing on the CA ETPL, the EDD must inform the Local Board of the denial and the reason(s) for the denial within 30 days of receipt of the nomination. The Local Board must in turn inform the training provider in writing with the reason(s) for the denial, and information on the Local Board appeal process within 30 WSD21-03 Page 15 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 days of receipt of the EDD's decision. A copy of the written notification provided to the provider must be uploaded to the document section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS within 10 business days of issuance. If the training provider is able to rectify the issue that caused the denial, the Local Board can review the information and resubmit to the State ETPL Coordinator for review. For example, if a provider is denied solely because the CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4) was not uploaded to CaIJOBS, the State ETPL Coordinator would notify the Local Board, which would notify the provider. The Local Board can then nominate the provider again once the form is uploaded to CaIJOBS. The training provider's request to be on the CA ETPL must be denied if the training provider fails to provide complete information, intentionally provides inaccurate information, or has substantially violated any WIOA requirement(s). If the EDD, in consultation with the nominating Local Board, determines a training provider intentionally supplied inaccurate information or violated any WIOA requirement(s), the EDD or the Local Board shall deny the training provider's application for the CA ETPL, and the training provider is not allowed to be reconsidered for inclusion on the CA ETPL for at least two years. If approved for inclusion on the CA ETPL, but the Local ETPL Coordinator determines the training provider/program does not meet their local ETPL requirements, the Local Board must inform the training provider in writing with the reason(s) for the denial, and information on the Local Board appeal process within 30 days of receipt of the application. A copy of the written notification provided to the provider must be uploaded to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS within 10 business days of issuance. J. Delisting Training Providers/Programs To ensure the integrity of the CA ETPL, the Local Board or the EDD will remove a training provider or program from the CA ETPL at any time for the items below: 1. The training provider will be immediately removed from the CA ETPL for any of the following reasons until such time as they meet continued eligibility. A provider who has been removed from the list for any of the following reasons is liable to repay all Adult and Dislocated Worker training funds received during the period of noncompliance: a. The training provider has lost its accreditation or its approval to operate from its regulating agency. b. A private postsecondary training provider no longer meets the exempt criteria per CEC Section 94874, or the provider's Verification of Exemption by BPPE (if required by the EDD) expired or is revoked, and the provider does not have a new Verification of Exemption, or BPPE Approval to Operate. c. The nonprofit Community Based Organization no longer qualifies under Section 501(c)(3) of the Federal Internal Revenue Code. d. The apprenticeship program is no longer registered with the DOL under the National Apprenticeship Act, or is no longer approved by DIR DAS. The State WSD21-03 Page 16 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 ETPL Coordinator is responsible for removing apprenticeship programs. e. The pre -apprenticeship program no longer has a Letter of Commitment from a DOL registered or DIR DAS approved apprenticeship program, or no longer leads to an industry -recognized postsecondary credential. f. It is determined the provider sub -contracted instruction of the program to another entity without approval from WASC or BPPE. See ETPL Definitions (Attachment 2) for the definition of third -party subcontracting. g. The provider is not in compliance with WIOA Section 188. 2. A training provider will be immediately removed from the CA ETPL for a period of no less than two years for any of the reasons listed in this section. A provider who has been removed from the list for any of the following reasons is liable to repay all Adult and Dislocated Worker training funds received during the period of noncompliance: a. The state identifies the Local Board and training provider are participating in pay -to -play activities (commonly known as kickbacks) that include, but are not limited to: the Local Board received monetary or gift exchanges for (or in the hope for) referrals to a specific training provider, and/or exchanges of money or gifts to have the training provider listed on ETPL. As part of the annual on -site monitoring of Local Boards, if it is determined the Local Board is engaging in pay -to -play activities, a corrective action is required, and failure to take timely action to be in compliance may result in decertification of the Local Board involved. b. It is determined the training provider falsely reported information. c. The training provider substantially violated a provision of Title I of WIOA, or its implementing regulations. d. The training provider's top level leadership (e.g., owner, CEO, Director, etc.) is convicted of violating any federal or state law associated to the operation of the institution. 3. The EDD, in coordination with the Local Board, can remove a provider for any of the following reasons. Reactivation to the list is at the discretion of the State ETPL Coordinator and the Local Board: a. It is determined the provider is not serving or providing value to WIOA participants, and is listed on the CA ETPL solely for other purposes, such as the utilization of Workers' Compensation Supplemental Job Displacement Benefit vouchers. b. The provider has not served at least one Title I, subtitle B enrollment during the previous two program years. See "Training Provider Continued Eligibility Criteria" for requirements to be reinstated to the ETPL. c. The provider's CalJOBS profile and/or program information is inaccurate or incomplete. d. The training provider has not demonstrated a good faith effort in providing the ETP Report data to the EDD. e. The provider no longer wishes to be listed on the CA ETPL. WSD21-03 Page 17 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 4. In an effort to safeguard W10A funds, the training provider will be suspended from the CA ETPL if the training provider is under any federal, state, or local investigation. During the period of suspension, no new enrollments may occur, but the training provider can continue to serve existing WIOA funded enrollments. Once the investigation is complete, a review of the findings by the state will determine if the provider can be reinstated to the CA ETPL. If a training provider/program is removed from the CA ETPL, the EDD must inform the Local Board of the denial and the reason(s) for the delisting within 30 days of the removal. The Local Board must in turn inform the training provider in writing with the reason(s) for the delisting, and provide information on the Local Board appeal process within 30 days of receipt of the EDD's decision. A copy of the written notification provided to the provider must be uploaded to the document section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS within 10 business days of issuance. All training provider/programs removed from the CA ETPL must be removed from the local ETPL immediately upon notification from the EDD, as any new enrollments into a training program not eligible to be on the CA ETPL will result in disallowed costs. It is the responsibility of the EDD and the Local Board to work together to ensure any participants currently enrolled in a training program removed under items 1 and 2 experience minimal disruption. If the training provider or program is removed due to items 1, 3, or 4, any participants already enrolled (attended at least one day of instruction) can continue participation in the program until the training is complete, but no new enrollments may occur. Please see WSD19-10 for additional information regarding the recovery of training funds. K. Placing Delisted Training Providers/Programs Back on the ETPL Requests to be placed back on the CA ETPL must be submitted through the Local Board (unless the provider is a Distance Education or apprenticeship program). The training provider and program(s) must meet all criteria outlined in the CA ETPL Continued Eligibility Criteria section of this attachment to be placed back on the CA ETPL. If the training provider is removed for item 2 of the Delisting Training Providers/Programs section of this directive, two years must have passed from the time of their removal before they can be placed back onto the CA ETPL. If the training provider is removed for item 3(b) of the Delisting Training Providers/Programs section, the provider must wait 6 months from the date of removal before submitting an ETPL application for reinstatement. L. Appeals Appeals to the Local Board Each Local Board must have a written appeal process for the CA and local ETPL that includes the following required provisions: WSD21-03 Page 18 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Instructions for a training provider wishing to appeal a decision. The training provider must appeal to the Local Board in writing within 30 days of the issuance of the denial or delisting notice. The appeal must include a statement of the desire to appeal, specification of the training program(s) in question, the reason(s) for the appeal (i.e., grounds), documentation supporting the grounds for the appeal, and the signature of the appropriate training provider official. • An initial informal meeting between the Local Board staff and the training provider. The purpose of this meeting is to identify if there is a simple solution to resolve the dispute. The opportunity for training providers to have a hearing. The hearing officer shall be an impartial person. The hearing officer shall provide written notice to the concerned parties of the date, time, and place of the hearing at least ten calendar days in advance of the scheduled hearing. Both parties shall have the opportunity to present oral and written testimony under oath, to call and question witnesses, request documents relevant to the proceedings, and have legal representation. • The hearing officer's final decisions must be made within 60 days of receipt of the appeal, and the training provider and the Local Board notified in writing of the final decision. A copy of the final decision must be emailed to the State ETPL Coordinator (wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov), and the Local ETPL Coordinator must upload the final decision to the Provider Profile section of CaIJOBS. Appeals to EDD Distance Education and Apprenticeship programs can appeal directly to the EDD. All other training provider may appeal to the EDD only if the local appeal process has been exhausted, and the provider is dissatisfied with the Local Board's final decision. A training provider wishing to appeal a Local Board's decision must submit a written appeal to the EDD within 30 days from the date of the Local Board's final decision. The request for appeal must include a statement of the desire to appeal, specification of the training program in question, the reason(s) for the appeal (i.e., grounds), Local Board's final decision document, and the signature of the appropriate training provider official. The appeal should be sent to: wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov. • The EDD will promptly notify the appropriate Local Board when the EDD receives a request for appeal and when a final decision has been rendered. • The EDD will review appeals received, make a decision, and notify the training provider and the Local Board. • The EDD will upload the state's final decision to the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. WSD21-03 Page 19 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 M. Maintenance of the CA ETPL The EDD is responsible for the maintenance and publishing of the CA ETPL. Local Boards, in turn, are responsible for ensuring all of their AJCC locations have access to the most recent version of the CA and local ETPLs. Local Boards may include additional performance, occupational, and/or industry data to augment the CA ETPL listings on their local ETPL. Local Boards, job seekers, and training providers have access to the CA ETPL on CaIJOBS by clicking the Access California's ETPL and Apprenticeship Providers link from the homepage, or by clicking More Career Services, and then Education Services section. N. ETP Report The WIOA requires the state to submit an ETP Report with the federal WIOA Annual Performance Report on October V utilizing a template developed jointly by the DOL and U.S. Department of Education. This report includes all WIOA and non-WIOA participants served by each training program listed on the CA ETPL3. The DOL has made the ETP Report data available to the public via trainingproviderresults.gov. The ETP Report gathers critical information, including the employment, earnings, and credentials obtained by participants in the training program. This information will be widely disseminated to assist participants and members of the general public in identifying effective training providers and programs. This information will also benefit the training provider by providing awareness of their program, and serving as a tool to potentially enhance their programs. All training providers are required to electronically submit the program participant data outlined in the CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4). The state recognizes the reporting burden this causes, and understands the data limitations, so the state will work with training providers based on the available data provided. Data reporting for the annual ETP Report will be a phased approach with the state working collaboratively with Local Boards, and training providers to obtain the required information. Training providers that demonstrate a good faith effort in providing data will not be subject to removal from the ETPL; however, failure to provide any data may result in removal from the CA ETPL. Performance data from the ETP Report will be used for continued eligibility review of all training programs, excluding DOL registered or DIR DAS approved apprenticeships. O. Technical Assistance and Resources Technical assistance will be provided by BPPE, DIR DAS, Local ETPL Coordinators, and EDD on respective application processes, compliance requirements, and reporting documents. Each Local Board must identify a Local ETPL Coordinator(s) using the Local ETPL Coordinator Contact 3 Apprenticeship programs are excluded from this requirement. WSD21-03 Page 20 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 1 Form (Attachment 6). The Local Board must provide an updated form if the Local ETPL Coordinator changes, or if the existing coordinator's information changes. Training Providers Training providers may contact the Local ETPL Coordinator in their area with questions regarding the application process and eligibility (initial and continued). For basic ETPL information and a list of Local ETPL Coordinators, refer to the EDD's Eligible Training Provider List located on the EDD website. Private postsecondary training providers can obtain assistance from the BPPE through technical assistance workshops (BPPE Application Workshop and BPPE Compliance Workshop), which assists training providers in completing the BPPE Annual Reports, and online reporting tools. Apprenticeship providers that are registered with either the US DOL or CA DIR DAS and wish to be added to the ETPL should contact the State ETPL Coordinator by email: wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov. Local ETPL Coordinators Local ETPL Coordinators can communicate with the State ETPL Coordinator by email: wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov. The EDD will coordinate webinars and trainings as necessary. Announcements related to the CA ETPL will be made via email to the Local ETPL Coordinators. The CaIJOBS ETPL Module Guide Card (located on the Staff Online Resources page in CaIJOBS) provides detailed instructions to assist Local Boards with entering programs into the CaIJOBS ETPL module. The CalJOBS system includes data entry screens and reports, and is the mandatory method to be used by training providers and Local Boards for transmitting this data to the state. For a full list of CaIJOBS Activity Codes used to track a participant's training activities, please see CaIJOBS Activity Codes (WSD19-06). WSD21-03 Page 21 of 21 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 2 ETPL DEFINITIONS Apprenticeship Program — All apprenticeship programs that are registered with the U.S. Department of Labor (DOL), Office of Apprenticeship, or approved by California (CA) Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS), are automatically eligible to be included on the CA Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL). Apprenticeship programs are a written plan designed to move an apprentice from a low or no skill entry-level position to full occupational proficiency. The apprenticeship program is sponsored by an employer, and upon completing the training program, an apprentice earns a "Completion of Registered Apprenticeship" certificate, which is an industry -issued, nationally - recognized credential. Customized Training —Training that meets the following criteria: 1. Designed to meet the specific requirements of an employer (including a group of employers). 2. Conducted with a commitment by the employer to employ an individual upon successful completion of the training. 3. The employer pays a significant portion of the cost of training, as determined by the Local Workforce Development Board (Local Board) involved, taking into account the size of the employer and such other factors as the Local Board determines to be appropriate, which may include the number of employees participating in training, wage and benefit levels of those employees at present and anticipated upon completion of the training), relation of the training to the competitiveness of a participant, and other employer -provided training and advancement opportunities. Distance Education — Education that uses only one or more of the technologies listed below to deliver instruction to students who are separated from the instructor, and to support regular and substantive interaction between the students and the instructor, whether offered concurrently or not. The technologies include the following: 1. The internet. 2. One-way and two-way transmissions through open broadcast, closed circuit, cable, microwave, broadband lines, fiber optics, satellite, or wireless communications devices. 3. Audio conferencing. Eligible Training Provider (ETP) — In order for a training provider to list a program on the ETPL, the training provider must do the following: 1. Receive funding for training services. 2. Meet the standards and requirements to be a training provider on the ETPL. 3. Provide a program of training services. 4. Be one of the following types of entities: a. Institution of Higher Education that leads to a recognized post -secondary credential. WSD21-03 Page 1 of 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 2 b. Entities that carry out a training program registered under the National Apprenticeship Act. c. Other public or private training providers, which may include the following: L Nonprofit Community Based Organization under Section 501(c)(3) of the Federal Internal Revenue Code. ii. Joint labor-management organizations. iii. Eligible training providers of Adult education and literacy activities under Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) Title II. ETPL Training Program Types — In order for a training provider to receive WIOA funds through an Individual Training Account (ITA), its training program(s) must be listed on the ETPL. These programs must provide training services, including, but not limited to the following (unless otherwise noted): 1. Occupational skills training, including training for non-traditional employment. 2. Programs that combine workplace training with related instruction, which may include cooperative education programs. 3. Training programs operated by the private sector. 4. Skill upgrading and retraining. 5. Entrepreneurial training. 6. Adult Education or Literacy Activities in combination with training services listed above. 7. Apprenticeship and Pre -apprenticeship Skills Training (20 CFR 680.330). In -demand Industry Sector or Occupation —The determination of whether an industry sector or occupation is in -demand shall be made by the California Workforce Development Board (CWDB) or Local Board, as appropriate, using state and regional business and labor market projections. An industry sector is considered in demand if it has a substantial current, or potential impact (including through jobs that lead to economic self-sufficiency and opportunities for advancement) on the state, regional, or local economy, and that contributes to the growth or stability of other supporting businesses, or the growth of other industry sectors. An occupation that currently has, or is projected to have, a number of positions in an industry sector so as to have a significant impact on the state, regional, or local economy, as appropriate. Occupational Skills Training — An organized program of study that provides specific vocational skills that lead to proficiency in performing actual tasks and technical functions required by certain occupational fields at entry, intermediate, or advanced levels. Postsecondary Credential — An industry -recognized certificate or certification, a certificate of completion of an apprenticeship, a license recognized by the state or federal government, or an Associate or Bachelor's degree. A recognized postsecondary credential is based on the attainment of measurable technical or industry/occupational skills necessary to obtain employment or advance within an industry/occupation. These technical or industry/occupational skills are generally based on standards developed or endorsed by WSD21-03 Page 2 of 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 2 employers or industry associations. The following are types of recognized postsecondary credentials: • Associate degree. • Bachelor's degree. • Occupational licensure (e.g. Certified Nursing Assistant license). • Occupational certificate, including Registered Apprenticeship and Career and Technical Education educational certificates. • Occupational certification (e.g. Automotive Service Excellence certification). • Other recognized certificates of industry/occupational skills completion sufficient to qualify for entry-level or advancement in employment. Certificates awarded by Local Boards and work readiness certificates are not considered postsecondary credentials because neither type of certificate is recognized industry -wide, nor documents the measurable technical or industry/occupational skills necessary to gain employment or advancement within an occupation. Certificates/credentials that provide general skills, even if such general skills are broadly required to qualify for entry-level employment or advancement in employment, are not considered postsecondary certificates/credentials. The following are examples of credentials/certificates that are not recognized postsecondary credentials: • Occupational Safety and Health Administration 10-hour course on job -related common safety and health hazards (OSHA 10). • National Career Readiness Certification. • National Retail Federation Credentials. • ServSafe Food Handler's Certification. • Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Certification. • Certificates for General Computer Skills (Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook, etc.). For an additional resource, the DOL designed an interactive Postsecondary Credential Attainment Decision Tree to assist in making a determination about whether a credential is considered an industry -recognized credential. This tool is best used in conjunction with the information outlined in this directive. Pre -apprenticeship Program —A program designed to prepare individuals to enter and succeed in an apprenticeship program, and includes the following elements: 1. Training and curriculum that aligns with the skill needs of employers in the economy of the state or region involved. 2. Access to educational and career counseling and other supportive services, directly or indirectly. WSD21-03 Page 3 of 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 2 3. Hands-on, meaningful learning activities that are connected to education and training activities, such as exploring career options, and understanding how the skills acquired through coursework can be applied toward a future career. 4. A partnership with one or more apprenticeship programs that assists in placing individuals who complete the pre -apprenticeship program in an apprenticeship program. 5. Opportunities to attain at least one industry -recognized credential through an apprenticeship program. Secondary School Diploma or Recognized Equivalent— CA -recognized diplomas issued by a CA public school, as well as by private schools accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges (WASC) or equivalent regional accreditation body. The requirements of a secondary school diploma are outlined by the California Department of Education (CDE) and listed on CDE's High School Graduation Requirements webpage. A secondary school equivalency certification indicates that a student has completed the requirements for a high school education. CA has approved the use of three high school equivalency tests (HSET): GED®, HiSET®, and TASCT". These tests are for students 18 years old and older, and 17 years old (in some instances). Those who pass the CA High School Proficiency Examination are awarded a Certificate of Proficiency by the CA State Board of Education. While some HSET preparation programs may issue "diplomas or certificates" of completion these documents are not genuine high school equivalency credentials. There are various free HSET preparation programs available for free through the CA Adult Education Provider Directory. Third -Party Subcontracting — a program where course instruction and curriculum is not developed by the provider, and instead is created and delivered by a third party. Per Attachment 1 of the directive, the provider accepting tuition and related instruction fees (e.g. ITA) must be the provider listed on the ETPL. Third -party subcontractors cannot accept WIOA funding without meeting ETPL eligibility requirements, and being placed on the ETPL. Per the California Education Code Section 94886, private postsecondary institutions that receive "institutional charges" such as tuition are required to be approved or deemed exempt by the BPPE.' 1 EDC 94886 - Except as exempted in Article 4 (commencing with Section 94874) or in compliance with the transition provisions in Article 2 (commencing with Section 94802), a person shall not open, conduct, or do business as a private postsecondary educational institution in this state without obtaining an approval to operate under this chapter. EDC 94858 - "Private postsecondary educational institution" means a private entity with a physical presence in this state that offers postsecondary education to the public for an institutional charge. WSD21-03 Page 4 of 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 2 Training Program — A program of training services is one or more courses or classes, or a structured regimen that provides the WIOA training services, and leads to any of the following: 1. An industry -recognized certificate or certification, a certificate of completion of a registered apprenticeship, a license recognized by the State or the Federal government, an associate or baccalaureate degree. 2. A secondary school diploma or its equivalent. 3. Employment (see definition for Training Program that leads to Employment). 4. Measurable skill gains. Due the federal reporting requirements of the ETP Report, if a program is offered with more than one mode of delivery (e.g. online and in -person), more than one program length (e.g. contact hours and/or weeks), and/or more than one curriculum, the program needs to be entered once for each different variation. For example, if program A is offered online, and in - person, the program needs to be entered twice: (1) for the online program, and (2) for the in - person program. Training Program that leads to Employment —An eligible ETPL program must prepare graduates for a specific occupation related to the training that was provided. This means that programs must award measurable technical skills, rather than general skills that are broadly required for employment. These measurable technical or industry/occupational skills generally are based on standards developed or endorsed by employers or industry associations. The training program must be valuable to employers, as evidenced by partnerships with business within priority industry sectors as identified in the State or Local Plan. Support of the training program from at least three separate employers are required to be eligible, and documentation of this support should be uploaded into the provider profile. In addition, graduates of the program must be employed in an occupation related to the training program. Training -related employment can be recorded for WIOA graduates in the follow-up ribbon of the WIOA application. Unsubsidized Employment— Employment in the private or public sector where the employer does not receive a subsidy from public funds to offset all or part of the wages and costs of employing the individual. WSD21-03 Page 5 of 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 3 ETPL LOCAL BOARD DELEGATION AND CANCELATION FORM A Local Workforce Development Board (Local Board) may delegate or cancel responsibility of the California (CA) and local Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL) to an appointed Local Board by completing this form. This form must be completed at the time of a change (delegation or cancelation), and annually in July to ensure the State ETPL Coordinator is able to coordinate with the appropriate Local Board. Please sign (physical or electronic) and submit the completed form to the Employment Development Department via email to WSBETPL@edd.ca.gov. Select either the Delegation or Cancelation box: DELEGATION — Delegating Local Board is assigning responsibility for the CA and local ETPL to the Appointed Local Board, and the Appointed Local Board agrees to coordinate the CA and local ETPLon behalf of the Delegating Local Board. Signatures are required of the Delegating and Appointed Local Board's Executive Director. CANCELATION — Delegating Local Board is revoking responsibility for the CA and local ETPL to the Appointed Local Board. The Delegating Local Board will resume responsibility for the CA and local ETPL unless a new Local Board is assigned this responsibility. Signatures are required of the Delegating and Appointed Local Board's Executive Director. Delegating Local Board; t . ua Delegating Local Board Executive Director Name: Signature: Date: ! ,z - - fi Appointed Local Board a ?. _ 'o d a " Appointed Local Board Executive Director Name: Signature: Date: WSD21-03 Page 1 of 1 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 4 CA ETP ASSURANCES FORM A completed and signed California (CA) Eligible Training Provider (ETP) Assurances Form must be uploaded to the documents section of the Provider Profile in CaIJOBS. This form must be uploaded annually, prior to the provider being reviewed for eligibility. Part A. I certify that [Insert Name of School/Organization]: (a) Is a legal entity, registered to do business in the state of California (CA). (b) Has not been determined to be ineligible to receive federal funds. (c) Is in compliance with Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act Section 188 and Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 38. (d) Has demonstrated effectiveness in operating occupational classroom or distance training program(s). (e) Agrees that training provider facilities, classroom instruction, relevant financial records, and attendance records may be reviewed by state, federal and/or local monitors or auditors to ensure compliance with funding requirements. Part B. I certify that I: (a) Have reviewed the annual student data reporting requirements for the Eligible Training Provider Performance Report (ETP Report) established for training providers. Please refer to the ETP Report Required Data listed below. (b) Will begin collecting required student data elements that are not currently being collected. (c) Will report and submit the ETP Report data for all students trained in each of my school/organization's training programs listed as approved on the Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL) to the Employment Development Department by the due date. I understand that my school/organization's application for program approval on the CA ETPL will not be processed without receiving this Eligible Training Provider Assurances Form. Name of Training Provider (School/Organization) Mailing Address City, State, Zip Code Phone Number (###) ###-#### Print Name of School/Organization Representative Title of School/Organization Representative Signature of School/Organization Representative Date WSD21-03 Page 1 of 2 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 4 ETP REPORT REQUIRED DATA Required Data Fields r� ETPL Provider Name ETPL Program Name Total Number of Individuals Served Total Number of Individuals Exited Total Number who Completed the Program Total Number Quarter after Exit Median Earnings in the 2nd Quarter after Exit Total Number Employed 4" Quarter after Exit Total Number of Individuals that Attained a_C_redential Average Earnings in the 2"d Quarter after Exit Average Earnings in the 4th Quarter after Exit WSD21-03 Page 2 of 2 ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 5 CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 1: CALIFORNIA ELIGIBLE TRAINING LIST (ETPL) TRAINING PROVIDER CATEGORY DETERMINATION Once Training Provider Type is determined, proceed to Step 2. ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 2: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER TYPE DETERMINATION NO NO ATTACHMENT 5 For definitions of the provider types, please reference Attachment 1 and 2 of the Directive. ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 3: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER ELIGIBLITY DETERMINATION YES YES ATTACHMENT 5 I1 W W V 0 a z z a W V 0 a J a w L J N W } W } N W } ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 3: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER ELIGIBLITY DETERMINATION f ej ATTACHMENT 5 F- z w V E a W } Ln w } N W } tA W } ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 4: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER TYPE DETERMINATION YES YES YES ATTACHMENT 5 J[Ainin& JAvider i not�,eii gil3 a bethked �n t1ib A ET0" Ln z w V f a, N W z c w U O a 0 z a u J O a a w M a ti 1 re z O H a z w F W J m W J W w W 0 O 99 a O z z Q z f- J a a W h ►u ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 5: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER ELIGIBLITY DETERMINATION YES ATTACHMENT 5 ETPL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES CA ETPL Training Provider and Program Determination Flowchart STEP 5: CA ETPL TRAINING PROVIDER ELIGIBLITY DETERMINATION YES ATTACHMENT 5 ETPL POLICY AND PROCEDURES ATTACHMENT 6 LOCAL ETPL COORDINATOR CONTACT FORM Each Local Workforce Development Board (Local Board) Executive Director must designate a Local Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL) Coordinator(s). The Local ETPL Coordinator(s) will review and nominate training providers and programs for inclusion on the ETPL, via CaIJOBSs^^ on behalf of the Local Board. Submit completed and signed (physical or electronic) form to the Employment Development Department by email: WSBETPL@edd.ca.gov. Date: Local Board: MIS Administrator Name: Executive Director Name: Signature of Approving Local Board Executive Director Date WSD21-03 Page 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 7 SUMMARY OF COMMENTS Draft Directive €TPL Policy and Procedures (WSDD-215) There were 131 comments to the draft version of this Directive. Contents Accreditation..............................................................................................................................2 AdultEducation..........................................................................................................................2 Appeals.......................................................................................................................................2 Apprenticeships.........................................................................................................................3 ConsumerChoice.......................................................................................................................5 Delegation..................................................................................................................................5 Eligibility.....................................................................................................................................7 GeneralEligibility...................................................................................................................7 InitialEligibility.......................................................................................................................7 ContinuedEligibility...............................................................................................................8 CostInformation......................................................................................................................10 Credentials...............................................................................................................................11 DistanceEducation..................................................................................................................12 EEO...........................................................................................................................................13 ETPReport................................................................................................................................14 ETPAssurances Form...............................................................................................................17 GeneralETPL Requirements....................................................................................................17 In-Demand...............................................................................................................................19 LocalBoard Policy....................................................................................................................19 Localvs CA ETPL.......................................................................................................................20 Other........................................................................................................................................22 Out -of -State Providers.............................................................................................................22 Pre-apprenticeships.................................................................................................................23 ThirdParty................................................................................................................................24 Worker's Comp/Supplemental Job Displacement Benefit(SJDB)...........................................24 Page 1 of 25 Accreditation Comment #1— How do we determine if a provider and their programs are accredited? Resolution —Accreditation can be verified by visiting the Western Association of Schools and Colleges, Senior College and University Commission (WSCUC) or WASC Accrediting Commission for Community and Junior Colleges (WASC ACCJC) website and searching for the provider in the directory of institutions. Direct links are provided in the policy. Comment #2 — Do private postsecondary schools need to be Bureau of Private Postsecondary Education (BPPE) approved and accredited by WASC? Resolution — No, private providers must be either accredited by WASC, have BPPE Approval to Operate, or meet the exemption criteria identified in California Education Code (CEC) Section 94874. See Attachment 1 under 3. Private Postsecondary Institutions for more information. Comment #3 — Why is the accreditation only limited to Accrediting Commission for Schools (ACS), WASC, the WSCUC? Why is accreditation limited to regional and not inclusive of any Department of Education (DOE) accrediting agency in lieu of BPPE? There are specific examples listed in bold italics that do include these exceptions, what's the difference? Resolution —The BPPE oversees private postsecondary institutions operating in California with the exception of those outlined in CEC Section 94874. Per CEC 94874(i) institutions accredited by the ACS WASC, or WSCUC are exempt from the BPPE. Additional language expanding acceptable accrediting agencies for Distance Education providers has been added on page 9 of this directive. Adult Education Comment #4— Regarding defining providers of adult education as only those who provide training under Title II of Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) (English as a Second Language [ESL] and citizenship classes). This could exclude Regional Occupational Programs (ROPs), community based schools, and any district that contract these services out to local Community Based Organizations (CBOs). Resolution —Training Employment and Guidance Letter (TEGL) 8-19, attachment 1, page 3 includes "Eligible providers of adult education and literacy activities under WIOA Title II if such activities are provided in combination with training services described in 20 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 680.350" as an eligible training provider. Appeals Comment #5 — Does the appeals process still work in the context of Local Workforce Development Boards (Local Boards) "nominating" providers for the ETPL instead of placing them on directly? Where should the appeals process start? Resolution —The appeals process starts with the Local Board that issued the denial. If a provider is denied inclusion on the ETPL, and wishes to appeal, the provider must submit its appeal to the Local Board. Page 2 of 25 Comment #6 — Who would be the party responsible for (1) suspending the provider that is under federal, state, or local investigation; (2) notifying the provider of the suspension? If the provider protests, stating they were not afforded due process conduct, who will be responsible for handling any possible legal process as a result of this suspension. Resolution — Removing the provider would be the responsibility of both the Local Board and the state. If either found that a training provider is currently under investigation, then the provider would be immediately suspended by either the state or the Local Board, and the Local Board would inform the provider of the suspension. The provider would then undergo the appeals process if it so chooses, starting with the Local Board. Comment #7 — What if the training provider disagrees with the Local Board's initial eligibility assessment? Resolution —The Local Board must provide the training provider with information regarding the appeals process. Comment #8—Are initial/informal meetings required as part of the appeals process if both parties waive it based on written confirmation? Resolution —All Local Boards must include an option for an informal meeting in their appeals policy. However, both parties can agree to waive this requirement, and documentation should be uploaded into the Provider Profile. This also needs to be included in the local policy. Comment #9 —Are formal hearings required if both parties waive it? Can impartial hearing officers be employed at the Local Board or does it need to be from an outside agency? Can the hearing officer be a compliance analyst not working directly with ETPL? Resolution — Local Boards must include the option of a formal hearing in their appeals policy. However, both parties can agree to waive this requirement, and documentation should be uploaded into the Provider Profile. Guidance on the appeals process, including impartial hearing officers, needs to be included in the local policy. Comment #10 — Can a Local Board rule to approve a provider on appeal, if the EDD originally rejected it? Resolution —Yes, but the provider/program has to go through final EDD approval before being reinstated to the ETPL. Apprenticeships Comment #11— It appears that a number of requirements are inapplicable to apprenticeship programs, including the WIOA Section 188 requirement. Is this correct? Resolution — Both Department of Labor (DOL) and Department of Industrial Relations (DIR), Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS) ensure that apprenticeships meet Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) standards per 29 CFR 30.3, therefore the Local Board cannot impose additional EEO requirements onto the apprenticeship program. Page 3 of 25 Comment #12— Please provide further guidance on including all California (CA) apprenticeships on the local Eligible Training Provider List (ETPL). There are some apprenticeship programs that are not available locally (example: apprenticeship programs in Imperial County do not have a presence in Southern California), and does not seem to make sense to list locally as we are unable to provide the Individual Training Account (ITA) for training due to the distance restrictions. Resolution — Per TEGL 13-16, Change 1, "All Registered Apprenticeship Program (RAPS) on a statewide ETP list must also be located on all local ETP lists in the state." In addition, TEGL 8-19 states that "Local Boards may add additional requirements for providers, except for RAPS, which result in providers that are on the state ETP list that may not be eligible for inclusion on the local ETP list." Comment #13 — Can Local Boards require local program requirements to apprenticeship programs related to payments (W-9s, Invoice Agreements) and other WIOA assurances (WIOA section 188), list of employers partners, or is that assumed by the state? Resolution —Apprenticeship programs cannot have additional eligibility requirements added to them, per TEGL 8-19. If an apprenticeship program is approved by DOL or DIR DAS and want to be added to the ETPL, they must be added to the state and local ETPL. They cannot be removed from the ETPL until they request to be removed or they lose apprenticeship approval/designation from DOL or DIR DAS. Comment #14—Are registered apprenticeship programs required to provide a paid employment component and if they are not providing employment, how is that monitored? If they do not provide employment, isn't that just a regular training program? Resolution —Yes, per the Factsheet located on the DOL Apprenticeship website, apprenticeships are required to provide a paid employment component. The approval of apprenticeship programs is managed by the DOL and/or DIR DAS. Comment #15 — Are we allowed to require apprenticeship to meet our contracting/insurance requirements to be on the local list? Resolution — No. Per TEGL 8-19, no additional eligibility requirements can be added to apprenticeship programs. Comment #16 —There are approved apprenticeship programs in occupations that are not in our local priority sector or in -demand occupations. Our local policy is to not put such programs on our local ETPL. It would be inconsistent to allow such a program to be listed as an apprenticeship when we do not list it as a private postsecondary training program. Resolution — Per TEGL 13-16, Change 1, "Given that RAPS are a link to demonstrated hiring needs and WIOA provides automatic training provider eligibility to RAPS, ETA has determined that RAPS qualify as occupations in -demand in the local labor market." In addition, TEGL 8-19, Attachment 1, page 3 states: "RAPS are automatically eligible to be included on the ETP list and are exempt from state and local ETP eligibility requirements." Page 4 of 25 Comment #17 — If WIOA funds cannot be used for building construction, doesn't that restrict Local Boards from funding apprenticeship/pre-apprenticeship programs? Resolution — DOL Final Rules 683.235 clarifies that WIOA funds can't be used for construction, etc. for the purposes of administering WIOA without prior approval from the Secretary of State. However, in the context of apprenticeships and pre -apprenticeships, WIOA funds can be used to pay for participants to be enrolled in construction programs. Consumer Choice Comment #18 — Does this mean the Local Board must refer the client for training and an ITA regardless of the appropriateness of the training? Can an individual demand enrollment and training services while demonstrating poor fitness by missing appointments, failing to meet their obligations in the Individual Employment Plan (IEP), and participate in training that does not necessarily fit their employment goals as long as they possess the minimum age, basic skills, and/or prerequisites to do so? If so, we do not believe this is required by WIOA or beneficial to the participant or the system. Resolution —The America's Job Center of Californialm staff must determine training services are appropriate for an individual after conducting an interview, an evaluation or assessment, and career planning. If training is determined to be appropriate after meeting with a career planner, the Local Board must send that participant to the training they select as long as training funds have not been exhausted. Individuals maintain the right to enroll in whatever program they choose, however it is the Local Board's responsibility to help individuals with choosing the best program that fits their needs based on the IEP. Please see the definition of Training Services in WSD19-06 for further guidance on how an individual qualifies for training services. Comment #19 — The CA ETPL does not permit the Local Board to approve a training program that is eligible to be paid with WIOA funding, even though the Local Board is the subject matter expert on what will lead to a self -sustainable career in the local/regional economy. The CA ETPL limits the choice of consumer and the Local Board to use Labor Market Information to determine which courses should be deemed eligible. Resolution — Local Board staff are still able to select providers to nominate that reflect the needs of their Local Workforc a Development Area (Local Area). Attachment 1, page 6 states "Once all necessary information is entered, the Local ETPL Coordinator must review and nominate the training provider and/or program for inclusion on the CA ETPL." Delegation Comment #20— Does each Local Board need to screen all ETPL schools in the Regional Planning Unit (RPU) for inclusion on its local ETPL? Currently we only go through the local process if a customer requests the school. Resolution —Yes, as well as all CA ETPL approved distance education providers and registered apprenticeships. Page 5 of 25 Comment #21— How does a Local ETPL Coordinator get notified that a distance education program or a program in the RPU has been approved? Resolution — ETPL Coordinators receive notifications via the CalJOBS11 Message Center for their ETPL Coordinator account alerting them to newly added and approved programs. Comment #22 — Please explain how this will be handled for the providers and programs that are already listed. Currently, the ETPL Coordinator in which the main campus is located must manage all of the sites, even those out of their area. Resolution — Local Board initial and continued eligibility procedures will need to be adjusted. For Continued Eligibility, the provider profile will be reviewed by the EDD. The programs will continue to be reviewed by the Local Boards where the programs are located. Comment #23— Local Boards with the main office or main campus located in their region, should not be responsible for listing other affiliated programs located outside their region. Each region needs to have the option to list linked campuses/schools separately in each region. With EEO monitoring requirements and no designated funding provided to hire ETPL Coordinators, being responsible for multiple campuses throughout the State, is an unrealistic expectation, especially for smaller Local Boards with limited resources. Resolution — For Initial Eligibility, the provider profile is nominated by the Local Board where the provider is headquartered. Programs will be nominated by the Local Board where the program is located. For Continued Eligibility, the provider profile will be reviewed by the EDD. The programs will continue to be reviewed by the Local Boards where the programs are located. Comment #24— Once programs are listed on the CA ETPL, can this be clarified why training providers need to contact Local Boards? If the provider is not currently on the CA ETPL, shouldn't the Local Board where the provider (not the program) is located be responsible for nominating the provider? Resolution — Providers can reach out to the Local ETPL Coordinator for technical assistance with entering information in CaIJOBS. The provider is nominated by the Local Board where the provider is headquartered. Programs will be nominated by the Local Board where the program is located. Comment #25 — If there are no changes to the ETPL Local Board Delegation and Cancellation Form (Attachment 3) and the Local ETPL Coordinator Contact Form (Attachment 7) that are already on file, do we need to resubmit them under this new Draft Directive? Resolution — Local Boards will need to submit the ETPL Local Board Delegation and Cancellation Form (Attachment 3) annually in July. The Local ETPL Coordinator Contact Form (Attachment 7) only needs to be resubmitted when there are updates. Comment #26 — Is it possible to not only delegate ETPL duties to another Local Board, but instead to delegate individual providers to another Local Board? Page 6 of 25 Resolution —The delegation form is used to delegate ETPL responsibilities (including providers/programs) to another Local Board. Individual providers cannot be delegated to another Local Board. If a provider moves its headquarters from one Local Area to another, the responsibility for that provider changes, and both Local Board ETPL Coordinators should be made aware of the change. Eligibility General Eligibility Comment #27— Can Local Boards place the burden of proof on providers to prove that their programs meet the requirements for eligibility? Resolution — Local Board staff are required to review programs to ensure they meet eligibility requirements, including credentials. Once all necessary information is entered, the Local ETPL Coordinator must review and nominate the training provider and/or program for inclusion on the CA ETPL ensuring all information provided is complete, accurate, and current, and is in alignment with this Directive. Comment #28 — What documentation is required to demonstrate a provider's partnership with local businesses? Resolution —This will vary depending on the Local Board and their local policy. The state will allow Local Boards to decide what is considered "in partnership with business. Comment #29 — Will the negotiated goals be the same as WIOA title I programs or will there be different ones for training provider programs? Resolution — Programs must meet the performance requirements described in the continued eligibility section of the Directive, as well as the state -level Title I Adult performance goal. Comment #30— Why are training providers that do not award degrees and solely provide educational programs for total charges of $2,500 not allowed? If a provider has a BPPE exemption, it is unclear if a WIOA-funded ITA is considered Federal student financial aid and therefore ineligible. Resolution —This exemption prohibits any federal funding be used to pay for this program, thus excluding WIOA funding from being used. Section 74110 of the CEC defines public funding as "any financial aid paid on behalf of students or directly to an institution from any public source," which includes WIOA. Initial Eligibility Comment #31— Performance requirements for initial eligibility limit customer choice and local autonomy by removing the ability for new training providers to be added to the ETPL without performance data. The Draft Directive does not specify the source of the performance metrics. If in the past, it will come from a provider's BPPE Annual Report, this will further inhibit a Local Board's autonomy as BPPE is currently two years behind in publishing performance data and, in fact, does not even allow a provider to upload data until September for publication in Page 7 of 25 December. This would effectively mean new providers would be required to have two years of performance metrics. Resolution —TEGL 8-19, Attachment 1 indicates that, "The performance of ETPs is a factor that states must use in determining both initial and continued eligibility of a provider to be included on the state's ETP list." The state requires placement data for initial eligibility for two main reasons: 1) it ensures that providers on the ETPL are of a certain quality in keeping with state and federal laws and regulations, and 2) participants are more likely to be successful in WIOA (i.e. employment) if the ETPL program meets the initial eligibility placement requirement. This benefits Local Board performance numbers. Performance data is entered directly into CaIJOBS, and is no longer verified using the BPPE Annual Report. Comment #32 — Given the time it takes for a provider to create and complete an ETPL application, what is the exact timeframe for Local Boards to complete their review process? Resolution — Local Boards should complete their review process of a provider within 30 calendar days of the complete provider and/or program data being submitted into CaIJOBS. The state considers the date of a program being submitted as the application date, and the Local Board has 30 days from that date to nominate the program for review to the state. Comment #33 — Is it required that all initial and continued eligibility reviews be reviewed by the state prior to a Local Board approving? If so, what is the process for this? Resolution — Local Boards will submit providers and their programs to the state for review. This is called "nominating," and the process will be very similar to the current one for adding programs to the ETPL. Within 30 days of receiving the nomination, the state will review the data in CaIJOBS and either approve or deny the provider and/or program, and inform the Local Board. Comment #34 — In the past, performance was collected during the subsequent eligibility period. Are we now, gathering information on performance prior to listing a program on the ETPL? Is there an exception for performance if the provider or program is new? Resolution —Yes, performance information must be provided as part of the initial eligibility review process. The use of performance data during initial eligibility review is required by the DOL, and cannot be waived. Continued Eligibility Comment #35 — Removing programs and then requiring a program meet continued eligibility requirements limits consumer choice and would slow the ETPL's ability to foster demand - driven skills attainment. Resolution —The state has implemented this policy to limit the number of providers that are only on the ETPL for other funding sources (e.g. Workers' Compensation Vouchers) and should help limit the burden of the Local Board ETPL Coordinators in reviewing these providers if they are not helping participants in the workforce system. Comment #36 — Previously, it was up to the Local Board to determine if a provider or program can stay on the ETPL. Is it required that we remove the provider if no enrollments have Page 8 of 25 occurred in 2 years? If so, what is the process forth e provider to get back on the ETPL? Cana customer request the provider? Resolution —Yes, per the Directive providers must be removed from the ETPL if they do not have at least one enrollment in the previous two program years (PYs). If they would like to get back on the ETPL, they must wait 6 months before reapplying to the ETPL and meet the continued eligibility requirements in the Directive. Comment #37 — What is the process for schools that are already listed on the ETPL? Do we review all new requirements at their annual mark or do they need to be reviewed at the effective date of this Directive? Resolution — Per the ETPL Directive, continued eligibility applies to all training providers listed on the CA ETPL at any time under the WIOA or Workforce Investment Act (WIA), and whose initial eligibility has expired. A training provider's initial and continued eligibility is valid for 365 days after the provider is approved for the ETPL. Providers and programs already on the list can be reviewed using the policies outlined in this directive the next time they are reviewed for continued eligibility. Comment #38 — Providers on the ETPL for two full complete PYs (July 1—June 30) must have at least one Title I, subtitle B enrollment during the previous two PYs. Does this refer to one enrollment in the entire provider or one enrollment in the individual program? Resolution — One enrollment for the entire provider. This requirement is not applied to the program. Comment #39 — What is the reapplication process for programs trying to remain on the ETPL? Resolution — Please see the ETPL Guide Card (Attachment 5) for steps on how programs are submitted for continued eligibility review. Comment #40—Since continued eligibility can be reviewed at any time during the year (calendar or fiscal), which timeframe is used to measure performance? Resolution —The performance timeframe is for the previous complete PY, July 11 to June 30'. Comment #41— Will Local Boards have the discretion when they conduct continued eligibility? Resolution —After the program becomes initially eligible, they must be reviewed again before the end of the first year (i.e. a program is added to the ETPL on 10/22/2020, the Local Board must review the program again prior to 10/22/2021). Continued eligibility for providers and programs on the CA ETPL must be reviewed every year. For the local ETPL, Local Boards can do continued eligibility every two years. Local Boards can determine the time frame in which they review and complete continued eligibility as long as it is done within the required timeframes. Comment #42 — For programs that run over the one-year period, how should the Local Board conduct continued eligibility? Page 9 of 25 Resolution —Programs that are longer than one year should use whatever cohort is graduating in the year to determine if they meet continued eligibility. Comment #43 — How do Local Boards determine which programs are up for continued eligibility? Resolution — ETPL programs in CaIJOBS have a Subsequent Review Due Date (SRDD), which is the date that Local Boards must review a program by. If a program is not reviewed by the SRDD, the program will automatically be removed from the ETPL. Programs that are 60 days from their SRDD will have a REAPP icon, indicating they are in need of review. The Detailed Report > Provider > by Program Reapplication allows Local Board to see which programs on the ETPL are due for review. Comment #44 — How do Local Boards keep track of programs during continued eligibility, aside from reports? What if there are issues with how the reports function? Resolution — ETPL staff accounts allow for notifications to be sent to staff's email regarding new programs, changes to existing programs, and other changes in the ETPL module. If there are any issues regarding notifications, please reach out to the CaIJOBS Operations Unit at caljobsadmin@edd.ca.gov. The state is also working to revise provider reports to be more useful to ETPL staff. If ETPL staff would like to request updates to reports (new filters, new columns, etc.), they can email the ETPL box at wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov. Comment #45 — Will we be using the most recent data available in ETP Report for our continued eligibility or waiting until a new year is submitted? Resolution —You would use the most recently available performance data to determine if a provider is eligible. Comment #46 — Reviewing year-round instead of at one specific time may seem like a more efficient method, but in reality, it puts an onerous burden on ETPL coordinators. Couldn't it be possible to make the review at a set time during the year? Or Local Boards should have the option to review at a minimum, once per year, or every 2 years if programs are longer than a year? Resolution —After the program becomes initially eligible and is added to the CA ETPL, they must be reviewed annually for continued eligibility (i.e. a program is added to the ETPL on 10/22/2020, the Local Board ETPL Coordinator must review the program again prior to 10/22/2021). For the local ETPL, Local Boards can do continued eligibility every two years. Local Boards can determine the time frame in which they review and complete continued eligibility as long as it is done within the required timeframes. Cost Information Comment #47 — What should the cost information for an ETPL program be matched to? Resolution —The cost in the Cost Details tab of the program wizard should match the cost a Page 10 of 25 member of the general public would pay when enrolling in the program without assistance from WIOA. This information should be available in the provider's brochure or website. Credentials Comment #48 —This DOL Credential Tool does not include a category for private postsecondary providers. Resolution —Those providers would fit under the "Institutions for Higher Education" category. Comment #49 —The DOL Credential Tool does not explain the skills that either meet/do not meet the definition of a credential. It also does not explain what "in -demand" means. Resolution —The DOL Credential Tool is meant to accompany federal ETPL guidance and illustrate how the requirements are met, rather than explain what those requirements are. Comment #50— If a Local Board, as part of the local initial eligibility requirements, completes an onsite visit with an industry expert who verifies the program meets industry standards, evidenced by the review of the curriculum, equipment, testing, etc., would this be considered as meeting the industry credentials? Resolution —These requirements are in addition to the credential/employment for a specific occupation requirement, not specific criteria for the requirements. Credentials that are "industry -recognized" must meet the definition as described in WSD19-03. Comment #51— There are many programs that do not meet the narrow definition of Post - Secondary Credential outlined in the Definitions attachment that provide valuable and demonstrated effectiveness to individuals with barriers to employment (such as programs for Microsoft Office applications and other office and administrative oriented programs). We also believe these should meet the definition of training under Skills Upgrade and Retraining. Resolution — Per Training and Employment Notice (TEN) 25-19, the programs described here do not meet the definition of a post -secondary credential, since the skills that are attained fall into the general skills/work readiness category. WIOA funds can be used to provide training to general skills such as work readiness, hygiene or safety, but credentials can only be counted toward recognized postsecondary credential attainment if they prepare a person with the competencies required to perform a specific occupation. Local Boards can still send participants to Microsoft courses; however, it is considered a Short-term Prevocational Service and CaIJOBS activity code 215 should be used. Comment #52 — Several comments were received regarding the desire to exclude Skills Upgrading and Retraining, Entrepreneurial Training, and Adult Education and Literacy Activities from the list of services required to be on the ETPL. Resolution — Per TEGL 8-19, Attachment 1, these training services are required to be on the ETPL if using an ITA. Page 11 of 25 Comment #53 — Would the fact that there is a partnership be the only evidence needed to prove that the provider's credential and/or certificate is acceptable as an industry -recognized credential? What extent or depth of partnership is required to meet this bar- and what criteria should the ETPL coordinator use to determine what the extent or depth of the partnership is? Should there be written documentation? Resolution — No, credentials that are "industry -recognized" must meet the definition as described in WSD19-03. The extent or depth of partnership will be determined by each Local Board. Comment #54—The second to last bullet (page 4) only mentions credentials and or certificates, but does it also include degrees or licenses? Resolution —Yes. Attachment 2 provides a full list of the types of recognized postsecondary credentials. Comment #55 — If the program does not issue the credential, what is the distinction that the program meets a requirement to lead to a license? Would it be "if a separate/third party exam is required to obtain the license," otherwise it would need to be issued by the training provider? Resolution —The training program does not have to issue the credential, but the training program should prepare the individual to obtain the credential. For example, a Class A Truck Driving program does not issue the Class A driver's license, but it should prepare the individual to pass the state issued exam to obtain the license. Comment #56—The DOL Credential Tool indicates that a secondary school diploma or equivalent meets the requirements of a credential when attesting to Industry -wide Technical or Industry/Occupation Skills. We believe programs to attain secondary school diplomas or the equivalent meet the definition of training and credential. Resolution —Credentials that are "industry -recognized" must meet the definition as described in WSD19-03. A secondary school diploma or equivalent is a credential, but the Adult Education program can only be on the ETPL when earned in conjunction with Occupational Skills Training. Distance Education Comment #57 — Emergent needs from COVID (online versions, remote training, etc.) is not represented at this time on ETPL. There is urgent need for access to quick training options in addition to training designed to assist in short-term skill building in order to access surge recruitment and lifeboat jobs. How will we handle this need? Resolution —Online learning and/or remote training (distance education) is eligible to be on the ETPL. These providers are reviewed for initial and continued eligibility by the State ETPL Coordinator. Under the new Directive, the responsibility for providers that only function in a distance education capacity shifts to the state for initial and subsequent eligibility review. Page 12 of 25 Comment #58— With the change in instruction delivery due to COVID, will training providers already listed on ETPL have to create new listings for on-line programs? Resolution —Yes. Per Attachment 1, "If the program is offered with multiple modes of delivery, curriculum, or course lengths, the program must be entered separately for each variation." Please reference the definition of a Training Program in Attachment 2. Comment #59 — Online training is really limited, particularly by providers outside of California. There are many quality training programs that initiate and have headquarters outside of California. The ETPL makes it difficult to find and access these providers. Additionally, online courses (without physical operations) are not easily added which is a disincentive. Resolution — Distance Education providers can be headquartered outside of CA, but they must only offer distance education courses. If they only have physical training locations outside of CA, then they are considered an out-of-state provider and cannot be on the CA ETPL; however, an approved reciprocal agreement may be used. If they have physical locations in CA, but are headquartered outside CA, they are still considered an in -state provider and can be on the ETPL if they meet eligibility requirements. Per the Education Code Section 94801.5, Distance Education private postsecondary education institutions must register with BPPE, unless they provide undergraduate or graduate degrees. Comment #60 — What about providers that provide both distance and in -person programs? Or programs that are hybrid partially distance and partially in -person? Resolution — If the provider offers alternative or "hybrid" in -person and online programs, and have a physical location in California, they are an in -state provider. If the program is offered with multiple modes of delivery, different curriculum, and/or different course lengths, the program must be entered separately for each variation. Please reference the definition of a Training Program in Attachment 2. Comment #61— CaIJOBS offers a screen for choosing "Duration" with options of more than one intensity, duration and schedule. CaIJOBS also offers a "Scheduling" screen that could be updated by GSI to allow a selection for in -person and/or distance learning if you want to track it. Could these be used instead of creating separate program entries in CaIJOBS for a single program that only has one listing with the accrediting agency, one curriculum, one cost and one set of performance? Shouldn't CaIJOBS listings match the exact titles and programs approved by the accrediting agency? Resolution — Programs with multiple modes of delivery, different lengths of instruction, and/or different curriculum must be listed separately to comply with ETP Report requirements. Program details should match the brochures available on the provider's website. Comment #62 — Who is responsible for initial and continued eligibility for Distance Education providers? Resolution —The State ETPL Coordinator is responsible for the initial and continued eligibility of Distance Education providers. EEO Page 13 of 25 Comment #63 — Where do Local Boards find the EEO monitoring tools? Resolution — Please refer to your Local Board's EEO Officer, as defined in WSD17-01. Comment #64 — How do Local Boards conduct EEO monitoring for providers with multiple locations? Resolution — It is recommended that Local Boards provide the provider one of the EEO monitoring tools (depending on size of provider), and have them complete it and add it to their CaIJOBS Provider Profile. For additional assistance, please refer to your Local Board's EEO Officer and reference WSD17-01. Comment #65 — Are on -site visits (which would be needed to determine that EEO and other items are posted) required before nominating a training vendor for inclusion on the CA ETPL? Resolution — No, it is recommended that Local Boards provide one of the EEO monitoring tools (depending on size of provider), and have them complete it and add it to their CaIJOBS Provider Profile. For additional assistance, please refer to your Local Board's EEO Officer and reference WSD17-01. Comment #66 — Do the EEO requirements in the Draft Directive apply to all providers? Resolution —This applies to all training providers, except apprenticeship programs. ETP Report Comment #67 — What if BPPE performance data is not collected for providers who serve rural areas? Won't this negatively affect their placement rate? Resolution — Performance requirements for providers under the new ETPL Directive do not require BPPE placement data. Placement data is directly entered into CaIJOBS. Comment #68 — Public education either does not collect and track students past graduation or claim they aren't allowed to release that information due to confidentiality requirements. If a public postsecondary CC, CSU or UC does not provide %who successfully completed a program, nor %who are employed within 6 months for initial eligibility, their program must still be listed on the CA ETPL because they are not required to meet a specific performance threshold, correct? Resolution — For Initial Eligibility, public postsecondary providers are still required to submit performance data. They are not required to meet a threshold. Comment #69 — Would a waiver be available if the individual was sick or had a valid reason not to take the first test? Some state tests have very long periods between test dates. Resolution — No, a waiver is not available for a missed test. Comment #70 — How is the provider supposed to know when one of their students has exited from WIOA? Or does this mean the student exited from the program, either by successfully completing or dropping out? Resolution — Exiting the program refers to the training program rather than WIOA. Page 14 of 25 Comment #71— Is the placement requirement based on WIOA enrollments only or includes general public as well? Resolution —The placement requirement for initial eligibility includes all students. For continued eligibility, the completion measures includes all students, whereas the other measures include WIOA participants only. Comment #72 — In regards to performance for public postsecondary, is there a form for the providers to fill out with the performance information? Resolution —All providers are required to report their performance data directly into CalJOBS. Comment #73 — Local Boards are responsible for meeting WIOA performance outcomes for WIOA participants. Are training providers held to the outcomes that are the responsibility of the Local Boards or do they hold shared responsibility? If the performance metrics inclusive of both WIOA and non-WIOA participants, is it common for providers to track employment outcomes or is this specific to ETPL? Resolution — Providers are held to the performance requirements outlined in the ETPL Directive, as described in the Initial and Continued Eligibility sections. If providers and/or programs are successful with WIOA participants, the Local Board will see this success in meeting their negotiated goals. The responsibility of outcomes is shared. Comment #74 — Program data being entered into CaIJOBS represents duplication of work for those who do collect such information and is not verifiable. Minimally, we believe the state should work with the CaIJOBS vendor to provide a more streamlined process. Resolution —As described in TEGL 3-18, all providers must work with the state to submit performance data required by the ETP Report in order to be eligible and listed on the ETPL. WIOA participant data will come from case management work that is already entered into WIOA applications in CalJOBS. Providers are required to submit aggregate data on all students in CalJOBS. Comment #75 — Providers are required to report data on ALL students, not just WIOA, to the Local Board and the state. Does this data need to be reported by individual? If so, how do we avoid FERPA violations with individuals who have not signed consent for us to have their data? Resolution — Providers only need to submit aggregate all student data as outlined on the CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4). Comment #76—The data collection and reporting of all students that is required for the ETP Report is prohibitive. This is evidenced by many waivers that have been granted by DOL to states as well as our own state's request to waive this provision. The waiver to collect all student data should be extended. Resolution —The waiver to report all student data ended with PY 19. DOL has recently granted an extension to the waiver for PY 20; however, the DOL denied our request for a waiver Page 15 of 25 beyond PY 20, so providers will need to collect and report data on all students (WIOA and non- WIOA). For additional information on the end of this waiver, please see TEN 07-21. Comment #77—Are Community Colleges, UCs and CSUs required to submit data on all of the data points referenced in the CA ETP Assurance Form? There should be a mechanism to obtain entered employment from students attending public schools. Resolution — Yes, per TEGL 3-18 all providers must submit data for the ETP Report. The CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4) notes the data elements required for providers. Comment #78 — Will the state be working directly with providers to upload data to CaIJOBS or will the State be contacting the Local Boards to complete these tasks? Resolution — Ultimately, the Local Boards are responsible for reviewing providers and programs for initial and continued eligibility, which includes performance data. Guidance will be provided on how to upload or enter performance data into CaIJOBS. Comment #79 — The Directive references the ETP site is scheduled to launch in PY 2020; when will this be a requirement for providers to submit data to the system? What do we do in the interim? Resolution — Per TEN 7-21, the ETP All Students Waiver expired on June 30, 2021, so performance data is required to be submitted by providers beginning in PY 21. Comment #80 — ETP Reports will be published in October, what is the reporting period for that report? Are performance reports requested annually by calendar year or program year? Resolution —The ETP Report is reported by PY (July 1 to June 30). For PY 2020, the report due in October 2021 reflects data from July 1, 2020 to June 30, 2021. Comment #81— It looks like the state is aligning the provider program performance measures with WIOA indicators of performance. Does this mean the state will measure this data themselves just as they do with WIOA indicators of performance? Resolution — Providers will submit all student data to the state through the CaIJOBS system, which is then uploaded into the Eligible Training Provider Performance Report (ETP Report). The CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4) details what data the providers are responsible for submitting. WIOA student data will be calculated automatically via the case management data in the CaIJOBS system. Comment #82 — Will training providers be required to enter performance data for individual participants or will it still be totals per program? Will the data be required for both WIOA and non-WIOA students? Resolution —Training providers must enter aggregate data into CaIJOBS for all students in the programs. WIOA student performance data will be calculated via the case management data entered by the case manager. Comment #83 — Will there be a CaIJOBS report for performance data? Page 16 of 25 Resolution — Yes, please use the CaIJOBS Detailed Reports > Provider > by Program Performance report. Comment #84— What if a participant used a pseudo SSN in CaIJOBS? Resolution — If the participant has a pseudo SSN, Local Boards should capture employment and wage information in the Follow Up forms, just as they would normally for WIOA performance. WIOA participants will be included in the ETP Report automatically. Comment #85—Are training providers expected to capture WIOA performance data that is being captured by WIOA case managers (i.e., employment data)? Resolution —Training providers are expected to capture and report aggregate data for all students (WIOA and non-WIOA). Comment #86 — Will the due date for performance be issued as an Information Notice? Resolution — Beginning in PY 21, any provider undergoing initial or continued eligibility review must provide the performance data outlined in this directive. ETP Assurances Form Comment #87 — Does Page 2 have to be filled out for each student who attended during the reporting period? Resolution — No, the CA ETP Assurances Form is just the signed agreement from the provider agreeing they will provide the necessary data elements on the following page. Comment #88 — Does the completed and uploaded CA ETP Assurances Form replace the Performance tab? Or does the information have to be entered in both places? Resolution -The CA ETP Assurances Form is just an agreement that providers will provide the indicated data. The form should be uploaded to the Documents section of the Provider's Profile. The performance data still needs to be submitted in the Performance tab in CaIJOBS. General ETPL Requirements Comment #89 — Due to a combination of performance reporting and the continued eligibility process, Local Boards have seen competition on the ETPL dwindle to very few. This does not promote access and equity. The challenge primarily seems to stem around the accreditation process and reporting. Resolution — It is required per WIOA law, regulations, and guidance that initial eligibility and continued eligibility of providers and programs meet certain requirements, including accreditation and meeting a factor of performance. DOL has also prescribed the requirements of the ETP Report. The state is looking into and open to suggestions on ways to make the required reporting less burdensome. We are also open to ideas and ways to assist Local Boards with advertising the ETPL to providers in their area in an effort to build the list of providers in their area. While a contract is more cumbersome than an ITA, a Local Board has the authority to contract with a provider if they determine there is a lack of providers in their area that offer a specific training program. Page 17 of 25 Comment #90 — Vetting process for adding training providers needs to be streamlined and much improved. It is currently locally driven. Can this be centralized in state this can really help achieve economies of scale? Additionally, the state has expertise in financial stability, accessibility, compliance, etc. Resolution — With the implementation of this policy, the EDD will review all Local Board nominated providers and program for initial and continued eligibility ensuring the requirements outline in this directive are applied consistently. In addition, the EDD is exploring other ways to streamline and improve the ETPL process. Comment #91—Are Adult Education and Literacy activities not allowable/fundable under WIOA unless in conjunction with an authorized training? Are such activities allowable, but not considered training? Are they simply not allowable? Resolution —To be listed on the ETPL, the provider must be an eligible provider of adult education and literacy activities under Title II of WIOA. Adult education and/or literacy activities must be offered concurrently, or in combination with, occupational skills training. Comment #92— Public education course work should automatically be accessed and allowed on ETPL. Data collection has proven prohibitive. Should all public schools, such as Adult Ed, Community Colleges, ROP, contract education, etc., should be automatically eligible. Resolution — Not all public education programs are in -demand, so each program should be looked at individually for ETPL eligibility requirements. Per federal requirements, data collection is required of all providers (except registered apprenticeships). Comment #93 —Are all other service types on Section B, page 2 (except on the job training [OJT], Incumbent Worker Training [IWT], and customized training) required to be on ETPL? Resolution —Aside from OJT, IWT, and customized training, all services listed are considered "training services," and when funded through an ITA, these must be on the ETPL per TEGL 8- 19. Comment #94— Is it required that OJT, IWT, customized training providers are listed in CaIJOBS as a non-ITA provider or be listed on the local ETPL? Resolution — Local Areas are encouraged to enter OJT, IWT, and customized training providers into CaIJOBS as a non-ITA provider. These providers are not required to be on the ETPL; however, the Local Board must inform participants of the OJT, IWT, and customized training options available. In CaIJOBS, these providers would be listed as either ETPL (ITA) or Local Providers (non-ITA). Comment #95 — If all elements of the Draft Directive become final, it will take all the time of one full-time employee to implement them. Additional funding and training would have to be provided by the state. Resolution —The EDD will offer training, and quarterly meetings with the ETPL Coordinators to provide technical assistance. Questions and concerns regarding Local Area's allocations can be directed to the Local Board's Regional Advisor. Page 18 of 25 Comment #96 — What about programs that are offered in English and Spanish? Should those be listed separately, like programs that are online or in -person? BPPE does not mandate combining of program data for English and Spanish courses. Resolution — If the curriculum between a Spanish and an English program is the same, then the program only needs to be entered once. The description of the program should indicate that the program is offered in both English and Spanish. If the curriculum between the two programs is different, then the programs should be listed separately, per DOL ETP reporting requirements. In -Demand Comment #97 — Who verifies whether a program is in -demand? The ETPL coordinator of the Local Board that nominated the provider? And what about priority sectors of adjacent or even far -away Local Boards? Resolution —The Local Board is responsible for verifying that a program be for occupations in in -demand industry sectors identified by the state, region, or Local Board. In -demand or priority industry sector information must be verified with the State Board and/or Local Board. CA ETPL programs would then be available for other Local Boards to use. If the Local Board chooses to have a local ETPL, the Local Board would determine if the program is in -demand in their area. Comment #98 - In -demand industry sectors are locally defined. How do you identify occupations (by SOC code) that are in -demand as determined by the state? Where is this list located? Would you use state in -demand to determine state eligibility, then use local in - demand to determine local eligibility? Resolution —California's Unified Strategic Workforce Development Plan has language on what is considered an in -demand occupation, as well as a list of occupations that Local Boards can use to justify state in -demand requirements. Local Boards would then apply their own local requirements for their local ETPL eligibility. You can find a link to the plan on the California Workforce Development Board's website. Local Board Policy Comment #99 — Does the state have a guide for the specific documents that contribute to "sufficient records"? Resolution —This requirement is to ensure providers are submitting accurate data to the Local Board. Providers can be removed for intentionally supplying inaccurate data. What constitutes as "sufficient records" needs to be addressed in the Local Board's local policy. Comment #100 — If the provider that went out of business is the only provider in a reasonable distance, Local Boards may not be able to provide a comparable training alternative. Must we provide travel costs if the client wishes to go? Resolution —This would be something to address in the Local Board's local policy. Page 19 of 25 Comment #101— Regarding the requirements for Local Board policy listed at the bottom of page 5, isn't this already covered by BPPE Approval/Exemption or WASC accreditation? Resolution — This requirement is for providers who are deemed exempt per CEC 94874, and are not regionally accredited by an accrediting institution. Comment #102 — Current local policy is to have individuals research and visit 3 schools that provide the training that the individual is interested in, before they select which school they wish to attend. Does this supersede the requirements described in Section E, page 5, and we should no longer have the individuals go to 3 schools first? Resolution — Local Boards can continue with this type of procedure, as described in their local policy. Local vs CA ETPL Comment #103 — Without clear guidelines, Local Boards cannot expect the participants to understand why certain local programs are available in the state, but not in our Local Area. It also makes it confusing for the participant when they are reverse referred from that training provider and we will not approve the training locally, but it can be added to the CA ETPL. Resolution —The state is working with the vendor to display CA and local ETPL programs differently. This distinction in the system should help clarify what programs are available to participants, depending on where they are located. TEGL 8-19 allows for Local Boards to continue deciding what programs are allowed on their local ETPL. Comment #104— If a Local Board utilizes the CA ETPL, CaIJOBS serves as the "local list of training providers and programs," correct? Is it possible for the Local Board to make incumbent worker training provider information available when this is by definition only for a specific employer and a specific group of employed individuals? Resolution —The list available to the public includes training providers and programs that are on the ETPL. Any additional training providers that are not on the ETPL (non-ITA) can be entered as a local provider in CaIJOBS and only viewed by staff. The IWT may be eligible for, but not required to be on, the ETPL. Comment #105 — Can state and local eligibility be conducted simultaneously? Resolution — Local Boards can review the provider and program at the same time for both CA and local ETPL eligibility, but they need to review the provider for the appropriate requirements (i.e. local ETPL has additional requirements to eligibility that do not effect eligibility for the CA ETPL). Also, CA ETPL eligibility review must happen first, because if they are no longer eligible per CA ETPL requirements, then they cannot be on the local ETPL. Comment #106 — For the purpose of review for continued eligibility, does local ETPL refer to the geographic boundaries of the Local Board or the training providers that are under contract to the Local Board for payment of ITAs? Resolution —The local ETPL includes all providers that are on the CA ETPL, and meet that Local Board's local ETPL requirements. Page 20 of 25 Comment #107 — Local Boards may have additional criteria in order to be listed locally. For those who do not meet our local requirements, we are expected to list and manage them for the CA ETPL even though we will not use them locally? For both initial and continued eligibility? What happens when a provider has an onsite program and have no enrollments? We are expected to monitor them for compliance, review their performance, and provide technical assistance even though they aren't utilized? Resolution — If a provider and/or program meets the state requirements for the ETPL, and their business is headquartered in Local Area A, then Local Board A must nominate this provider profile to the CA ETPL. If the provider also has programs located in Local Area A, then Local Board A must review and nominate those programs for inclusion on the ETPL—even if this means the provider would not receive any participants. The Local Area can choose to only use their local ETPL for serving their participants, but the providers on the CA ETPL still should be available for other Local Boards to use. Local Board A would monitor for compliance, review performance, and provide technical assistance. The Local Board can delist the provider if the provider has not served at least one Title I, subtitle B enrollment during the previous two program years. See "Training Provider Continued Eligibility Criteria" for requirements to be reinstated to the ETPL. Comment #108 — Will there be copy and paste functionality added or radio button to add a program to the local ETPL? Resolution — CaIJOBS includes the ability to copy program data and create duplicate programs as needed via the "Duplicate" button in the Education and Training Programs tab. See Attachment 5 for more guidance on how to navigate CalJOBS. Comment #109 — As written, it appears that providers outside the Local Area must be included on the local ETPL, if there is no specific local criteria. What is the reasoning behind requiring all CA ETPL to be also on the local ETPL? We don't include out -of -area training on our local ETPL, but if a participant requests it, we will consider it on a case -by -case basis. Local Boards should have the autonomy to consider allowing interested participants to attend out -of -area providers on a case -by -case basis. Resolution —A local ETPL is available for Local Boards to require additional criteria (such as location) for providers to meet, in order for them to serve participants using WIOA funds. If no additional requirements are added, then the Local ETPL will mirror the CA ETPL. Comment #110 — Providers and programs may be eligible for the CA ETPL but not on the local ETPL. Are Local Boards required to nominate them, based only on the requirements of the Directive, will now be responsible to manage that provider and programs on the ETPL? Resolution —Yes. If the provider meets the CA ETPL requirements, Local Boards are responsible for nominating providers headquartered in their Local Area to the CA ETPL. They are also responsible for nominating programs located within their Local Area to the ETPL, assuming they meet the CA ETPL requirements. Per TEGL 8-19, page 5, Local Boards can only use CA ETPL requirements when reviewing providers for the CA ETPL. After conducting state Page 21 of 25 eligibility, the Local Board can then review the provider for local eligibility using their Local ETPL-specific requirements. Other Comment #111— Who are the stakeholders involved in developing the CA ETPL policies and procedures? Resolution —The California Workforce Development Board, Local Boards, regulatory agencies, and providers. Comment #112 — Can an enrolled Youth in a Title I Youth program enroll in ITAs on ETPL if they are over 18 or do they need to be enrolled as an Adult? Resolution —An ITA can be used for an Out -of -School Youth ages 16 to 24, Adults, or Dislocated Workers. In -school Youth cannot receive an ITA. Comment #113— Who is responsible for uploading documents into the provider's profile? Resolution — Both the provider or the ETPL Coordinator have the ability to upload documents. Comment #114— ETPL Coordinator job qualifications need to be defined. Currently if an ETPL Coordinator is not the MIS Administrator, they are excluded from invitations to MIS Admin meetings and no alternative provisions are made to train new ETPL Coordinators. Resolution —To ensure Local ETPL Coordinators receive the training and support needed, the EDD will provide quarterly ETPL Coordinator webinars similarto the monthly MIS Administrator call. In addition, Local ETPL Coordinators can contact the State ETPL Coordinator and wsbetpl@edd.ca.gov to request assistance. Comment #115 — Where would providers and/or Local Board staff go for resources on how to navigate the Provider Module in CaIJOBS? Resolution — Providers and Local Board staff can access the ETPL Guide Card, which is attachment 5 of this Directive. Local Board staff can also access the Provider Services User Guide located in the Staff Online Resources menu of CaIJOBS. Comment #116—The "CRS" designation is confusing to both providers and staff as it is not spelled out or explained anywhere. Can this be removed if it is no longer relevant? Resolution —The state is currently working with the vendor to improve the ETPL module and make it more streamlined, and will look into removing the CRS designation. Comment #117 — What staff privileges are associated to changing the Local Board responsible for the provider on page 58 of the ETPL Guide Card? Resolution —This is available to any staff with an ETPL Coordinator account. Out -of -State Providers Comment #118 — Can out-of-state providers have training paid for through an ITA? Page 22 of 25 Resolution —All training providers, other than Distance Education training providers, that have training sites located only outside of CA cannot be listed on the CA ETPL. Local Boards cannot utilize an ITA with out-of-state training providers unless leveraging an approved ETPL reciprocal agreement. Please see ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (WSD22-08) for more information on the use of approved agreements. Comment #119 — Can WIOA funds be used for out-of-state provider training, as long as the provider is on the ETPL in the state where their headquarters is located? Resolution —AII training providers, other than Distance Education training providers, that have training sites located only outside of CA cannot be listed on the CA ETPL. Local Boards cannot utilize an ITA with out-of-state training providers unless leveraging an approved ETPL reciprocal agreement. Please see ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (WSD22-08) for more information on the use of approved agreements. Comment #120 — When Local Boards contract with an out-of-state provider, how is EEO monitoring conducted? What about going through a formal procurement process? Resolution —To align with 20 CFR 680.320, the directive has been updated to remove the ability for Local Boards to contract with a provider listed on another state's ETPL. All training providers, other than Distance Education training providers, that have training sites located only outside of CA cannot be listed on the CA ETPL. Local Boards cannot utilize an ITA with out- of-state training providers unless leveraging an approved ETPL reciprocal agreement. Please see ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (WSD22-08) for more information on the use of approved agreements. Pre -apprenticeships Comment #121— Do pre -apprenticeships need to meet placement? In the last Directive, this was spelled out. Resolution —Yes, the pre -apprenticeship programs that are on the ETPL need to meet the same standards as the other postsecondary programs. Comment #122 — Suggestion to change pre -apprenticeship language to read: must provide training that "leads" to an industry -recognized credential or certificate. Resolution — No changes were made to the directive as a result of this comment. Comment #123 — Can the state please elaborate on what Local Boards must require of pre - apprenticeship training in the building and construction trades, especially those related to Multi -Craft Core Curriculum (MC3)? Resolution — If WIOA funds are being used to send participants to a construction pre - apprenticeship, the state and Local Boards must ensure the pre -apprenticeships follow Multi - Craft Core Curriculum (MC3) standards. Comment #124 — If pre -apprenticeships are not required to be on the ETPL, is their inclusion solely to use ITAs if it does lead to a credential? What does listed on ETPL and used in Page 23 of 25 conjunction with an ITA mean? I thought ITAs and ETPL went hand in hand. Is it possible to get a link to MC3 in the policy? If a pre -apprenticeship is listed on ETPL must it be connected with a Registered Apprenticeship Program? Resolution — Pre -apprenticeships are considered an individualized career service, and are not required to be on the ETPL. However, if a Local Area wants to utilize an ITA, the program must meet the requirements to be listed on the ETPL. The pre -apprenticeship must meet the definition of occupational skills training and award an industry -recognized credential. If it does not meet these requirements, it cannot be on the ETPL. In order to be eligible for the ETPL, pre -apprenticeships must have a Letter of Commitment from a DOL or DIR DAS apprenticeship. The last paragraph on page 8 states that Local Boards should prefer pre -apprenticeships that are partnered with DIR DAS Approved apprenticeships. Here (PDF) are some resources for understanding Multi -Craft Core Curriculum. Third Party Comment #125 — Isn't this third party subcontracting requirement applicable only to public colleges and universities? Resolution —This applies to both public and private provides accredited by WASC. Comment #126— Why are only WASC-accredited institutions limited from providing courses via a third party if they participated in development of the curriculum and ensure responsibility for the curriculum by issuing the related credential? Resolution — WASC providers do not have their third party courses reviewed during accreditation. To protect WIOA funds, third party vendors that directly receive tuition fees are not allowed to provide training unless the third party vendor provider and program is on the ETPL. Comment #127— Can an accredited training provider sub -contract to another training provider, as long as that training provider is accredited by WASC? Resolution — If the subcontracted training provider is directly receiving payment, they must be listed as their own provider on the ETPL. Comment #128— How do we determine which Local Board conducted continued eligibility for the provider? Resolution —The review record in CaIJOBS will show which Local Board completed the review. Worker's Comp/Supplemental Job Displacement Benefit (SJDB) Comment #129 — Has this passage about removing Workers Comp providers been discussed with the agencies that currently use the ETPL (e.g. Worker's Comp, VA, DOR)? We have frequent requests from these agencies to verify and list their providers. Resolution —Yes, the state has discussed this language with other agencies. Comment #130 — ETPL Coordinators get a lot of calls for people looking for worker's comp voucher training. It seems that the worker's comp customers have to guess what to do, and Page 24 of 25 while this clarification in the Directive will give ETPL Coordinators a ready-made response as to why ETPL Coordinators can't assist worker's comp customers, it still leaves worker's comp customers with questions. Resolution —The DIR handles the administration of the Worker's Comp program, which includes informing those in the program of where they can use their voucher. State law requires that vouchers only be used for public schools or providers on the ETPL. Local Boards that receive questions from voucher holders should direct them to their employer, Claims Administrator, or the Department of Industrial Relations. Comment #131— What are some resources that Local Board staff can use for Worker's Compensation questions? Resolution —Afew resources regarding Workers' Compensation include the EDD's ETPL webpage, which has a paragraph on Workers' Compensation, and Chapter 8 of the DIR's Handbook on the Workers' Compensation program. Page 25 of 25 ATTACHMENT 8 ERRATA CHRONOLOGY The Workforce Services Directive ETPL Policy and Procedures (WSD21-03) dated November 10, 2021 was revised with the following changes: Errata #1— On February 22, 2023, the following changes were made to the Directive: • Directive, Page 1 and Attachment 7, page 1 — Corrected the number of comments received from 135 to 131. • Directive, Pages 1-2 — Made updates to the References section, including: updated format to be in alignment with department guidance, added ETPL Reciprocal Agreements (WSD22-08), and replaced Performance Guidance (WSD19-03) with Performance Guidance (WSD22-01). • Directive, Page 4 and 5, and Attachment 1, page 7, 13, 15, and 21— Due to removal of Attachment 5, removed CaIJOBS ETPL Module Guide Card from list of attachments, changed references to "Attachment 5" to "located on the Staff Online Resources page in CaIJOBS," and updated references to Attachments 6 and 7 appropriately. • Directive Page 4 and 5 —Added Errata Chronology. • Attachment 1, page 7, Attachment 5, Page 1, and Attachment 7, page 13 and 23 —Added language regarding the allowable use of an approved ETPL reciprocal agreement for Out - of -State Training Providers. • Attachment 1, page 9 and 10, Attachment 5, page 5 and 6, and Attachment 7, page 2 — In alignment with the commission's update, change the abbreviation for the Western Association of Senior College and University Commission from "WASC SCUC" to "WSCUC". • Attachment 1, page 10 and Attachment 4, page 1 — Added sentence clarifying that the CA ETP Assurances Form (Attachment 4) is uploaded annually into the Documents section of the provider profile, prior to the provider's eligibility review. • Attachment 1, page 11 and Attachment 5, page 8 — Removed requirement for WSCUC providers to have their training program, location, and mode of delivery approved. • Attachment 4, page 2 — In the table, edited "ETPL Provider Number" to "ETPL Provider Name" and "ETPL Program Number" to "ETPL Program Name." • Attachment 51 page 1 — Simplified text from "Is the Training Provider headquartered and/or has at least one physical training site in CA?" to "Does the Training Provider have at least one physical training site in CA?" • Attachment 5, page 4 and 7 — Changed text from "Does the program offer occupational skills training that results in an industry -recognized credential?" to "Training Program leads to employment in a specific occupation or an industry recognized postsecondary credential?" Page 1 of 1 CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: 1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying. In accordance with its instructions. 3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including agreements) and that all subrecipient's shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this; transaction was made or entered Into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering Into this transaction imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure occurring on or before October 23, 1996, and of not less than $11,000 and not more than $110,000 for each such failure. AMFASOFT CORPORATION Accounting: All in one Grantee/Contractor Organization Program Title �5- A- /I-----j. Signature FARHANA SYEDA AHMED Name of Certifying Official Signature COiification Regarclir}gruq•Free Workaiace ifeaftmonts The certification set out below is -a material representation upon which reliance is placed by the ll.b. Department of Housing rand Urban Development in awarding the Brent. If it is later determined that the contractor knowingly rendered'a false certification; or otherwise violates the requirements of the Drug•Free Workplace Art, the U.S. Department of Mousing and Urban Development, In addition to any other remedies available to the Federal Government, may take action authorized under the Drug -Free Workplace Act GFRTIFi isf A, The contractor certifies that It will provide a druWfrooworkplace by; (a) Publishing a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance Is prohibited In the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violation of such prohfbltlon; M Establishing a drug-frae awareness program to inform employees about 11) The dangers of drug abuse in the workplace; (2) Thu contractor's policy of maintaining a drug-frae workplace; (3) Any available drug counseling, rohabilitation, and employee assistance program; and (a) The penalties that may be Imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations ocotirring in the workplace (c) Making it a requirement that each employee who will be engaged in the performanoe of the grant be given a copy of the statement required by paragraph (a); Id) Notifying the employee in the statement required by paragraph -(a) that, as a condition of employrrisnt tinder the contract, the employee will ill Abide by the terms of the statement; and (2) Notify the employer of any criminal drug statute conviction for a violation occurring In the workplace no later than five days after such conviction. EXHIBIT E (e) Notifying the U,S, Department of Housing and Urban Develnprraent within ten clays after receiving notice under subparagraph (d)(2) from an employee or otherwise receiving actual notice of such conviction; If) Taking one of the following actions, within 30 clays of receiving notice under subparagraph (d)(2), with respect to any employee who is so convicted , ('1) Taking appropriate personnel action against ;such an employea, up to and Including termination; or (2) RecluUfncg such employee to participate satisfactorily In a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program approved for such purposes by a Federal, atatei or local health, law enforcement, or other appropriate agency; (g) Making a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through Implementation of paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (cl}, (a) and (f), B. The contractor shall insert in the space provided on the attached "Place of Performance" form the sites) for the performance of work to be carried out with the grant funds (including street address, city, county, state, and xip code) ,the contractor further certifies that, if it is subsequently determined that additional cites will be used for the performance of work under the contract, It shall notify the U,$, 0opartment of Housing and Urban Development Immediately Capon the decision to use such additional sites by submitting a revised "Place of Performance" form. 5T25/2 . program Operator Signature EXHIBIT E DIVISION OF EMPLOYMENT SERVICES PLACE OF PERFORMANCE FOR CERTIFICATION REGARDING DRUG�FREE WORKPLACE REQUIREMENTS Name: Farhana Ahmed Name of Contractor: Am#a!'port+c�i Contract Number: Date: 5 "2/23 The Contractor shall Insert in the space providecl below the sites) expected to be Wised for the performanU of work under the -contract covered by the certification: Place of Performance (include street address, city, county, state, zip code for each site): 1851 East 4""str a suite-10,5: Address EXHIBIT E E Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion Lower Tier Covered Transactions This certification is required by the regulations implementing Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, 29 CFR Part 98, Section 98.510, Participants' Responsibilities. The regulations were published as Part VII of the May 16, 1988, Federal Register (Pages 19160-19211). (Before completing certification, read instructions which are an integral part of certification) 1. The prospective primary participant, (i.e. grantee) certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals: a. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any federal department or agency; b. Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal been convicted or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (federal, state or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of federal or state antitrust statues or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property. c. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity (federal, state or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (1)(b) of this certification; and d. Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions (federal, state or local) terminated for cause or default. 2. Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. N"SOF r COP PO P-ATION Grantee/Contractor Organization FRPMft A-qm.�7D - DIR�cw OF FMA—i loN Name and Title of Official Authorized to Certify On Behalf of the Grantee s1; �a 3 Date EXHIBIT F INSTRUCTION FOR CERTIFICATION 1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds is providing the certification as set out below. 2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the Department of Labor (DOL) may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 3. The prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds learns that its certification was erroneous whom submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 4. The terms "covered transaction", "debarment", "suspended", "ineligible", "lower tier covered transaction", "participant", "person", "primary covered transaction", "principle", "proposal", and "voluntarily excluded", as used in this cause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to whom this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. 5, The prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the DOL. 6. The prospective recipient of Federal assistance funds agrees by submitting this proposal, that it will include the clause title "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. 7. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. 8. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntary excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the DOL may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. EXHIBIT F Assurances & Certifications Selected providers will be required to sign and submit "actual" assurances and certifioates as required by the Ci hp of Santa Ana and the Workforce Development Board on all contracts. I rccogaize that I must give assurances For each item below. !'lease ininol each box indicnring you have read and arse provitling assararmee you are or i0li be in compliance wish the. illowing: SAWDB uses the CaIJOBs ETPL Module i'or accepting applications From the providers to be listed on the ETPL.. Local boards may authorize a single local board to act on their behalf in making (lutennuiations For initial and/or subsequent eligibility ofproviders. Contractors must enter prograun(s) or training services into CalJOBS, Tlic braining provider should only enter the programs) desired to be on the CA ETPL. If the program is offered with multiple modes of delivery, or course lougths, the program must be entered scparatck for each variation. SAWDB has authorized the South Bay WDB to make initial and subsequent eligibility determinations for applications submitted from providers. Contractors should contact the South Bay WDB 11539 Hawthorne Blvd., 5' Floor, Hawthorne, CA 90250. 310-970.7700. CONTRACTOR is required to be in compliance with South Bay WDB Minster agreement and SAWDB agreement. lV_`1 In cases where South Bay' WDB has denied a provider's application, provider may submit the application to SAWDB for consideration and processing at 801 W. Civic Center Dr.11200, Santa Ann, CA 92701 ATCN: SAWDB Staff. 'Ilia submission nnrst include completed ETPL training program applicattions and a copy of the letter from tilt) South Bay WDB denying application. lY'] Local boards may establish local policies requiring pecfnrmrmce above the state miniumm standards for providers to be included on the ETPL. ItAcceptauec aucl processhig of an application loos not constitute an tlgcv:entcnt or relationship betwocii the CONTRACTOR and SAWDB, nor does it guarantce nay rcferr7ls to the provider by SAWDB. Applications will be process on an ongoing basis. CONTRACTOR must be in compliance with the State and Federal regulations, per Work Force Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) Eligible CONTRACTOR List Policy and Procedure WSD15.07 or it's replacement. ACONTRAC'TORS must also meet one of the following criteria in order to have their prograins listed on the ETPL,: 1) Bureau of Private Postsecondary Education Approval to Operate, or Verification of Exemption by BPPE. r�xHI13IT U 2) Accreditation by the Accrediting Commission For Senior Colleges and Universities, WASC, or the Accrediting Commission for Community and Junior Colleges, CSU, UC, and other WASC accredited institutions. This accreditation can be verified at: %\,rra.a1q&,.nrgl or t rrta:_!lnscseniocorg/_, 3) Postsecondary institutions eligible under 'Title IV of the Higher Education Act (IAA) and offering programs leading toward an associate degree, baccalaureate degree, or certificate. 4) Approval by the California Department of Education. 5) Approval by the Chancellor's Office of the California Community Colleges (CCCCO). lllJ CONTRACTOR must re 7pply to be considered for subsequent approval on the ETPI, and agrees to provide the required performance and cost infonnation data. CONTRACTOR must annually meet the state's minimum performance standards, however the SAWDB may set higher levels. Public Postsecondary Community Colleges, CSUs, and UCs are roquired to provido performance in fomntion for consideration of placement on the CA FTPL, but due to heavy state oversight, investment, and the inability to capture true program outcome data, these { institution types are not required to mect aspcciFie performance threshold to be listed on the CA ETPL. t CONTRACTOR's BPPE accredited shall provide a copy ol'the provider`s BPPE Annual Report (the Perfonnance Pact Sheet) to document their achievement of the perfonnance criteria if applicable. ALL 'Training on the ETPL must be for occupations in in -demand industry sectors identified by the r state, regional or local workforce (levelopment boards. L9 All Training on the ETPL must provide training services that lead to an industry -recognized credential, national or state certificate, or degree, including all industry appropriate competencies, licensing and/or certification requirements. ® CONTRACTOR understands that all performance data and data submitted on the FTPL must be made available for data verification by die SAWDB or the State EDD office. CONTRACTOR must maintain all the relevant records utilized to support the data submitted on ETPL Tor audit or monitoring purposes by the SAWD13 or tire: State EDD office. CONTRACTOR that claim an exemption to BPPE j"�cctiort_ J=tY7� oP tl?ti BWP) let), must apply and receive a "Verification of Exemption" before being listed on the ETPL. Since it has been determined that any expenditure of public funds, state or fedem1, that directly benefits n student to be student financial assistance, we expecttitat instances of exemption will be very mrc. 1(1U` CONTRACTOR must have all considered training programs listed with the BPPE, the SAWDB may verity the data that was submitted to BPPE. 4 All new and current CONTRACTOR will be required to be registered in CalJOBSs" and must have all considered training programs listed with the BPPE match on CaIJOBS. L4 All CONTRACTOR are required to enter performance data for each program to be listed on the ETPL and provide evidence to the Local Board that they have met the minimum performance criteria required. Programs that do not include Perfonnance data will not be approved for listing on the ETPL. EXIi113IT G WCONTRACTOR must have their current course catalogs on file with the SAWDB. CONTRACTOR agrees to immediately notify within l0 workinn last the SAWDB, in writing, of any changes in the information submitted with initial agreement. CONTRACTOR agrees to accept WIOA eligible referrals Prom the Santa Ana WORK Center oil an individual referral basis. FA CONTRACTOR shall not accept nor enroll WIOA participants who do not meet tlae CONTRAC'rOR's entrance requirements, which are to be the same general entrance requirements required of public students, and agrees to submit a written notification to the Santa Ana WORK ,} Center's Case Manager stating the reason(s) for non-acceptaucc. 1C`_7 CONTRACTOR agrecs to assist the WIOA client in applying for PELL. Grants and any other funds that might be available to offset the cost to WIOA and to work togedaer with the WfOA client's Case Manager to ensure all other funding sources are investigated and those funds obtained before y submitting the Vender Voucher to the SAWDB for paN meat. I(l� CONTRACTOR agives to cross out sections of the student enrollment agreement that would hold the WIOA participant financially responsible forany training related expenses. Once accepted, CONTRACTOR agrees to enrol] the WIOA participant in the course stipulated on the Vendor Voucher mad no o her. CONTRACTOR agrees to invoice the Santa Ana WORK Center, on a cost reimbursement basis, for LLtrd pgay tc tin r (Microsoft, Novell, A+, etc.) and will provide a copy of the Pass/Fail results tat that { time. UIy Pre -Apprenticeship CONTRACTORS must include a letter of commitment from an approved apprenticeship program and meet the application policies and procedures required for the type of progrtun (e.g., community college, private postsecondary, adult education provider, etc.). CONTRACTOR Apprenticeship Programs registered under the Ntxrionot Alywenticeship Act (NAA) or recognized by DIWDAS are exempt from initial eligibility procedures. Registered apprenticeship prograaus must be haeludod and maintained on Tile list of eligible providers of t•aining services as long as the corresponding program remains registered, as described at VAOA sec. 122(a)(1). CONTRACTOR agrees to allow SAWDB, Santa Ana WORK Center, the State of California, and the Department of Labor, tlae WIOA client and any or their duly authorized representatives' access to all the records regarding the WIOA client for monitoring purposes. The records include any books, documents, papers, files and computer data directly pertinent to the records of the WIOA participant. The right to records includes the right to make excerpts, transcripts and photocopies. The right also includes the rightto have reasonable and thiluly access to personnel for tho purpose of interviews and discussions related to the records of the WIOA participant. CONTRACTOR agrees to provide ra ss reports which indicate grades and test scores, as well as attuydance reports, to the WIOA client's Case Manager on a monthly basis. EXHIBIT G CONTRACTOR agrees to notify the WIOA client's Case Manager immediately (within 5 working days) i f the WIOA client is absent for more than 3 days in a row, has sporadic attendance or drops out q. or school unless other arrangement are made in writing. L5 CO'NTRAC'rOR agrees to provide a copy of die "reimbursement form" and issue a refund check to the "City of Santa Ana" for the number of unused training hours and any non -issued training/testing vouchers, books, tools, etc. chic within 30 calendar dais after the last day the WIOA client attended school or the day the school was notified that the WIOA client dropped. Said check to be mailed to the attention of the WIOA Case Manager, 901 W Civic Center Dr., 4200, Santa Ana, CA 92701. iP l CONTRACTOR agrees to provide the WIOA Case Manager a copy of the WIOA client's certificate of completion or diploma or official transcripts within 10 working clays of the date of completion or graduation. CONTRACTOR agrees to provide the WIOA client with the same level of job search/ptacentem assistance as provided to the public students and to provide the WIOA Case Manager with all the pertinent information regarding the placementoftho WIOA client within 5 working days of die WIOA client's first day of employment. A WIOA client has 130 days after completing training to get ajob for the CONTRACTOR to get credit for placement in employment. WI am authorized by my Board of Directors, Trustees, other legally qualified officer, or as the owner of thus agency or business to submit this proposal. CONTRACTOR is not currently on any Federal, State of California, or local Debarment list. I CONTACTOR will provide records to show that we are fiscally solvent, if needed. CONTRACTOR has, or will have, all ofdic fiscal control and accounting procedures needed to ensure that WIOA funds will be used as required by taw and contract. CONTRACTOR has additional funding sources and will not be dependent on WIOA fiords alone. CONTRACTOR will meet the applicable Federal, State, and local compliance requirements. These include, but are not limited to: Ip'1 Records accurately reflect actual performanceifapplieable. Maintain record confidentiality, as required. Reporting financial, participant, and performance data, as required. Comply with Statc and Federal fiscal and program activity audits. Complying with Federal and State nondiscrimination provisions. Mecoig requirements of Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. Meeting requirements of die American's with Disabilities Act of 1990. (submit completed survey) L-"Xli 113IT G W' Meeting all applicable labor law, including Child Labor Lase standards. Agree to provide a drug free workplace. Agree to insure the City of Santa Ana through General Liability Insurance and Automobile Liability Coverage in the amount of $1,000,000.00 policy. ( Agree to provide all participants with Grievance Procedures. Agree to insure proposer's employees through Workers Compensation Insurance (including Part-time employees) 4' Procurement policies and procedures are in place and meet federal guidelines. CONTRACTOR will not: 'Use W10A money to assist, promote, or deter union organizing. 7{fl Use Ands to employ or train of persons in sectarian activities. Use funds for youth in the construction, operation, or maintenance of any part of a facility to be used for sectarian instruction or religious worship. Use WIOA money under this contract to purchase any equipment. I hereby assure that all of the above are true. Signature Title -- Date 5 LXI-I IBrr G COMPLAINT HANDLING UNDER THE Workforce Innovation Opportunity Act Santa Ana Local Workforce Development Area Revised March 10, 2023 EXHIBIT H Table of Contents Information Regarding Complaints 3 A. Nondiscrimination and Equal Opportunity Complaints 3 1. Policy Statement 3 2. Civil Rights 4 3. Nondiscrimination laws under WIOA 4 4. How to File Your Complaint 5 B. Criminal Complaints 6 II. General Procedures for Handling Non -Criminal Violations of the Act 6 III. Procedures for Handling Complaints at the LWDA Level 8 IV. Procedures for Handling Complaints at the State Level 12 V. Procedures for Handling Discrimination Complaints by Participants 15 VI. Procedures for Handling Disability Complaints by Participants 17 GLOSSARY OF WIOA TERMS 20 EXHIBIT H Information Regarding Complaints A. Nondiscrimination and Equal Opportunity Complaints 1. Policy Statement In carrying out the purpose of the Workforce Innovation Opportunity Act (WIOA), the City of Santa Ana Local Workforce Development Area (LWDA) will establish programs to prepare youth and unskilled adults for entry into the labor force and to afford job training to those individuals facing serious barriers to employment. Every effort will be made to provide services necessary for eligible individuals to obtain productive employment. In implementing WIOA, all contractors in the Santa Ana LWDA will foster equal opportunity and non-discrimination, as provided in State and Federal equal opportunity and non-discrimination laws including, but not limited to: • Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 • Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 • The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended • Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 • Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 • Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 • Section 188 of the Workforce Innovation Opportunity Act of 2014 In keeping with our commitment, no individual shall be excluded from participation in, denied benefits of, subjected to discrimination under, or denied employment, in the administration or of in connection with any WIOA funded program because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability, or political affiliation or belief. Participation in programs and activities financially assisted in whole or in part under WIOA shall be open to citizens and nationals of the United States, lawfully admitted permanent resident aliens, lawfully admitted refugee, parolees, and other individuals authorized by the Attorney General to work in the United States. No individual will be intimidated, threatened, coerced, or discriminated against because of filing a complaint, furnishing information, or assisting or participating in any manner in an investigation, compliance review, hearing or any other activity related to the administration of WIOA. EXHIBIT H Administration responsibility for this Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action (EO/AA) Program is delegated to the Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) Officer for the Santa Ana local Workforce Development Area. Equal opportunity and non- discrimination, however, will only be achieved through leadership and implementation of a viable Affirmative Action Equal Opportunity Program. 2. Civil Rights No one applying for or enrolled in the Workforce Innovation Opportunity Act (WIOA) programs may be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, disability, national origin, sex, age, political affiliation, or beliefs. This means that — for any of the characteristics listed above: • You may not be denied the opportunity to enroll in WIOA. • No benefits or services may be denied you for discriminatory reasons. • You may not be segregated or treated any differently from other applicants or participants, while you are being registered, interviewed, counseled or tested; or while you are working or attending classes as part of the program. • You must be provided an equal chance to use all facilities available in the program. • Fair employment practices must be provided to all staff with regard to recruiting, hiring, transferring, promotions, training, compensation, benefits, layoff, and termination. You have the right to make a complaint if you feel you have been denied any of the above opportunities. You cannot in any way be penalized for filing a complaint. Your WIOA sponsor has established a mechanism for handling complaints and grievances. Your complaint must be filed within 180 days. All complaints will be handled confidentially. 3. Nondiscrimination Laws under WIOA Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 Prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin, or religion. The Age Discrimination Act of 1975 Prohibits arbitrary discrimination against persons' age 40-70. The Rehabilitation Act of 1973 EXHIBIT H Prohibits discrimination based on disability. Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 Prohibits discrimination in any education or training program or activity receiving federal financial assistance. OTHER CIVIL RIGHTS LAWS: Title VII of the Civil Rights Acts of 1964 Prohibits discrimination in employment based on race, color, religion, sex, or national origin in all terms and conditions of employment and establishes the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission as the administrative agency. White House Executive Order no. 11246 as Amended by Executive Order No 11375 Creates the office of Federal Contract Compliance and prohibits discrimination based on race, color, sex, religion, or national origin. Department of Labor Secretary's Order no. 4-73 Prohibits discrimination based on sex. Equal Pay Act of 1963 Prohibits pay differential solely because of sex. Emergency Employment Act of 1971 Prohibits discrimination based on race, creed, national origin, political affiliation, or beliefs. 4. How to File Your Complaint a. Put your complaint in writing. b. Have it sworn to before a notary public, if possible. c. Provides details that tell what happened, where it happened and when it happened. d. Give the name and addresses of all persons who were present or who had anything to do with the matter. ...Complaints on the basis of race, color, or national origin, age, sex, religion, political affiliation or belief, retaliation and citizenship, must be filed within 180 days of the alleged occurrence directly with: EXHIBIT H Director Civil Rights Center U.S. Department of Labor, Room N-4123 200 Constitution Ave., NW Washington, D.C. 20210 Complaints on the basis of disability must be filed within 180 days of the alleged occurrence. These complaints must be filed directly with the WIOA administrative entity. The WIOA administrative entity shall issue a written decision within 30 days of the filing of the complaint. If the complaint is still unresolved, an appeal may be made to the Chief of State Workforce Investment Division Office. The Department of Labor, the Civil Service Commission, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, and many other offices and agencies are committed to assuring equal employment opportunities for all persons, They will protect you. A case may be taken to court if the other processes do not yield satisfactory results. You may hire your own lawyer, or if you cannot afford one, the court may appoint one for you. It is unlawful for an employer, union, or employment agency to punish you or any witness for attempting to present the facts in a case. YOUR CIVIL RIGHTS UNDER THE WORKFORCE INNOVATION OPPORTUNITY ACT Santa Ana Local Workforce Development Area 801 W. Civic Center Drive, Suite 200 Santa Ana, CA 92701 (714)565-2600 B, Criminal Complaints In accordance with the WIOA and the implementing code of Federal section 667.600.... Federal handling of criminal complaints and report fraud, abuse and other criminal activity. "All information and complaints involving fraud, abuse or other criminal activity shall be reported directly and immediately to the City of Santa Ana and the Secretary of Labor." II. General Procedures for Handling Non -Criminal Violations of the Act The following procedure is promulgated to meet the requirements of Title 20, of the Code of Federal Regulations, Section 186 through 188 of the WIOA regulations, and Section 181 of the Act (Public Law 105.200: 29 U.S. Code Sec. 2931 et seq.) at the State and LWDA level for the receipt, investigation, hearing, and resolution of complaints by WIOA participants, sub EXHIBIT H recipients, applicants for participation, or financial assistance, labor unions, community based organizations, or any other persons. These procedures provide for resolution of non -criminal complaints arising from the operation of the Santa Ana LWDA. A complaint is defined here as a written expression by a party alleging a violation of the Act, regulations promulgated under the Act, recipient grants, sub agreements, or other specific agreements under the Act, including terms and conditions of employment of such participants in employment training programs. All complaints, amendments and withdrawals shall be in writing. These procedures are intended to resolve matters which concern policies, procedures or action(s) arising in connection with WIOA programs operated by each LWDA grant recipient and sub recipient under the Act. These procedures shall not be construed as affecting any other available legal remedy outside of the WIOA complaint process (i.e., disputes regarding terms and conditions of employment of any employee who is not a participant), either separately or simultaneously, that a person may wish to pursue in the resolution of a non-WIOA complaint. Also, these procedures do not restrict the LWDA grant recipient staff in carrying out informal discussion Procedures do not restrict the LWDA grant recipient staff in carrying out informal discussion and resolution of any problems outside of and without resort to the formal complaint procedure. A. The following principles and rules apply to all complaints at all steps of the complaint procedures: All complaints must be made in writing within 180 days of the alleged occurrence, except complaints alleging fraud or criminal activity. 2. All persons filing a complaint shall be free from restraint, coercion, reprisal, or discrimination. Good faith efforts shall be made to informally resolve the complaint prior to the scheduled hearing. Complainants have the right to withdraw their complaints (in writing) at any time prior to the hearing. A complainant may amend his/her complaint to correct technical deficiencies but not to add issues. 3. Complainants shall have the right to be represented at their own expense by person(s) of their choosing at all levels of the complaint process. 4. Upon enrollment into employment or training, participants shall be provided with a written description of these procedures, including notification of their right to file complaints and instructions for filing. An employer of participants, including private -for -profit employers of participants, may use this or other complaint resolution procedures so long as the participant is informed of the complaint resolution procedure they are to follow and the time frames governing review of complaints are met. EXHIBIT H A "participant", within the meaning of these procedures, is an individual who receives employment -training services under a program funded by Santa Ana LWDA. The Complaint Resolution Procedures contained herein (or the alternative procedures which an employer may use) shall be available to participants to resolve disputes regarding items and conditions of employment of such participants in employment training programs. However, such procedures shall not be used to resolve disputes participant as defined herein. 5. If a complaint does not receive a decision at the LWDA grant recipient level within 60 days of filing the complaint or receives an unsatisfactory decision, the complainant then has a right to request a review of the complaint by the Governor. 6. Complainants must initially file and exhaust LWDA grant recipient/hearing procedures prior to appealing to the State except where the State determines that the LWDA grant recipient's procedures are not in compliance with the State's procedures. III. Procedures for Handling Complaints at the LWDA Level A. Receipt Complaints Pursuant to the WIOA regulations found at 20 CFR, Section 683.600, the LWDA administrative entities have the responsibility to conduct hearings and resolve complaints made by individuals about the administration of programs in the LWDA. "LWDA level" encompasses LWDA administrative entity and employers to which the administrative entity has delegated the complaint resolution process. The following comprise the guidelines for resolving issues arising in connection with WIOA programs operated by the Santa Ana LWDA including resolutions of complaints arising from actions, such as audit disallowances or the imposition of sanctions taken by the Governor with respect to audit findings, investigations or monitoring reports. 1. Form and Filing of Compliant Official filing date of the compliant is the date the written complaint Is received, The filing of the complaint with the Santa Ana LWDA Equal Employment Opportunity Officer shall be considered as a request for hearing and a decision must be issued within 60 days. The complaint must be in writing and must be signed and dated. The complaint should also contain the following information: a. Full name, telephone number, if any, and mailing address of the complainant; b. Full name, telephone number, and mailing address of the agency involved (respondent); c. Clear and concise statement of facts including dates constituting alleged violation; d. What provisions under the Act, regulations, grant or other agreements under the Act, are believed to have been violated; EXHIBIT H e. Remedy sought by the complainant; and f. If the complainant is a private or public entity or corporation, and not a natural person, the filing of the complaint must be duly authorized by the governing body of such entity or corporation. The absence of any of the requested information shall not be a basis for dismissing the complaint. A copy of the complaint must be sent to the respondent and both parties notified of the opportunity for an informal resolution. At each step of the complaint process, the complainant must be notified in writing of the next procedural step. 2. Informal Conference Informal conferences will be utilized by the Santa Ana LWDA to resolve complaints; however, such informal conferences shall not extend the time within which a decision must be issued after receipt of a complaint. Attempts at informal resolution will commence with two (2) weeks of the date of filing of the complaint. a. The EEO Officer will review the case and ascertain facts prior to the conference so that appropriate resolution can take place at the time of this meeting whenever possible. b. Although the complainant should be encouraged to attend this conference, his/her failure to do so should not preclude his/her right to request a hearing on the matter. c. If mutually satisfactory resolution results and the Santa Ana LWDA concurs, the EEO Officer will write a brief report for the file stating the issues and resolution. The matter shall then be considered closed. d. If resolution does not result, the complainant shall be provided the necessary information and assistance to request a hearing if he/she so desires. 3. Request for Hearing a. As in the case of the complaint, the request for a hearing should be put in writing and be filed in person or by mail. A governing board resolution of authorization to appeal should also be submitted when appropriate. The request should be filled with: Daniel Durham Sr. Personnel Analyst — EEO Officer 20 Civic Center Drive, M-24 Santa Ana, CA 92701 (714)647-5330 EXHIBIT H b. A hearing will be scheduled by the EEO Officer within thirty (30) days of the date of filing of the complaint. 4. Notice of Hearing Upon receipt of the request for hearing, the complainant and the respondent will be notified in writing of the hearing ten (10) calendar days prior to the date of the hearing. The ten-day notice may be shortened with the written consent of the parties. A decision will be issued by the Santa Ana LWDA within sixty (60) days of the date of filing of the complaint. The hearing notice shall be in writing and contain the following information: a. The date of notice, name of the complainant, and the name of the party against whom the complaint is filed. b. The date, time and place of hearing before an impartial hearing officer. c. A statement(s) of the alleged violation(s) d. Advise as to where information or assistance may be obtained, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Santa Ana LWDA Equal Employment Opportunities (EEO) Officer who can answer inquiries. B. Conduct of Hearing The hearing shall be conducted in an informal manner with strict rules of evidence not applicable. Unnecessary technicalities should be avoided. It should provide the flexibility to enable adjustment to the circumstances presented. 1. The hearing officer shall have complete independence to obtain facts and make decisions. The hearing officer shall be in a position to render impartial decisions and thus should not be subordinate to the Santa Ana LWDA or its sub recipients. The hearing officer will be selected from a list of names on file with the EEO Officer. 2. Full regard must be given to the requirements of due process to insure a fair and impartial hearing. 3. The hearing office designated by the EEO Officer to function in a quasi-judicial capacity should begin the hearing by summarizing the record and the issue and should explain the manner in which the hearing will be conducted, making sure that everyone involved understands the proceedings. Such explanations should be adapted to the needs of the specific situation. The hearing officer might take testimony under oath or affirmation to give some assurance of veracity to the hearing. so EXHIBIT H 4. The burden of proof should be reasonable and flexible, dependent upon the circumstances of the case involved. The hearing officer determines the order of proof. Generally, the party making the complaint has the obligation of establishing his or her case and should be examined first. 5. The party involved should have the right to be represented (at their own expense) if he/she so desires. Other he/she is limited to his/her own abilities and those to the hearing officer in obtaining testimony in the case. 6. It is important that the hearing officer obtain the fullest information for the record. If the parties involved, or their representatives, do not know how to ask the right or pertinent questions in pursuing their right to due process, it shall be necessary for the hearing officer to step in to have all the materials and relevant facts elicited. 7. The practice in informal hearings is generally not to apply strict rules of evidence in obtaining facts. However, the quantity of evidence required to support a decision on an issue should be sufficiently credible that the state (or other appropriate agency), upon reviewing the decision, would conclude that the decision is supported by substantial evidence. 8. The hearing officer should attempt to negotiate a resolution of the issue at any time prior to the conclusion of the hearing. 9. Within ten (10) days of the conclusion of the hearing, the hearing officer will issue a recommended decision to the LWDA for final determination. The recommended decision shall be in writing and may be accepted, rejected or modified by the Santa Ana Workforce Development Board. C. Issuance of Decision Within sixty (60) calendar days of filing of the complaint, the Santa Ana LWDA shall issue a written decision to all parties by first class mail. The final decision shall contain the following information: 1. The name of the parties involved. 2. A statement of the alleged violation and issues related to the alleged violation. 3. A statement of the facts. 4. The decision and the reasons for the decision. 5. A statement of corrective action, if any, to be taken. 6. Notice of the right to request, within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the decision, a review of the decision by the State Review Panel. EXHIBIT H D. Record of Hearing An administrative file containing support documents on the complaint resolution process hearing conducted will be retained by the Santa Ana LWDA. The purpose of a record is to serve as substantiation of the process followed by the Santa Ana LWDA on the resolution of the issues and the results. This information would then be available for subsequent review in the event the matter is raised with the State. Such records must be retained for a three- year period after the grant has been officially closed out. The Santa Ana LWDA's written decision will be included in the record. Evidence received at the hearing, notes by the hearing officer, stenographer's notes and tape recordings may also be used. E. Establishment of Complaint Procedures In accordance with Section 683.600, each employing agency including private -for -profit employers of participants under the Act is required to establish a complaint procedure for resolving matters relating to the terms and conditions of employment. Employers may operate their own grievance system or may utilize the Santa Ana LWIDA's established procedures under Section 683.600. At a minimum these procedures must include: Written notice, upon enrollment into employment training services, of the scope and availability of such procedures. Employer's grievance procedures shall be set forth in a written document and must meet the regulation mandate that a complaint will be resolved with sixty (60) days from the date the complaint was filed. A copy of employer's grievance procedure shall be provided to each participant upon enrollment in employment training. 2. Written notice, at the time the grievance is filed, of the procedures under which the grievance will be processed. 3. Written notification of the disposition of the grievance and a written decision shall be issued within thirty (30) days of the filing of the grievance unless a present and long established grievance specifically provides other limits; and 4. Written notification of the participant's right to request a review of the employer's decision by the Santa Ana LWDA and the State Review Panel in accordance with Section 683.600. IV. Procedures for Handling Complaints at the State Level Section 181 (c) of the Act and the WIOA regulations at 20 CFR, Section 683.600 (d) requires the Governor to establish a State Review process of complaints filed at the LWDA grant recipient level and of complaints initially filed at the State level. Appeals of decisions issued at the LWDA level including audit disallowances and sanctions shall be reviewed by the State Review Panel. The State Review Panel shall review the record 12 EXHIBIT H established at the LWDA level and shall issue a decision based on the information contained therein. Complaints which may be initially filed at the State level will be heard by an independent hearing officer designated by the State Workforce Investment Division (WID). The hearing officer shall conduct a hearing and issue a recommended decision to the State Panel. The recommended decision shall be in writing and may be accepted, rejected or modified by the State Review Panel. A. Form and Filing of Complaint. 1. Request for State Review of LWDA Level Decisions On receipt of a complainant's request for review because of an unsatisfactory decision, the State shall provide for an independent state review. 2. Filing of Requests for State Review The State Review Panel shall review all LWDA level decisions when a request for review is filed within 10 days of receipt of the adverse decision. Such requests must be filed in writing with the Chief of the WID Office. The request for review should contain the following information: a. Full name, address, and telephone number of the party requesting the review b. Full name, address, and telephone number of the other party c. A copy of the decision d. Brief statement of reasons for review or the section of the LWDA decision to be reviewed including regulatory and statutory citations e. A statement of the relief sought. 3. Complainant Responsibility It is the responsibility of the complainant to include in the request for review a written statement setting forth the facts presented at the LWDA hearing which support the requested relief. The Chief, WID, shall mail a copy of the request for review to the other party and to the LWDA. It shall be the responsibility of the LWDA to submit the complete record including a typed record of the hearing to the Chief, WID, within ten (10) days. B. Conduct of Hearings. 1. Request for Hearing at the State Level 13 EXHIBIT H If no decision has been issued at the LWDA level or the State has determined an audit disallowance or imposed sanctions, the complainant may request a hearing. The hearing officer will then issue a recommended decision to the State's Review Panel for final determination. 2. Filing for Request for Review The request for a State hearing shall be filed within ten (10) days after LWDA should have issued a decision or ten (10) days after the issuance of the audit disallowance or sanction. The request shall be filed directly with the Chief of the WID in writing and should include the following: a. Full name, address, and telephone number of the LWDA b. Name, address, and telephone number of the LWDA C. Copies of complaints made at LWDA level from which no decisions were issued or sanctions and imposed. d. A statement of basis for the request for hearing. 3. Evidentiary Hearing Upon receipt of the request for a State level hearing, a hearing before a designated hearing officer will be scheduled. The hearing will be recorded mechanically or by court reporter. Both parties concerned will have the opportunity to present oral and written testimony under oath, to call and question witnesses In support of his/her position, to present oral and/or written arguments, to examine records and documents relevant to the issue(s), and to be represented. The hearing officer shall issue a written decision, which shall be forwarded to the State Review Panel for final determination. The State Review Panel may accept, reject or modify this recommendation, The decision of the State Review Panel is final except for audit disallowances, which must be approved by the Secretary of Labor C. State Review Panel The State Review Panel will consist of a panel of three representatives from the Employment Development Department: one from the Legal Offices, one from the WID, and one from the Director's office. The panel will issue a written decision, which will be sent to the appropriate parties within thirty (30) days of receipt of the request for State review. 14 EXHIBIT H IN Decisions issued by this panel, under the authority of the Governor, are final. D. Issuance of State Review Decision. The State review will be limited to violations of the WIOA, implementing WIOA regulations or the grant agreement. This review shall be limited to the record established at the LWDA hearing. Procedures for Handling Discrimination Complaints by Participants. A. Complaints on the basis of race, color, or national origin, age, sex, religion, political affiliation or belief, retaliation, and citizenship, where appropriate, must be filed within 180 days of the alleged occurrence. 1. It is the responsibility of the Santa Ana LWDA's Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) Officer to determine jurisdiction and to make the complainant aware of and provide assistance in filing a complaint in accordance with the Santa Ana LWDA's procedure under Section II (A). 15 EXHIBIT H No later than 180 days of alleged discrimination Within 10 days of receipt of unsatisfactory decision or 10 days from date LWDA decision should have been Issued. Handling of complaints filed at LWDA level arising in connection with WIOA programs operated by LWDAs Informal Resolution Process Unsatisfactory Decision or LWDA Decision not issued within 60 days Request for State Review Governor's Decision issued by State Review Panel If no decision issued by State Review Panel Appeal to DOL 16 EXHIBIT H 2. In cases where areas of authority overlap, it is the responsibility of the EEO Officer to advise the complainant of the existence of State, Federal and other proper action agencies, which may also have a bearing. 3. Complainants alleging discrimination under this part will be made aware of their right to file directly with the Office of Civil Rights (OCR), U.S. Department of Labor and applicable procedures. 4. Complainants must file their complaint directly with: Daniel Durham Sr. Personnel Analyst — EEO Officer 20 Civic Center Drive, M-24 Santa Ana, CA 92701 (714)647-5330 VI. Procedures for Handling Disability Complaints by Participants Complaints alleging discrimination on the basis of disability will be filed and processed under the Department of Labor regulations implementing Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 at 29 Code of Federal Regulations Section 32. 1. Complaints must exhaust the Santa Ana LWDA's informal resolution procedures before filing their complaint with OCR. 2. Complainants will be made aware of the 180 days requirement in which to file his/her complaint. A. Procedures at the LWDA Level The complainant shall file his/her complaint directly with the Santa Ana LWDA. Upon receipt of the complaint, the EEO Officer shall investigate and gather information concerning the complaint. An informal conference will be held with the parties concerned in an effort to resolve the issue(s). The complainant has the right to be present and may be represented during the conference. 3. The Santa Ana LWDA shall issue in writing its decision to the complainant no later than thirty (30) days after the filing of the complaint. B. Procedures at the State Level 1. The complainant may appeal to the State if he/she is not satisfied with the decision of the Santa Ana LWDA. 17 EXHIBIT H 2. The Complainant must file his/her appeal as a request for review directly with the Chief WID within ten (10) calendar days after the receipt of the Santa Ana LWDA's decision. 3. The Chief-WID, shall issue a decision no later than thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of the request for review. 4. After the complainant has received a decision or no decision has been received from the Director of Employment Development Department (on behalf of the Governor), the complainant has the right to appeal his/her complaint within thirty (30) calendar days to the Office of Civil Rights (OCR) with the Department of Labor. ss EXHIBIT H No later than 180 days of alleged discrimination Filed within 30 days of LWDA/State Decision or 90 days from date of Initial filing of complaints Filing of complaint on the basis of Disability with LWDA Informal Resolution If no resolution reached o Request for Hearing Notice of Hearing Hearing Conducted LWDA Decision Unsatisfactory Decision or No Decision State Review Governor's Decision Appeal to Assistant Secretary Department of Labor 19 EXHIBIT H Day 1 Day/45 Day 60 Days GLOSSARY OF WIOA TERM AGE DISCRIMINATION ACT — A law passed by Congress in 1975 which prohibits discrimination on the basis of age by any program or activity receiving Federal Funds. APPLICANT — An individual who applies to a subrecipient or contract for services provided under WIOA and who has not yet transitioned to the status of participant. ASSESSMENT — Services designed to determine each participant's employability, aptitudes, abilities and interests and to develop a plan to achieve the participant's employment and related goals; also to identify the available employment and traning activities appropriate for the participant. Testing and counseling may also be used during assessment process. CHARGING PARTY (CP) COMPLAINANT GRIEVANT OR AGGRIEVED PERSON — The person who charges that he/she has been discriminated against under Department of Justice nondiscrimination and civil rights regulations and/or guidelines. DISCRIMINATION — In general, a failure to treat all equally, whether intentional or unintentional; the effect of an action, policy or practice which selects an individual or class of persons to receive unequal treatment. ELIGIBLE NON -CITIZEN — Lawfully admitted permanent resident, aliens, lawfully admitted refugees, and parolees and other individuals authorized by the Attorney General to work in the United States. EMPLOYER — An employer subject to the provisions of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, including state and local governments and any Federal agency subjects to the provisions of Section 717 of the Civil Rights Act, as amended; and any Federal contractor or subcontractor covered by executive Order 11246, as amended. GRIEVANCE — An allegation that something imposes an illegal obligation or burden or denies some equitable or legal right, or causes injustice . INDIVIDUAL WITH A DISABILITY — Any individual who has a physical or mental disability that constitutes or results in a substantial challenge to employment. INTAKE — Includes screening to determine eligibility; to select from eligible applicants those individuals who are most in need and can benefit from program services; to complete procedural requirements necessary to enroll an individual into the program and to refer those not enrolled to other programs. JOINT COMPLAINT — A complaint of employment discrimination covered by Title VII or the Equal Pay Act and by Title VI or Title IX. Individual "joint complaints" are normally investigated by EEOC unless OCR has a compelling reason to investigate. "Joint complaints" alleging discrimination in employment and other practices and pattern or practice "joint complaints" are normally investigated by OCR. 20 EXHIBIT H JURISDICTION — Authority to investigate and resolve complaints against an institution subject to a law or statute which has been assigned to OCR for enforcement, i.e., Title VI, Title IX, etc. PARTICIPANT — Any applicant who has: (1) Been determined eligible for participation upon intake; and (2) Who is receiving subsidized employment, training or services (except post -termination services) funded under the Act, following intake, except for an individual who receives only outreach and/or intake and assessment services. 21 EXHIBIT H Cazarez, Juan From: City of Santa Ana < Certificate- request@ctrax.jdidata.com> Sent: Wednesday, May 24, 2023 3:05 PM To: Goodson, Audrey Subject: Internal Notice of Compliance NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE CITY STAFF: PRINT THIS PAGE AND INCLUDE WITH AGREEMENT TO THE CLERK OF THE COUNCIL Contractor Amfasoft Corp. Name: Project A-2020-194-09 Number: Project Agreement For Workforce Training Name: The Certificate of Insurance (COI) submitted indicates that the coverages are in compliance with the insurance requirements. No further action is required at this time. The compliant coverage(s) are: TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EXPIRATION COI DATE FILE NAME DATE GENERAL LIABILITY 7012997781 11/01/2023 10/20/2022 Amfasoft 11012023.pdf WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' 57WECGE4109 04/03/2024 03/16/2023 Amfasoft WC LIABILITY 04032024. pdf Thank you, City of Santa Ana Risk Management Division in partnership with CTrax Plus Services Team 5/24/2023 6:04 PM 1 NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE CITY STAFF: PRINT THIS PAGE AND INCLUDE WITH AGREEMENT TO THE CLERK OF THE COUNCIL Contractor Amfasoft Corp. Name: Project A-2023-069-18 Number: Project Agreement For Workforce Training - Amfasoft Name: The Certificate of Insurance (COI) submitted indicates that the coverages are in compliance with the insurance requirements. No further action is required at this time. The compliant coverage(s) are: POLICY EXPIRATION FILE TYPE OF INSURANCE COI DATE NUMBER DATE NAME Amfasoft AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 7012997781 11/01/2024 11/20/2023 11012024.pdf ERRORS AND Amfasoft OMISSIONS/PROFESSIONAL A 7012997781 11/01/2024 11/20/2023 11012024.pdf LIABILITY Amfasoft GENERAL LIABILITY 7012997781 11/01/2024 11/13/2023 11012024.pdf Amfasoft WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 57WECGE4109 04/03/2024 03/16/2023 WC EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 04032024.pdf Thank you, City of Santa Ana Risk Management Division in partnership with CTrax Plus Services Team 12/13/2023 11:55 AM NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE CITY STAFF: PRINT THIS PAGE AND INCLUDE WITH AGREEMENT TO THE CLERK OF THE COUNCIL Contractor Amfasoft Corp. Name: Project A-2023-069-18 Number: Project Agreement For Workforce Training - Amfasoft Name: The Certificate of Insurance (COI) submitted indicates that the coverages comply with the insurance requirements. The compliant coverage(s) are: POLICY EXPIRATIOCOI TYPE OF INSURANCE FILE NAME NUMBER N DATE DATE 11/20/202 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 7012997781 11/01/2024 Amfasoft 11012024.pdf 3 ERRORS AND 11/20/202 OMISSIONS/PROFESSIONA7012997781 11/01/2024 Amfasoft 11012024.pdf 3 L A LIABILITY 11/13/202 GENERAL LIABILITY 7012997781 11/01/2024 Amfasoft 11012024.pdf 3 WORKERS 57WECGE41003/27/202CityofSantaAna14478801.p COMPENSATION AND 04/03/2025 9 4 df EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY No further action is required at this time. Thank you, City of Santa Ana Risk Management Division in partnership with CTrax Plus Services Team 3/27/2024 3:11 PM EBUF!)NN0EE0ZZZZ* DFSUJGJDBUF!PG!MJBCJMJUZ!JOTVSBODF UIJT!DFSUJGJDBUF!JT!JTTVFE!BT!B!NBUUFS!PG!JOGPSNBUJPO!POMZ!BOE!DPOGFST!OP!SJHIUT!VQPO!UIF!DFSUJGJDBUF!IPMEFS/!UIJT DFSUJGJDBUF!EPFT!OPU!BGGJSNBUJWFMZ!PS!OFHBUJWFMZ!BNFOE-!FYUFOE!PS!BMUFS!UIF!DPWFSBHF!BGGPSEFE!CZ!UIF!QPMJDJFT CFMPX/!!UIJT!DFSUJGJDBUF!PG!JOTVSBODF!EPFT!OPU!DPOTUJUVUF!B!DPOUSBDU!CFUXFFO!UIF!JTTVJOH!JOTVSFS)T*-!BVUIPSJ\[FE SFQSFTFOUBUJWF!PS!QSPEVDFS-!BOE!UIF!DFSUJGJDBUF!IPMEFS/ JNQPSUBOU;!!Jg!uif!dfsujgjdbuf!ipmefs!jt!bo!BEEJUJPOBM!JOTVSFE-!uif!qpmjdz)jft*!nvtu!ibwf!BEEJUJPOBM!JOTVSFE!qspwjtjpot!ps!cf!foepstfe/ Jg!TVCSPHBUJPO!JT!XBJWFE-!tvckfdu!up!uif!ufsnt!boe!dpoejujpot!pg!uif!qpmjdz-!dfsubjo!qpmjdjft!nbz!sfrvjsf!bo!foepstfnfou/!!B!tubufnfou!po uijt!dfsujgjdbuf!epft!opu!dpogfs!sjhiut!up!uif!dfsujgjdbuf!ipmefs!jo!mjfv!pg!tvdi!foepstfnfou)t*/ DPOUBDU QSPEVDFS OBNF; GBY QIPOF )B0D-!Op*; )B0D-!Op-!Fyu*; F.NBJM BEESFTT; JOTVSFS)T*!BGGPSEJOH!DPWFSBHFOBJD!$ JOTVSFS!B!; JOTVSFE JOTVSFS!C!; JOTVSFS!D!; JOTVSFS!E!; JOTVSFS!F!; JOTVSFS!G!; DPWFSBHFTDFSUJGJDBUF!OVNCFS;SFWJTJPO!OVNCFS; UIJT!JT!UP!DFSUJGZ!UIBU!UIF!QPMJDJFT!PG!JOTVSBODF!MJTUFE!CFMPX!IBWF!CFFO!JTTVFE!UP!UIF!JOTVSFE!OBNFE!BCPWF!GPS!UIF!QPMJDZ!QFSJPE JOEJDBUFE/!!OPUXJUITUBOEJOH!BOZ!SFRVJSFNFOU-!UFSN!PS!DPOEJUJPO!PG!BOZ!DPOUSBDU!PS!PUIFS!EPDVNFOU!XJUI!SFTQFDU!UP!XIJDI!UIJT DFSUJGJDBUF!NBZ!CF!JTTVFE!PS!NBZ!QFSUBJO-!UIF!JOTVSBODF!BGGPSEFE!CZ!UIF!QPMJDJFT!EFTDSJCFE!IFSFJO!JT!TVCKFDU!UP!BMM!UIF!UFSNT- FYDMVTJPOT!BOE!DPOEJUJPOT!PG!TVDI!QPMJDJFT/!MJNJUT!TIPXO!NBZ!IBWF!CFFO!SFEVDFE!CZ!QBJE!DMBJNT/ BEEMTVCS JOTSQPMJDZ!FGGQPMJDZ!FYQ UZQF!PG!JOTVSBODFMJNJUT QPMJDZ!OVNCFS MUS)NN0EE0ZZZZ*)NN0EE0ZZZZ* JOTEXWE DPNNFSDJBM!HFOFSBM!MJBCJMJUZ FBDI!PDDVSSFODF% 9 EBNBHF!UP!SFOUFE DMBJNT.NBEFPDDVS% QSFNJTFT!)Fb!pddvssfodf* 9 NFE!FYQ!)Boz!pof!qfstpo*% QFSTPOBM!'!BEW!JOKVSZ% HFO(M!BHHSFHBUF!MJNJU!BQQMJFT!QFS;HFOFSBM!BHHSFHBUF% QSP. QPMJDZMPDQSPEVDUT!.!DPNQ0PQ!BHH% KFDU 9 % PUIFS; DPNCJOFE!TJOHMF!MJNJU BVUPNPCJMF!MJBCJMJUZ% )Fb!bddjefou* BOZ!BVUPCPEJMZ!JOKVSZ!)Qfs!qfstpo*% PXOFETDIFEVMFE CPEJMZ!JOKVSZ!)Qfs!bddjefou*% BVUPT!POMZBVUPT IJSFEOPO.PXOFEQSPQFSUZ!EBNBHF % )Qfs!bddjefou* BVUPT!POMZBVUPT!POMZ % VNCSFMMB!MJBC PDDVSFBDI!PDDVSSFODF% FYDFTT!MJBC DMBJNT.NBEFBHHSFHBUF% EFESFUFOUJPO%% QFSPUI. XPSLFST!DPNQFOTBUJPO TUBUVUFFS BOE!FNQMPZFST(!MJBCJMJUZ Z!0!O BOZ!QSPQSJFUPS0QBSUOFS0FYFDVUJWF F/M/!FBDI!BDDJEFOU% O!0!B PGGJDFS0NFNCFS!FYDMVEFE@ )Nboebupsz!jo!OI* F/M/!EJTFBTF!.!FB!FNQMPZFF% Jg!zft-!eftdsjcf!voefs EFTDSJQUJPO!PG!PQFSBUJPOT!cfmpxF/M/!EJTFBTF!.!QPMJDZ!MJNJU% EFTDSJQUJPO!PG!PQFSBUJPOT!0!MPDBUJPOT!0!WFIJDMFT!!)BDPSE!212-!Beejujpobm!Sfnbslt!Tdifevmf-!nbz!cf!buubdife!jg!npsf!tqbdf!jt!sfrvjsfe* CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 DFSUJGJDBUF!IPMEFSDBODFMMBUJPO TIPVME!BOZ!PG!UIF!BCPWF!EFTDSJCFE!QPMJDJFT!CF!DBODFMMFE!CFGPSF UIF!FYQJSBUJPO!EBUF!UIFSFPG-!OPUJDF!XJMM!CF!EFMJWFSFE!JO BDDPSEBODF!XJUI!UIF!QPMJDZ!QSPWJTJPOT/ BVUIPSJ\[FE!SFQSFTFOUBUJWF ª!2:99.3126!BDPSE!DPSQPSBUJPO/!!Bmm!sjhiut!sftfswfe/ BDPSE!36!)3127014*Uif!BDPSE!obnf!boe!mphp!bsf!sfhjtufsfe!nbslt!pg!BDPSE BHFODZ!DVTUPNFS!JE; MPD!$; Qbhfpg BEEJUJPOBM!SFNBSLT!TDIFEVMF BHFODZOBNFE!JOTVSFE QPMJDZ!OVNCFS DBSSJFSOBJD!DPEF FGGFDUJWF!EBUF; BEEJUJPOBM!SFNBSLT UIJT!BEEJUJPOBM!SFNBSLT!GPSN!JT!B!TDIFEVMF!UP!BDPSE!GPSN- GPSN!OVNCFS;GPSN!UJUMF; CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 BDPSE!212!)3119012*ª!3119!BDPSE!DPSQPSBUJPO/!!Bmm!sjhiut!sftfswfe/ Uif!BDPSE!obnf!boe!mphp!bsf!sfhjtufsfe!nbslt!pg!BDPSE CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 UIJT!FOEPSTFNFOU!DIBOHFT!UIF!QPMJDZ/QMFBTF!SFBE!JU!DBSFGVMMZ/ XBJWFS!PG!PVS!SJHIU!UP!SFDPWFS GSPN!PUIFST!FOEPSTFNFOU Qpmjdz!Ovncfs;68XFDHF521:Foepstfnfou!Ovncfs; Fggfdujwf!Ebuf;15014035Fggfdujwf!ipvs!jt!uif!tbnf!bt!tubufe!po!uif!Jogpsnbujpo!Qbhf!pg!uif!qpmjdz/ Obnfe!Jotvsfe!boe!Beesftt;BNGBTPGU!DPSQ 4266!LFBSOFZ!TU!TUF!251 GSFNPOUDB:5649 Xfibwfuifsjhiuupsfdpwfspvsqbznfoutgspnbozpofmjbcmfgpsbojokvszdpwfsfeczuijtqpmjdz/Xfxjmmopufogpsdfpvs sjhiu!bhbjotu!uif!qfstpo!ps!pshboj{bujpo!obnfe!jo!uif!Tdifevmf/ Uijt!bhsffnfou!tibmm!opu!pqfsbuf!ejsfdumz!ps!joejsfdumz!up!cfofgju!bozpof!opu!obnfe!jo!uif!Tdifevmf/ TDIFEVMF Bozqfstpopspshboj{bujpogpsxipnzpvbsfsfrvjsfeczdpousbdupsbhsffnfouuppcubjouijtxbjwfsgspnvt/ Foepstfnfou!jt!opu!bqqmjdbcmf!jo!LZ-!OI-!OK!ps!gps!boz!NP!dpotusvdujpo!sjtl CzDzouijbNpsbbu23;34qn-Opw25-3135 Dpvoufstjhofe!cz Bvuipsj{fe!Sfqsftfoubujwf Gpsn!XD!11!14!24 Qsjoufe!jo!V/T/B/ Qspdftt!Ebuf;13033035 Qpmjdz!Fyqjsbujpo!Ebuf;15014036 DATE(MMIDDYY) ACCO" IWCERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 4/2/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Robert Silva NAME: FAX Reliance Insurance Brokers PHONE 925 378-2800 (A/C,No):AIC,No,Ext: 140 Mayhew Way ADDRESS: ROBERT@GETRELIANCE.COM Suite 201 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Pleasant Hill CA 94523 INSURER A: CONTINENTAL CAS CO 20443 INSURED INSURER B: THE HARTFORD 00914 Amfasofl Corp INSURER C: 3155 Kearney St Ste 140 INSURER D: INSURER E: Frcmonl. CA 94538 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MMIDDIWYY) (MMIDDIWYY) LIMITS x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE F XIOCCUR PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 10,000 A Y Y 7012997781 11/01/2024 11/01/2025 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 x POLICY ❑PE O ❑LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY (Ea accident) $ ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) UMBRELLA LIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAB HCLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION PER AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN x STATUTE I ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 �Y B OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N/A Y 57WECGE4109 04/03/2025 04/03/2026 (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ Per Claim 1,000,000 A Errors and Omissions 7012997781 11/01/2024 11/01/2025 General Aggregate 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) See ACORD 101 Tu Tran bYa�gne° APPROVED Nguyen DsgoNguyen 0:1525� 2 By Tu Tran Nguyen at 3:39 prn,Apr 02,2025 00 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City Of Santa Ana ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ATTN:Audrey Goodson AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 801 W.Civic Center Dr.,Suite 200 Santa Ana CA 92701 � 19S8 2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: _ LOC#: '4COOR"® ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED Reliance Insurance Brokers Amfasoft Corp POLICY NUMBER B7012997781,57WECGE4109 CARRIER NAIC CODE CONTINENTAL CAS CO 20443,00911 EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: Certificate Of Liability Insurance 30 days notice of cancellation except 10 days for non-payment of premium.Additional insured status,waiver of subrogation and primary and non-contributory status applies where required by written contract per the attached policy forms regarding General Liability.Waiver of subrogation applies where required by written contract regarding Workers Compensation.30 days notice of cancellation except 10 days for non-payment of premium.City of Santa Ana, its officers, employees,agents,volunteers are named as Additional Insured on this policy pursuant to written contract,agreement or memorandum of understanding.Such insurance as is afforded by this policy shall be primary and any insurance carried by the City of Santa Ana shall be excess and non contributory per endorsement.City will be mailed 30 day written notice of policy cancellation except for cancellation for non payment is 10 Day Notice ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT - CALIFORNIA Policy Number: 57 WEC GE4109 Endorsement Number: Effective Date: 04/03/25 Effective hour is the same as stated on the Information Page of the policy. Named Insured and Address: AMFASOFT CORP 3155 KEARNEY ST STE 140 FREMONT CA 94538 We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) You must maintain payroll records accurately segregating the remuneration of your employees while engaged in the work described in the Schedule. The additional premium for this endorsement shall be 2 % of the California workers' compensation premium otherwise due on such remuneration. SCHEDULE Person or Organization Job Description Any person or organization for whom you are required by written contract or agreement to obtain this waiver of rights from us Countersigned by Authorized Representative Form WC 04 03 06 (1) Printed in U.S.A. Process Date: 02/22/25 Policy Expiration Date: 04/03/26 CNA (B1d. 10-19) BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED AND LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESSOWNERS LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Blanket Additional Insured Provisions A. Additional Insured—Blanket Vendors B. Miscellaneous Additional Insureds C. Additional Provisions Pertinent to Additional Insured Coverage 1.a. Primary—Noncontributory provision 1.b. Definition of"written contract" 2. Additional Insured—Extended Coverage II. Liability Extension Coverages A. Bodily Injury—Expanded Definition B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses D. Fellow Employee First Aid E. Legal Liability—Damage to Premises F. Personal and Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation G. Personal and Advertising Injury—Broadened Eviction H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket I. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED PROVISIONS A. ADDITIONAL INSURED— BLANKET VENDORS Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization (referred to below as vendor) with whom you agreed under a "written contract" to provide insurance, but only with respect to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of "your products" which are distributed or sold in the regular course of the vendor's business, subject to the following additional exclusions: 1. The insurance afforded the vendor does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury"or"property damage"for which the vendor is obligated to pay damages by reason of the a assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages 0 that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; 0 0 b. Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Any physical or chemical change in the product made intentionally by the vendor; d. Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container; e. Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products; p f. Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sale of the product; g. Products which, after distribution or sale by you, have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or for the vendor; or SB146932G (10-19) Page 1 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) h. "Bodily injury" or"property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its employees or anyone else acting on its behalf. However, this exclusion does not apply to: (1) The exceptions contained in Subparagraphs d.or f.; or (2) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. 2. This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization, from whom you have acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. 3. This provision 2. does not apply to any vendor included as an insured by an endorsement issued by us and made a part of this Policy. 4. This provision 2. does not apply if "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products- completed operations hazard" is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by endorsement. B. MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS 1. Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured any person or organization (called additional insured) described in paragraphs 3.a. through 3.j. below whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a"written contract." 2. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, we will not provide the additional insured with: a. A higher limit of insurance than required by such "written contract;" b. Coverage broader than required by such "written contract" and in no event greater than that described by the applicable paragraph a. through k. below; or c. Coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." But this paragraph c. does not apply to the extent coverage for such liability is provided by paragraph 3.j. below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permitted by law. 3. Only the following persons or organizations can qualify as additional insureds under this endorsement: a. Controlling Interest Any persons or organizations with a controlling interest in you but only with respect to their liability arising out of: (1) such person or organization's financial control of you; or (2) Premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while you lease or occupy these premises; provided that the coverage granted to such additional insureds does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or for such additional insured. b. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by you and covered under this insurance but only with respect to the co-owners liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" as co- owner of such premises. c. Grantor of Franchise Any person or organization that has granted a franchise to you, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" as grantor of a franchise to you. SB146932G (10-19) Page 2 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) d. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom you lease equipment, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by your maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. e. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom you lease land, but only with respect to liability for"bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that specific part of the land leased to you, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury,"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. f. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to you, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to you, and provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury,"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. g. Mortgagee,Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee, or receiver's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by you. This insurance does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. h. State or Political Subdivisions A state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization, but only with respect to such government agency or subdivision or political subdivision's s liability for"bodily injury,""property damage"or"personal and advertising injury"arising out of: 0 (1) The following hazards in connection with premises you own, rent, or control and to which this 0 insurance applies: (a) The existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or (b) The construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or (c) The ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or (2) The permitted or authorized operations performed by you or on your behalf. But the coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to: (a) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision; p or (b) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a "written contract,"we will treat as a "written contract"any governmental permit that requires you to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. SB146932G (10-19) Page 3 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) i. Trade Show Event Lessor With respect to your participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom you are required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury"caused by: a. Your acts or omissions; or b. Acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations at the trade show premises during the trade show event. j. Other Person or Organization Any person or organization who is not an additional insured under paragraphs a. through i. above. Such additional insured is an insured solely for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury"for which such additional insured is liable because of your acts or omissions. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to any person or organization: (1) For "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering or failure to render any professional services; (2) For "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard." But this provision (2) does not apply to such "bodily injury"or"property damage" if: (a) It is entirely due to your negligence and specifically results from your work for the additional insured which is the subject to the "written contract"; and (b) The "written contract" requires you to make the person or organization an additional insured for such "bodily injury"or"property damage"; or (3) Who is afforded additional insured coverage under another endorsement attached to this policy. C. ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS PERTINENT TO ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE 1. With respect only to additional insured coverage provided under paragraphs A. and B. above: a. The BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS are amended to add the following to the Condition entitled Other Insurance: This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to an additional insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. However, if a "written contract" requires that this insurance be either primary or primary and noncontributing, then this insurance will be primary and non-contributory relative solely to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. b. Under Liability and Medical Expense Definitions,the following definition is added: "Written contract" means a written contract or agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this policy, provided the contract or agreement: (1) Is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and (2) Was executed prior to: (a) The "bodily injury"or"property damage;"or (b) The offense that caused the"personal and advertising injury"; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. 2. With respect to any additional insured added by this endorsement or by any other endorsement attached to this Coverage Part, the section entitled Who Is An Insured is amended to make the following natural persons insureds. If the additional insured is: a. An individual,then his or her spouse is an insured; SB146932G (10-19) Page 4 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) b. A partnership or joint venture, then its partners, members and their spouses are insureds; c. A limited liability company, then its members and managers are insureds; d. An organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, then its executive officers, directors and shareholders are insureds; or e. Any type of entity, then its employees are insureds; but only with respect to locations and operations covered by the additional insured endorsement's provisions, and only with respect to their respective roles within their organizations. Furthermore, employees of additional insureds are not insureds with respect to liability arising out of: (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising injury" to any fellow employee or to any natural person listed in paragraphs a.through d.above; (2) "Property damage"to property owned, occupied or used by their employer or by any fellow employee; or (3) Providing or failing to provide professional health care services. II. LIABILITY EXTENSION COVERAGES It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the Businessowners Liability Coverage Form. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement to such provision do not apply. A. Bodily injury—Expanded Definition Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "Bodily injury" is deleted and replaced by the following: "Bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence Under Businessowners Liability Conditions, the Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended to add the following: Paragraphs a. and b. above apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence," offense, 0 claim or"suit" is known to: 0 (1) You or any additional insured that is an individual; 0 (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a partnership; 0 (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a limited liability company; 0 (4) Any"executive officer"or insurance manager, if you or an additional insured is a corporation; (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a trust; or (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an additional insured is a political subdivision or public entity. This paragraph applies separately to you and any additional insured. C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses only p for claims arising solely out of their capacity as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital common property, jointly held property, or property transferred from such natural person insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are insureds with respect to such spouses'acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. SB146932G (10-19) Page 5 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) D. Fellow Employee First Aid Coverage In the section entitled Who Is An Insured, paragraph 2.a.1. is amended to add the following: The limitations described in subparagraphs 2.a.1.(a), (b) and (c) do not apply to your "employees" for "bodily injury" that results from providing cardiopulmonary resuscitation or other first aid services to a co-"employee" or "volunteer worker" that becomes necessary while your "employee" is performing duties in the conduct of your business. Your "employees" are hereby insureds for such services. But the insured status conferred by this provision does not apply to "employees" whose duties in your business are to provide professional health care services or health examinations. E. Legal Liability—Damage To Premises 1. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, Exclusion k. Damage To Property, is replaced by the following: k. Damage To Property "Property damage"to: 1. Property you own, rent or occupy, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; 2. Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the "property damage" arises out of any part of those premises; 3. Property loaned to you; 4. Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured; 5. That particular part of any real property on which you or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly in your behalf are performing operations, if the "property damage" arises out of those operations; or 6. That particular part of any property that must be restored, repaired or replaced because "your work" was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraph 2 of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are "your work" and were never occupied, rented or held for rental by you. Paragraphs 1, 3, and 4, of this exclusion do not apply to "property damage" (other than damage by fire or explosion)to premises: (1) rented to you: (2) temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, or (3) to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in Section D— Liability and Medical Expenses Limits of Insurance. Paragraphs 3,4, 5, and 6 of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph 6 of this exclusion does not apply to "property damage" included in the "products- completed operations hazard." 2. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the following paragraph is added, and replaces the similar paragraph, if any, beneath paragraph (14) of the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury: Exclusions c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, I, m, n, and o, do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner or to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section D. Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance. SB146932G (10-19) Page 6 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) 3. The first Paragraph under item 5. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit of the section entitled Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance is replaced by the following: The most we will pay under Business Liability for damages because of "property damage" to any one premises, while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days, is the Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit is the greater of: a. $1,000,000; or b. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit shown in the Declarations. F. Personal and Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 1. Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "personal and advertising injury" is amended to add the following: h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is: (1) Not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) The insured; or (b) Any "executive officer," director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if you are a limited liability company)of the insured; and (2) Not directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person or person by any insured. 2. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury is amended to add the following additional exclusions: (15)Discrimination Relating to Room, Dwelling or Premises Caused by discrimination directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room, dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any insured. (16)Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any insured. 0 (17)Fines or Penalties m Fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. 3. This provision (Personal and Advertising Injury — Discrimination or Humiliation) does not apply if Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by 0 endorsement. G. Personal and Advertising Injury-Broadened Eviction Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "Personal and advertising injury" is amended to delete Paragraph c. and replace it with the following: c. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room dwelling or premises that a person or organization occupies committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or lessor. H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket We waive any right of recovery we may have against: a. Any person or organization with whom you have a written contract that requires such a waiver. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. SB146932G (10-19) Page 7 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. . - / THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT Policy Number: 57 WEC GE4109 Endorsement Number: Effective Date: 04/03/24 Effective hour is the same as stated on the Information Page of the policy. Named Insured and Address: AMFASOFT CORP 3155 KEARNEY ST STE 140 FREMONT CA 94538 We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. SCHEDULE Any person or organization for whom you are required by contract or agreement to obtain this waiver from us. Endorsement is not applicable in KY, NH, NJ or for any MO construction risk Countersigned by Authorized Representative Form WC 00 03 13 Printed in U.S.A. Process Date: 02/22/24 Policy Expiration Date: 04/03/25 CNA (B d. 103 9) BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED AND LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESSOWNERS LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Blanket Additional Insured Provisions A. Additional Insured—Blanket Vendors B. Miscellaneous Additional Insureds C. Additional Provisions Pertinent to Additional Insured Coverage 1.a. Primary—Noncontributory provision 1.b. Definition of"written contract" 2. Additional Insured—Extended Coverage II. Liability Extension Coverages A. Bodily Injury—Expanded Definition B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses D. Fellow Employee First Aid E. Legal Liability—Damage to Premises F. Personal and Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation G. Personal and Advertising Injury—Broadened Eviction H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket I. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED PROVISIONS A. ADDITIONAL INSURED—BLANKET VENDORS Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization (referred to below as vendor) with whom you agreed under a "written contract" to provide insurance, but only with respect to "bodily injury" or"property damage" arising out of"your products" which are distributed or sold in the regular course of the vendor's business, subject to the following additional exclusions: 1. The insurance afforded the vendor does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury"or"property damage"for which the vendor is obligated to pay damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; b. Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Any physical or chemical change in the product made intentionally by the vendor; d. Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container; e. Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products; O f. Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sale of the product; g. Products which, after distribution or sale by you, have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or for the vendor; or SB146932G (10-19) Page 1 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) h. "Bodily injury"or"property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its employees or anyone else acting on its behalf. However, this exclusion does not apply to: (1) The exceptions contained in Subparagraphs d.or f.; or (2) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. 2. This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization, from whom you have acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. 3. This provision 2. does not apply to any vendor included as an insured by an endorsement issued by us and made a part of this Policy. 4. This provision 2. does not apply if "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products- completed operations hazard" is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by endorsement. B. MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS 1. Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured any person or organization (called additional insured) described in paragraphs 3.a. through 3.j. below whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a"written contract." 2. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, we will not provide the additional insured with: a. A higher limit of insurance than required by such "written contract;" b. Coverage broader than required by such "written contract" and in no event greater than that described by the applicable paragraph a. through k. below; or c. Coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." But this paragraph c. does not apply to the extent coverage for such liability is provided by paragraph 3.j.below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permitted by law. 3. Only the following persons or organizations can qualify as additional insureds under this endorsement: a. Controlling Interest Any persons or organizations with a controlling interest in you but only with respect to their liability arising out of: (1) such person or organization's financial control of you; or (2) Premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while you lease or occupy these premises; provided that the coverage granted to such additional insureds does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or for such additional insured. b. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by you and covered under this insurance but only with respect to the co-owners liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" as co- owner of such premises. c. Grantor of Franchise Any person or organization that has granted a franchise to you, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" as grantor of a franchise to you. SB146932G (10-19) Page 2 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) d. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom you lease equipment, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by your maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. e. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom you lease land, but only with respect to liability for"bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that specific part of the land leased to you, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury,"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. f. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to you, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to you, and provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury,"takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. g. Mortgagee, Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee, or receiver's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by you. This insurance does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. h. State or Political Subdivisions A state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization, but only with respect to such government agency or subdivision or political subdivision's 0 liability for"bodily injury,""property damage"or"personal and advertising injury"arising out of: (1) The following hazards in connection with premises you own, rent, or control and to which this insurance applies: N (a) The existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or (b) The construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or (c) The ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or (2) The permitted or authorized operations performed by you or on your behalf. But the coverage granted o by this paragraph does not apply to: (a) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision; p or (b) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a "written contract,"we will treat as a"written contract"any governmental permit that requires you to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. SB146932G (10-19) Page 3 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) i. Trade Show Event Lessor With respect to your participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom you are required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury"caused by: a. Your acts or omissions; or b. Acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations at the trade show premises during the trade show event. j. Other Person or Organization Any person or organization who is not an additional insured under paragraphs a. through i. above. Such additional insured is an insured solely for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury"for which such additional insured is liable because of your acts or omissions. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to any person or organization: (1) For "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering or failure to render any professional services; (2) For "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard." But this provision (2)does not apply to such "bodily injury"or"property damage" if: (a) It is entirely due to your negligence and specifically results from your work for the additional insured which is the subject to the"written contract-, and (b) The"written contract" requires you to make the person or organization an additional insured for such "bodily injury"or"property damage'; or (3) Who is afforded additional insured coverage under another endorsement attached to this policy. C. ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS PERTINENT TO ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE 1. With respect only to additional insured coverage provided under paragraphs A. and B.above: a. The BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS are amended to add the following to the Condition entitled Other Insurance: This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to an additional insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. However, if a "written contract" requires that this insurance be either primary or primary and noncontributing, then this insurance will be primary and non-contributory relative solely to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. b. Under Liability and Medical Expense Definitions, the following definition is added: "Written contract" means a written contract or agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this policy, provided the contract or agreement: (1) Is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and (2) Was executed prior to: (a) The"bodily injury"or"property damage;"or (b) The offense that caused the"personal and advertising injury'; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. 2. With respect to any additional insured added by this endorsement or by any other endorsement attached to this Coverage Part, the section entitled Who Is An Insured is amended to make the following natural persons insureds. If the additional insured is: a. An individual, then his or her spouse is an insured; SB146932G (10-19) Page 4 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) b. A partnership or joint venture, then its partners, members and their spouses are insureds; c. A limited liability company, then its members and managers are insureds; d. An organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, then its executive officers, directors and shareholders are insureds; or e. Any type of entity, then its employees are insureds; but only with respect to locations and operations covered by the additional insured endorsement's provisions, and only with respect to their respective roles within their organizations. Furthermore, employees of additional insureds are not insureds with respect to liability arising out of: (1) "Bodily injury" or "personal and advertising injury" to any fellow employee or to any natural person listed in paragraphs a.through d. above; (2) "Property damage"to property owned, occupied or used by their employer or by any fellow employee; or (3) Providing or failing to provide professional health care services. II. LIABILITY EXTENSION COVERAGES It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the Businessowners Liability Coverage Form. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement to such provision do not apply. A. Bodily injury—Expanded Definition Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of"Bodily injury" is deleted and replaced by the following: "Bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence Under Businessowners Liability Conditions, the Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended to add the following: Paragraphs a. and b. above apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence," offense, claim or"suit" is known to: 0 (1) You or any additional insured that is an individual, (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a partnership; N (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a limited liability company; (4) Any"executive officer"or insurance manager, if you or an additional insured is a corporation; (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a trust; or (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an additional insured is a political subdivision or public entity. This paragraph applies separately to you and any additional insured. C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses only p for claims arising solely out of their capacity as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital common property, jointly held property, or property transferred from such natural person insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are insureds with respect to such spouses'acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. SB146932G (10-19) Page 5 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) D. Fellow Employee First Aid Coverage In the section entitled Who Is An Insured, paragraph 2.a.1. is amended to add the following: The limitations described in subparagraphs 2.a.1.(a), (b) and (c) do not apply to your "employees" for "bodily injury"that results from providing cardiopulmonary resuscitation or other first aid services to a co-"employee" or "volunteer worker" that becomes necessary while your "employee" is performing duties in the conduct of your business. Your "employees" are hereby insureds for such services. But the insured status conferred by this provision does not apply to "employees" whose duties in your business are to provide professional health care services or health examinations. E. Legal Liability—Damage To Premises 1. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, Exclusion k. Damage To Property, is replaced by the following: k. Damage To Property "Property damage"to: 1. Property you own, rent or occupy, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; 2. Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the "property damage" arises out of any part of those premises; 3. Property loaned to you; 4. Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured; 5. That particular part of any real property on which you or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly in your behalf are performing operations, if the "property damage" arises out of those operations; or 6. That particular part of any property that must be restored, repaired or replaced because "your work" was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraph 2 of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are "your work" and were never occupied, rented or held for rental by you. Paragraphs 1, 3, and 4, of this exclusion do not apply to "property damage" (other than damage by fire or explosion)to premises: (1) rented to you: (2) temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, or (3) to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in Section D— Liability and Medical Expenses Limits of Insurance. Paragraphs 3, 4, 5, and 6 of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph 6 of this exclusion does not apply to "property damage" included in the "products- completed operations hazard." 2. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the following paragraph is added, and replaces the similar paragraph, if any, beneath paragraph (14) of the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury: Exclusions c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, I, m, n, and o, do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner or to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section D. Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance. SB146932G (10-19) Page 6 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) 3. The first Paragraph under item S. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit of the section entitled Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance is replaced by the following: The most we will pay under Business Liability for damages because of "property damage" to any one premises, while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days, is the Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit is the greater of: a. $1,000,000; or b. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit shown in the Declarations. F. Personal and Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 1. Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "personal and advertising injury" is amended to add the following: h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is: (1) Not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) The insured; or (b) Any "executive officer," director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if you are a limited liability company) of the insured; and (2) Not directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person or person by any insured. 2. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury is amended to add the following additional exclusions: (15)Discrimination Relating to Room, Dwelling or Premises Caused by discrimination directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room, dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any insured. (16)Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any insured. 0 (17)Fines or Penalties Fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. 3. This provision (Personal and Advertising Injury — Discrimination or Humiliation) does not apply if N Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by endorsement. G. Personal and Advertising Injury-Broadened Eviction Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "Personal and advertising injury" is amended to delete Paragraph c. and replace it with the following: C. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room dwelling or premises that a person or organization occupies committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or lessor. H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket We waive any right of recovery we may have against: a. Any person or organization with whom you have a written contract that requires such a waiver. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. SB146932G (10-19) Page 7 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. . - / THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT Policy Number: 57 WEC GE4109 Endorsement Number: Effective Date: 04/03/24 Effective hour is the same as stated on the Information Page of the policy. Named Insured and Address: AMFASOFT CORP 3155 KEARNEY ST STE 140 FREMONT CA 94538 We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. SCHEDULE Any person or organization for whom you are required by contract or agreement to obtain this waiver from us. Endorsement is not applicable in KY, NH, NJ or for any MO construction risk Countersigned by Authorized Representative Form WC 00 03 13 Printed in U.S.A. Process Date: 02/22/24 Policy Expiration Date: 04/03/25 710/22/2025 E(MM/DD/YYYY) ACORO® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Robert Silva Reliance Insurance Brokers PHONE FAX 925 378-2800 A/C,No,Ext: (A/C,No): 140 Mayhew Way ADDRESS: Robert@getreliance.com Suite 201 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Pleasant Hill CA 94523 INSURER A: CONTINENTAL CAS CO 20443 INSURED INSURER B: THE HARTFORD 00914 Amfasoft Corporation INSURER C: 3155 Kearney St INSURER D: INSURER E: Fremont CA 94538-2268 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MM/DD/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 10,000 A Y Y B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X POLICY ❑ECT ❑LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ A OWNED SCHEDULED B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLYN AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED $ X AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) UMBRELLA LAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LAB HCLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED I I RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X STATUTE ER AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/N E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 BOFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? Fy] N/A Y 57 WEC GE4109 04/03/2025 04/03/2026 Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 Per Claim Limit 1,000,000 A Errors and Omissions B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 Aggregate Limit 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) 30 days notice of cancellation except 10 days for non-payment of premium.Additional insured status,waiver of subrogation and primary and non-contributory status applies where required by written contract per the attached policy forms regarding General Liability.Waiver of subrogation applies where required by written contract regarding Workers Compensation. Tu Trdn °� ysigned dey i1an Nguyen Nguyen°os19-o8004 APPROVED By Tu Tran Nguyen at 2:04 pm,Nov 04,2025 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City Of Santa Ana ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ATTN:Audrey Goodson AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 801 W.Civic Center Dr.,Suite 200 Santa Ana CA 92701 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT Policy Number: 57 WEC GE4109 Endorsement Number: Effective Date: 04/03/25 Effective hour is the same as stated on the Information Page of the policy. Named Insured and Address: AMFASOFT CORP 3155 KEARNEY ST STE 140 FREMONT CA 94538 We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. SCHEDULE Any person or organization for whom you are required by contract or agreement to obtain this waiver from us. Endorsement is not applicable in KY, NH, NJ or for any MO construction risk Countersigned by Authorized Representative Form WC 00 03 13 Printed in U.S.A. Process Date: 02/22/25 Policy Expiration Date: 04/03/26 CNA (Bid. 10-19 BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED AND LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESSOWNERS LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Blanket Additional Insured Provisions A. Additional Insured—Blanket Vendors B. Miscellaneous Additional Insureds C. Additional Provisions Pertinent to Additional Insured Coverage 1.a. Prima —Noncontributory provision 1.b. Definition of "written contract" 2. Additional Insured—Extended Coverage II. Liability Extension Coverages A. Bodily In'u —Expanded Definition B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses D. Fellow Employee First Aid E. Legal Liability—Damage to Premises F. Personal and Advertising In'u —Discrimination or Humiliation G. Personal and Advertising In'u —Broadened Eviction H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket I. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED PROVISIONS A. ADDITIONAL INSURED—BLANKET VENDORS Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization (referred to below as vendor) with whom you agreed under a "written contract" to provide insurance, but only with respect to "bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of "your products" which are distributed or sold in the regular course of the vendor's business, subject to the following additional exclusions: 1. The insurance afforded the vendor does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the vendor is obligated to pay damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability for damages 0 that the vendor would have in the absence of the contract or agreement; 0 b. Any express warranty unauthorized by you; c. Any physical or chemical change in the product made intentionally by the vendor; d. Repackaging, except when unpacked solely for the purpose of inspection, demonstration, testing, or the substitution of parts under instructions from the manufacturer, and then repackaged in the original container; e. Any failure to make such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products; f. Demonstration, installation, servicing or repair operations, except such operations performed at the vendor's premises in connection with the sale of the product; g. Products which, after distribution or sale by you, have been labeled or relabeled or used as a container, part or ingredient of any other thing or substance by or for the vendor; or SB146932G (10-19) Page 1 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB 146932G (Ed. 10-19) h. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the vendor for its own acts or omissions or those of its employees or anyone else acting on its behalf. However, this exclusion does not apply to: (1) The exceptions contained in Subparagraphs d.or f.; or (2) Such inspections, adjustments, tests or servicing as the vendor has agreed to make or normally undertakes to make in the usual course of business, in connection with the distribution or sale of the products. 2. This insurance does not apply to any insured person or organization, from whom you have acquired such products, or any ingredient, part or container, entering into, accompanying or containing such products. 3. This provision 2. does not apply to any vendor included as an insured by an endorsement issued by us and made a part of this Policy. 4. This provision 2. does not apply if "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products- completed operations hazard" is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by endorsement. B. MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS 1. Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured any person or organization (called additional insured) described in paragraphs 3.a. through 3.j. below whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a "written contract." 2. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, we will not provide the additional insured with: a. A higher limit of insurance than required by such "written contract;" b. Coverage broader than required by such "written contract" and in no event greater than that described by the applicable paragraph a. through k. below; or c. Coverage for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." But this paragraph c. does not apply to the extent coverage for such liability is provided by paragraph 3.j. below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permitted by law. 3. Only the following persons or organizations can qualify as additional insureds under this endorsement: a. Controlling Interest Any persons or organizations with a controlling interest in you but only with respect to their liability arising out of: (1) such person or organization's financial control of you; or (2) Premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while you lease or occupy these premises; provided that the coverage granted to such additional insureds does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or for such additional insured. b. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by you and covered under this insurance but only with respect to the co-owners liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" as co- owner of such premises. c. Grantor of Franchise Any person or organization that has granted a franchise to you, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" as grantor of a franchise to you. SB146932G (10-19) Page 2 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB 146932G (Ed. 10-19) d. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom you lease equipment, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by your maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury" takes place prior to the termination of such lease. e. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom you lease land, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that specific part of the land leased to you, provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury," takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. f. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to you, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to you, and provided that the "occurrence" giving rise to such "bodily injury" or "property damage" or the offense giving rise to such "personal and advertising injury," takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The insurance hereby afforded to the additional insured does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. g. Mortgagee,Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee, or receiver's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by you. This insurance does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of or for such additional insured. h. State or Political Subdivisions A state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization, but only with respect to such government agency or subdivision or political subdivision's m liability for"bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of: (1) The following hazards in connection with premises you own, rent, or control and to which this s insurance applies: (a) The existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or (b) The construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or (c) The ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or (2) The permitted or authorized operations performed by you or on your behalf. But the coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to: (a) "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of _ operations performed for the state or government agency or subdivision or political subdivision; _ or (b) "Bodily injury" or "property damage" included within the "products-completed operations hazard." With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a "written contract,"we will treat as a "written contract" any governmental permit that requires you to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. SB146932G (10-19) Page 3 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB 146932G (Ed. 10-19) i. Trade Show Event Lessor With respect to your participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom you are required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" caused by: a. Your acts or omissions; or b. Acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations at the trade show premises during the trade show event. j. Other Person or Organization Any person or organization who is not an additional insured under paragraphs a. through i. above. Such additional insured is an insured solely for "bodily injury," "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" for which such additional insured is liable because of your acts or omissions. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to any person or organization: (1) For "bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the rendering or failure to render any professional services; (2) For "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products-completed operations hazard." But this provision (2)does not apply to such "bodily injury" or"property damage" if: (a) It is entirely due to your negligence and specifically results from your work for the additional insured which is the subject to the "written contract"; and (b) The "written contract" requires you to make the person or organization an additional insured for such "bodily injury" or "property damage"; or (3) Who is afforded additional insured coverage under another endorsement attached to this policy. C. ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS PERTINENT TO ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE 1. With respect only to additional insured coverage provided under paragraphs A.and B.above: a. The BUSINESSOWNERS COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS are amended to add the following to the Condition entitled Other Insurance: This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to an additional insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis. However, if a "written contract" requires that this insurance be either primary or primary and noncontributing, then this insurance will be primary and non-contributory relative solely to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. b. Under Liability and Medical Expense Definitions, the following definition is added: "Written contract" means a written contract or agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this policy, provided the contract or agreement: (1) Is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and (2) Was executed prior to: (a) The "bodily injury" or "property damage;" or (b) The offense that caused the "personal and advertising injury"; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. 2. With respect to any additional insured added by this endorsement or by any other endorsement attached to this Coverage Part, the section entitled Who Is An Insured is amended to make the following natural persons insureds. If the additional insured is: a. An individual, then his or her spouse is an insured; SB146932G (10-19) Page 4 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB 146932G (Ed. 10-19) b. A partnership or joint venture, then its partners, members and their spouses are insureds; c. A limited liability company, then its members and managers are insureds; d. An organization other than a partnership, joint venture or limited liability company, then its executive officers, directors and shareholders are insureds; or e. Any type of entity, then its employees are insureds; but only with respect to locations and operations covered by the additional insured endorsement's provisions, and only with respect to their respective roles within their organizations. Furthermore, employees of additional insureds are not insureds with respect to liability arising out of: (1) "Bodily injury" or 'personal and advertising injury" to any fellow employee or to any natural person listed in paragraphs a.through d.above; (2) "Property damage"to property owned, occupied or used by their employer or by any fellow employee; or (3) Providing or failing to provide professional health care services. II. LIABILITY EXTENSION COVERAGES It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the Businessowners Liability Coverage Form. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement to such provision do not apply. A. Bodily injury—Expanded Definition Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "Bodily injury" is deleted and replaced by the following: "Bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. B. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence Under Businessowners Liability Conditions, the Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended to add the following: Paragraphs a. and b. above apply to you or to any additional insured only when such "occurrence,' offense, claim or"suit" is known to: N W (1) You or any additional insured that is an individual; s (2) Any partner, if you or an additional insured is a partnership; 0 (3) Any manager, if you or an additional insured is a limited liability company; 0 (4) Any"executive officer" or insurance manager, if you or an additional insured is a corporation; (5) Any trustee, if you or an additional insured is a trust; or (6) Any elected or appointed official, if you or an additional insured is a political subdivision or public entity. This paragraph applies separately to you and any additional insured. C. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses only for claims arising solely out of their capacity as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital common property, jointly held property, or property transferred from such natural person insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are insureds with respect to such spouses'acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. SB146932G (10-19) Page 5 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB146932G (Ed. 10-19) D. Fellow Employee First Aid Coverage In the section entitled Who Is An Insured, paragraph 2.a.1. is amended to add the following: The limitations described in subparagraphs 2.a.1.(a), (b) and (c) do not apply to your 'employees' for "bodily injury' that results from providing cardiopulmonary resuscitation or other first aid services to a co-'employee' or "volunteer worker" that becomes necessary while your 'employee' is performing duties in the conduct of your business. Your 'employees' are hereby insureds for such services. But the insured status conferred by this provision does not apply to "employees' whose duties in your business are to provide professional health care services or health examinations. E. Legal Liability—Damage To Premises 1. Under B.Exclusions, 1.Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, Exclusion k. Damage To Property, is replaced by the following: k. Damage To Property "Property damage"to: 1. Property you own, rent or occupy, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's properly; 2. Premises you sell, give away or abandon, if the 'property damage" arises out of any part of those premises; 3. Properly loaned to you; 4. Personal properly in the care, custody or control of the insured; 5. That particular part of any real properly on which you or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly in your behalf are performing operations, if the "property damage' arises out of those operations; or 6. That particular part of any properly that must be restored, repaired or replaced because 'your work' was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraph 2 of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are 'your work" and were never occupied, rented or held for rental by you. Paragraphs 1, 3, and 4, of this exclusion do not apply to "property damage' (other than damage by fire or explosion)to premises: (1) rented to you: (2) temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, or (3) to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in Section D— Liability and Medical Expenses Limits of Insurance. Paragraphs 3,4,5, and 6 of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph 6 of this exclusion does not apply to 'property damage' included in the 'products- completed operations hazard.' 2. Under B.Exclusions, 1.Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the following paragraph is added, and replaces the similar paragraph, if any, beneath paragraph (14) of the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury: Exclusions c,d,e,f,g,h,i, k, I,m,n,and o, do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner or to the contents of premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in Section D.Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance. SB146932G (10-19) Page 6 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. SB 146932G (Ed. 10-19) 3. The first Paragraph under item S. Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit of the section entitled Liability And Medical Expenses Limits Of Insurance is replaced by the following: The most we will pay under Business Liability for damages because of "property damage" to any one premises, while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days, is the Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit is the greater of: a. $1,000,000; or b. The Damage to Premises Rented to You Limit shown in the Declarations. F. Personal and Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 1. Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "personal and advertising injury' is amended to add the following: h. Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is: (1) Not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) The insured; or (b) Any "executive officer,' director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if you are a limited liability company)of the insured; and (2) Not directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person or person by any insured. 2. Under B. Exclusions, 1. Applicable to Business Liability Coverage, the exclusion entitled Personal and Advertising Injury is amended to add the following additional exclusions: (15)Discrimination Relating to Room, Dwelling or Premises Caused by discrimination directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room, dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any insured. (16)Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any insured. m (17)Fines or Penalties m Fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. m "s 3. This provision (Personal and Advertising Injury — Discrimination or Humiliation) does not apply if Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded either by the provisions of the Policy or by 0 endorsement. 0 { G. Personal and Advertising Injury-Broadened Eviction Under Liability and Medical Expenses Definitions, the definition of "Personal and advertising injury' is amended to delete Paragraph c. and replace it with the following: C. The wrongful eviction from, wrongful entry into, or invasion of the right of private occupancy of a room dwelling or premises that a person or organization occupies committed by or on behalf of its owner, landlord or lessor. H. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket We waive any right of recovery we may have against: a. Any person or organization with whom you have a written contract that requires such a waiver. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. SB146932G (10-19) Page 7 of 7 Copyright,CNA All Rights Reserved. Nguyen, Tu Tran From: Najera, Luisa Sent: Tuesday, November 4, 2025 11:28 AM To: Nguyen,Tu Tran Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft You're welcome. For the renewal only. Kindest regards, W4,wNoyera,l Acting Risk Manager City of Santa Ana I Human Resources Department 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 Office: 714-647-6959 • ` 'WA Email: lnaieraQsanta-ana.org City Hall hours are 8 a.m.to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday,and 8:00 a.m.to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. Click here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Nguyen,Tu Tran <tnguyen20@santa-ana.org> Sent:Tuesday, November 4, 2025 11:01 AM To: Najera, Luisa <Inajera@santa-ana.org> Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Hi Luisa, Thank you! Would this apply for just this renewal or moving forward? Kind regards, Tu Tran Nguyen I Risk Management Technician City of Santa Ana - Human Resources Department 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 Office: 714-647-5141 Email: TNguyen20(aD_santa-ana.orq I santa-ana.orq/human-resources Linkedln I nstagram i City Hall hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Najera, Luisa <Inaiera@santa-ana.org> Sent:Tuesday, November 4, 2025 10:45 AM To: Nguyen,Tu Tran <tnguyen20@santa-ana.org> Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Hi Tu, The $1M aggregate for PL is acceptable. Kindest regards, Lu4iwNoyera,l Acting Risk Manager City of Santa Ana I Human Resources Department 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 Office: 714-647-6959 ' •1 W MQ -A Email: Inaiera(Qsanta-ana.org City Hall hours are 8 a.m.to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday,and 8:00 a.m.to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. Click here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Nguyen,Tu Tran <tnguyen20@santa-ana.org> Sent:Tuesday, November 4, 2025 10:40 AM To: Najera, Luisa <Inaiera@santa-ana.org> Subject: FW: Request COI Review: Amfasoft Hi Luisa, Following up on this review request to waive Vendor's $2M aggregate. Kind regards, 2 Tu Tran Nguyen I Risk Management Technician City of Santa Ana - Human Resources Department n 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 u „m Office: 714-647-5141 Email: TNguyen20CcDsanta-ana.orq I santa-ana.org/human-resources Linkedln I nstagram City Hall hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. Click here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: RMD Sent:Wednesday, October 29, 2025 9:43 AM To: Najera, Luisa <Inaiera@santa-ana.org> Subject: FW: Request COI Review: Amfasoft Hi Luisa, Amfasoft is requesting that RMD waive the $21VI aggregate requirement and accept their current policy limit of $1 M aggregate. They mentioned that it was previously approved before with the Affidavit, but I stated that they already have the PL insurance and the Affidavit wouldn't apply. It seems like a waiver for the PL was accepted previously. Please advise. Professional Liability Erro t and 1ni ion T isurance appropriates Consultant's P rofemi o n, with Iimit no IeSS than 1,000 tO 00 per o ecurrence or $2,000,000 aggregate. Based on their scope of service, they will provide workforce training under the Workforce Training Program. They provide vocational courses working with industry experts and employers in the hi-tech information technology industry. 3 Missioin Arnfaso t aims to Provi&voraiional Cows , workh*with industry experts and employers in the hi-tech information technology industry.1be,miss on of AnAmoft is to provide camer enhancement courses to help build the skills of qualified professionals and beginners.Our faculty and staff shm in a caammitxnent to ensuring that opportustities, programs,and services avails c to its students are:comprehensive aa4 structured to serve as foundations as they pursue a wide array of ea rs in industry,gave nmcnt,and service. ,Amfasoft aims to brim quO f`ed faculty who have good working experience in softwaro industries into contact with students who aspire to develop their skills and excel in their carc,ers. A contimous eaabmtim of student progress,faculty perfonnance and the tools and techniques heeded for ceTtif cadom or job placement help us to constantly imprmve and provide a productive environinent for ai]1 students. Kind regards, Tu Tran Nguyen I Risk Management Technician City of Santa Ana - Human Resources Department 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 rV Office: 714-647-5141 Email: TNguyen20(aD-santa-ana.orq I santa-ana.orq/human-resources Linkedln I nstagram City Hall hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. Click here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Goodson, Audrey<AGoodson@santa-ana.org> Sent:Wednesday, October 29, 2025 9:27 AM To: RMD<rmd@santa-ana.org> Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Tu, Amfasoft reminded me that Cynthia did accept the waiver last year instead of having them increasing the aggregate to 2,000,000. Farhana is concerned that it will be an extra cost to her school. Attached is what Cynthia accepted last year. Amfasoft is requesting that we waive the 2,000,000. Account Clerk 11 Santa Ana WORK Center 1 801 W. Civic Center Dr., Suite 200 1 Santa Ana, CA 92701 714.565.2672 1 aRoodson@santa-ana.orR d4r4W & 4ftZd4A& 4 From: RMD<rmd@santa-ana.org> Sent:Wednesday, October 29, 2025 8:08 AM To: Goodson, Audrey<AGoodson@santa-ana.org> Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Hi Audrey, Unfortunately, they already have Professional Liability insurance coverage, so the Affidavit would not be valid. They would have to meet the $21VI aggregate. This can be met through an Umbrella/Excess policy as well. Kind regards, Tu Tran Nguyen I Risk Management Technician City of Santa Ana - Human Resources Department e 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 Office: 714-647-5141 Email: TNguyen20CaD-santa-ana.orq I santa-ana.orq/human-resources I Linkedln I nstagram City Hall hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. .. here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Goodson, Audrey<AGoodson@santa-ana.org> Sent:Wednesday, October 29, 2025 7:01 AM To: RMD<rmd@santa-ana.org> Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Will this work? Account Clerk II Santa Ana WORK Center 1 801 W. Civic Center Dr., Suite 200 Santa Ana, CA 92701 714.565.2672 1 aRoodson@santa-ana.orR 2avoe � & 4M1&d& From: RMD<rmd@santa-ana.org> Sent:Thursday, October 23, 2025 12:50 PM To: Goodson, Audrey<AGoodson@santa-ana.org>; farhana@amfasoft.com 5 Cc: robert@getreliance.com Subject: RE: Request COI Review:Amfasoft Hi Audrey, In reviewing the COI, the following is missing: 1. Required policy limits for Professional Liability a. Current: $1 M per occurrence and $1 M aggregate b. Required: $1 M per occurrence and $2M aggregate tbUrJr i iun yr urt:NM i IUMD LEi W A Errom awi Omissions g 701 997781 1 IM11=5 1 1141f 26 "h QC DIDTIhU nC Kind regards, Tu Tran Nguyen I Risk Management Technician City of Santa Ana - Human Resources Department n 20 Civic Center Plaza I Santa Ana, CA 92701 Office: 714-647-5141 Email: TNguyen20(aD_santa-ana.orq I santa-ana.orq/human-resources Linkedln I nstagram City Hall hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. every other Friday. Click here for a list of observed holidays and Friday closure dates. The mySantaAna mobile app puts the power of the Santa Ana city government in the palm of your hand! The free app allows residents to quickly and easily report issues to the City, access City services, and find news and events. It is available to download from the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Click here to report an issue directly from the City website. From: Goodson, Audrey<AGoodson@santa-ana.org> Sent:Thursday, October 23, 2025 9:22 AM To: RMD<rmd@santa-ana.org> Subject: Request COI Review: Amfasoft america NOTE: Please read the directions carefully as our template has changed as of 0710112022. Directions for submitting: 1. One (1) Contractor or Agreement per submission. 2. Complete Subject Line by entering Contractor/Vendor name. 3. Complete email template and attach documents: a. For Standard COI Review attach insurance documents and relevant documents including agreement, contract, PO/quote, waivers, application, permit, etc. 6 b. For New Contractor or New Agreement attach Agreement 4. You will receive an auto reply confirming receipt of request. 5. Risk Management will monitor the progress of request and notify sender upon approval. 6. If you have questions, please call Risk Management at x5470. Request Type (check only one): ®Standard COI Review — Risk Management will review and approve insurance documents submitted. This applies to PO, Event, Reservations, Permit and Agreements. E]New Contractor or New Agreement — Risk Management will request insurance documents from Contractor/Insured Contact in accordance with agreement. All fields required to advance the process— do not delete or modify. City Contact Department: CDA Project Manager Name: Audrey Goodson Project Manager Email: agoodson(a)-santa-ana.org Contractor/Insured Contact Business Name: Amfasoft Agreement Number and A-2023-069-18 Agreement Link: http://clerk/weblink/DocView.aspx?id=137178&searchid=d4bdal a6- abl d-46c0-a534-b3f4c9ddOfl f&dbid=1 Vendor Contact Name: Farhana Ahmed Vendor Contact Phone: 510-770-6748 Vendor Email Address: farhana(a-)_amfasoft.com Contact Name: Robert Silva Contact Phone: 925-378-2606 Contact Email Address: robe rt(a)_getreIiance.com Account Clerk I Santa Ana WORK Center 1 801 W. Civic Center Dr., Suite 200 1 Santa Ana, CA 92701 714.565.2672 1 agoodson@santa-ana.org 7 ® DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACC OR" � CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 4/7/2026 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Robert Silva Reliance Insurance Brokers PHONE FAX 925 378-2800 A/C,No,Ext: (A/C,No): 140 Mayhew Way ADDRESS: Robert@getreliance.com Suite 600 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Pleasant Hill CA 94523 INSURER A: CONTINENTAL CAS CO 20443 INSURED INSURER B: HARTFORD CAS INS CO 29424 Amfasoft Corp INSURER C: 3155 Kearney St Ste 140 INSURER D: INSURER E: Fremont CA 94538 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MM/DD/YYYY) (MM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 10,000 A Y Y B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X POLICY ❑ECT ❑LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ A OWNED SCHEDULED B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLYN AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED $ X AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) UMBRELLA LAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LAB HCLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED I I RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X STATUTE ER AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/N E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 BOFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? Fy] N/A Y 57 WEC GE4109 04/03/2026 04/03/2027 Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 Per Claim Limit 1,000,000 A Errors and Omissions B 7012997781 11/01/2025 11/01/2026 Aggregate Limit 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) 30 days notice of cancellation except 10 days for non-payment of premium.Additional insured status,waiver of subrogation and primary and non-contributory status applies where required by written contract per the attached policy forms regarding General Liability. APPROVED CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION By Tu Tran Nguyen at 10:36 am,Apr07,2026 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City Of Santa Ana ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ATTN:Audrey Goodson AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 801 W.Civic Center Dr.,Suite 200 Santa Ana CA 92701 � ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ItThe Hartford THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT - CALIFORNIA Policy Number: 57 WEC GE4109 Endorsement Number: Effective Date: 04/03/26 Effective hour is the same as stated on the Information Page of the policy. Named Insured and Address: AMFASOFT CORP 3155 KEARNEY ST STE 140 FREMONT CA 94538 We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) You must maintain payroll records accurately segregating the remuneration of your employees while engaged in the work described in the Schedule. The additional premium for this endorsement shall be 2 % of the California workers' compensation premium otherwise due on such remuneration. SCHEDULE Person or Organization Job Description Any person or organization for whom you are required by written contract or agreement to obtain this waiver of rights from us Countersigned by Authorized Representative Form WC 04 03 06 (1) Printed in U.S.A. Process Date: 02/22/26 Policy Expiration Date: 04/03/27